Home

Owners Manual - ESD

1. oooccccooonioonoc 90 Headlamp pattern adjusting 95 Headlamp pattern adjustment Active Bending Lights ccceceeee 96 Headla Sra 335 Headphones battery replaceMment cccssceeeeeees 272 WIIESS ines 271 Headphones sockelt 231 270 272 Head restraint centre Seat Bal cocccccccccononincanoncanononon 86 Wed aiinsir anaana 86 87 Heated washer Nozzles cooccccnncccnnicoco 101 Heat eens 163 rearview and door Mirrors 106 rear WINDOW cwscissencetandacnnsepenevnnaseienstans 106 SO nes ee are ann ee eee 161 Heat reflecting windscreen 103 High engine temperature ccccccceeeees 301 High pressure headlamp washing 101 Hill Descent Control ccccccccsseseeeeeeeees 134 HomeLink sare anainncnndiannamnindvaneiienanennaeseanaens 140 Home safe lightinNo o ccccoonnccnncnnnnn o 95 e o Sr seteeweetees 89 PPP 89 IAQS Interior Air Quality System 157 IC Inflatable CurtaiM cccooocicicocicccnncononaro 28 ignition KEYS ciccsescsntontinceesosngecienioninseenarition 82 liso APPPPOPORO07 U0OM e un 48 Indicator lamps POC wsssenacsssieverarrsierdunasies 50 Inflatable Ulsa 28 Information and warning symbols 76 Information button PCC 50 Information CiSPlAYS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 75 Infotainment system ooccccocninnncinonnnuonnns 226 Dasi
2. 117 e RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system 270 l l Bisiance Warning S f 189 pe avigation Infotaiment 279 BS te engine eemalbattery 2 e Siipeoatety A E 192 ry CO A 120 Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp ECOnD RIN Gorsewes ctr cectesennrntenen ere teee 126 POSSUM ClEWECWIOM cen coceroccreccemnncnencnnacne 196 ABRES CE AWD aaa orcos oocooc cons 131 Driver Alert System DAC ccccceees 203 OOD A 132 Driver Alert System LDW cmmc 206 HDC MINDescent Control a ama 134 Park assist syst e ea e a eens 209 Parkmg Drake rinata ere ee oe ees 136 Park assist CAMera 0 ccceeecceeeeeeeeeees 212 A eerie eae ese 140 BLIS Blind Spot Information System 215 Comfort inside the passenger compart MCT Cir tere ent tcs 219 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 5 GD Table of contents 06 During your journey Eare A a ere ree egg area lt gt 8 Diving with astrailer A A fieing andiiegcovery EF ASEEN 07 Wheels and tyres tc ne 312 Changing wheels ccccssceeeeeseeeeeees 316 Tyre pressure O cee eeceere eer 319 Warning triangle and first aid kit 320 Emergency puncture repair TMK 321 6 E Option accessory for more information see Introduction gt A O A o 08 Maintenance and service Engine compartment ossea n 328 LIMOS litera cee n
3. 22 KEY SWIC OM arar 24 AIRBAG PP OOUUE uo 22 Airbag system cisma encara 21 Air CONCITIONING cacon 163 SINGH A e 156 Air Conditioning AC cccccccsseeseeeeeeees 163 Air distribution 158 165 Air quality system IAQS ieee 164 A E a a OSA A 158 ip y A 66 alarm indica cocoriotosaaa oia ces 66 alarm Signals sssrinin 67 TALENS E AP 66 checking the Alarm cccccsecesseeeneeees 50 AMA 66 deactivating a triggered alarm 67 reduced alarm level ccccssceseeenees 67 testing the alarm SySteM ooocooccincccncco 67 o A a 111 Allergy and asthma inducing sub SACOS omar conan 15 All wheel drive AWD c cccceceseeseeeeees 131 All Wheel Drive AWD 0ccccseeeeeeeee 131 Approach light duration 49 95 Audio headphones SOcCket occocccccccccconiocnnos 231 rear control Pane AAA 231 SMN Suso sti 233 234 SUIMOUNG darian 226 234 audi SST ets 228 AUGO SVS siira 226 UNC ON S eee eiA 233 OVEIVISW oasian ian 228 Audio VOLUME iecsicctrccinssactncsxncnsinctacunssagsannds 229 ONONE nitrato ie lencia idos 261 phone media player ooccccccconnnncccoomm 261 ring Signal pPhON6 occcooccccnccccncncnnononos 261 Auto climate control settings 163 Automatic Car WasSh8S ooocccoccccncccnnccnnnnnos 360 Automatic Je DO assiinaddaicnn ein 120 manual gear positions Geartronic 121 TOWING ANC recOVeIY occooccccncc
4. 0cee 335 CANO Ai Oasan ea 340 dipped beam halogen cccceeeeee 336 direction indicatorS ooccccnnnnioncninn 338 e innnan 338 lamp housing reaf 339 lamp housing rear direction indica ION q APR o 339 main beam Xenon laMp occccocccn oo 337 main beam halog N coooccccccncnnccccnnncnn 337 number plate lighting 339 parking laMpS occcoccccocccoccncncnccnnnnonnnnno 337 side marker laMpS occoocccocccconinoncnnnnns 338 vanity MIO ssiawists condnesiadeniiaiapigatenscetened 340 DIGIT SWITCHES simios 90 Loading cardo areas 294 sp e o e 294 mounting points 295 HOO HOA E 294 Lock confirmation saca norsdcaados 48 10 Alphabetical Index E 10 Alphabetical Index Locking unlocking ars y E PPP Poo 60 ale ocacion taguacsecter 61 Locks automatic IOCKING sion 60 MG AA ental mm 60 LOGI Ole seieetovcsetacnsneiactaueastcananseaeeceuen 60 DOS US rerasan cesnoaes seeot atentsecentes 381 Lubricants Capaciti8s occcconccccconnccannnos 381 Main dipped beam see Lightning 90 Maintenance UIST VO OO carino 361 MAKING or Susanne test 260 Manual EDO itcticsontinceanieccatenctisstccincahacs 120 GSI Gear selector assistance 127 TOWING ANC FECOVETY ccesceceeeeeeeeeees 307 Manual gear positions Geartronic 121 Max TOOT JOa secos rre 372 Media Bluetooth eceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 250 media p
5. IMPORTANT Certain objects e g chains thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the signal shadow and are then temporarily not detected by the sensors the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone e n which case pay extra attention and manoeuvre reposition the car particu larly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre there may be a high risk of damage to vehicles or other objects since the sensors are unable to function optimally Rear parking assistance E ENERE G017833 The distance covered to the rear of the car is about 1 5 metres The acoustic signal for obstacles behind comes from one of the rear loudspeakers Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged The system must be deactivated when revers ing with a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar or similar otherwise they would trigger the sensors Rear parking assistance is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used Option accessory for more information see Introduction Front parking assistance Y G021424 The distance covered in front of the car is about 0 8 metres The acoustic signal for obstacles in front comes from one of the front loudspeak ers Front parking assistance is active up to 15 km h The lamp in the button is illuminated in order to indicate that the system is activated When
6. ORC The car s media player can only play the audio files via the Bluetooth function 1 Applies to High Performance High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia i rr 7 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Overview Centre console control panel VOL volume 2 MEDIA key Navigate in the menu by turning TUNE 4 Confirm your selection or go to the menu by pressing OK MENU EXIT leads up in the menu system stops the function in progress O Short presses are used to scroll between audio files Long presses are used to fast forward and rewind audio files Media Bluetooth If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console For a description of the buttons in the steering wheel see page 230 For a description of the remote control see page 256 Menus The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key pad For general information on menu naviga tion and menu structures see page 279 Pair and connect external device The connection of an external device takes place in different ways depending on whether or not it has been previously paired A maxi mum of 10 external devices can be paired Pairing takes place once per external device To connect a device for the first time follow the instructions below
7. Hole for key blade to loosen the cover If central locking cannot be activated with the PCC e g if the batteries are discharged then the driver s door can be opened with the PCC s detachable key blade see page 51 To access the lock cylinder the door handle s plastic cover must be removed this is also done with the key blade i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 1 Press the key blade approx 1 cm straight up into the hole on the underside of the door handle cover do not prize gt The plastic cover loosens automatically by means of the torque when the blade is pushed straight up and into the open ing 2 Then insert the key blade in the lock cylin der and unlock the door 3 Refit the plastic cover after unlocking When the driver s door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened the alarm is trig gered It is switched off by inserting the PCC in the ignition switch see page 67 Key memory driver s seat and door mirrors PCC memory function If several people each with a PCC approach the car then the settings for seat and mirrors are implemented for the person who opens the driver s door After the driver s door has been opened by person A with PCC A but person B with PCC 02 Locks and alarm Keyless drive B shall drive the settings can be changed in three ways e Standing by the driver s door or sitting behind the steering wheel pe
8. If the car is raised with a workshop jack posi tion the jack against the front edge on the engine s subframe Do not damage the splashguard under the engine Ensure that the workshop jack is posi tioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack Always use axle stands or similar If you raise the car using a two pillar workshop lift ensure that the front and rear lift arms are fixed under the lifting points See preceding illustration Opening and closing the bonnet LEH ly 1 q gi ES A o o 9 2 o o 0 Pull the handle by the pedals You will hear when the catch releases Move the catch to the left and open the bonnet The catch hook is located between the headlamp and grille see illus tration WARNING Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed Engine compartment overview TI E The appearance of the engine compartment may vary depending on engine variant Coolant expansion tank 2 Power steering fluid reservoir Engine oil dipstick Radiator E Filler opening for engine oil O Brake and clutch fluid reservoir left hand drive Battery Relay and fuse box engine compartment 1 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick 5 cyl diesel O Filling washer fluid lO Air filter WARNING High voltage from the ignition system The voltage in the ignition system is highly dan gerous The remote control key must
9. 1 Repeatedly press on MEDIA until Bluetooth is shown release and wait a second or press OK MENU Press OK MENU When Add device is shown press OK MENU 4 Check that the external device is searcha ble visible via Bluetooth see the manual for the external device 5 Press OK MENU gt The infotainment system searches for external devices in the vicinity The search may take a little while The devi ces detected are specified with their respective Bluetooth name in the cen tre console TV screen 6 Select the external device you want to pair with and press OK MENU 7 Enter the series of numbers that is shown in the centre console TV screen via the external device s keypad and press the external device s button to confirm the selection The external device is paired and connected automatically to the infotainment system Change audio file by pressing CS on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad Automatic connection When the Bluetooth function is active and the last external device connected is in range it is connected automatically When the infotain ment system searches for the last device con nected its name is shown in the TV screen To connect to another device press EXIT Con 05 Infotainment system nect a new external device see Change to another external device below Change to another external device It is possible to change a connected device with another device
10. Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu News settings gt News News from selected station all stations The radio can only interrupt for news from the selected station or all stations in the RDS net work 3 Factory settings Goin FM mode to FM menu gt News settings Set news favourite to change Programme types PTY The PTY function can be used to select one or more programme types such as pop music and serious classic The PTY symbol indicates that the function is active This function allows programme types broadcast within a set sta tion s RDS network to break through 1 Activate in FM mode by first selecting the programme types under FM menu gt Advanced settings PTY settings gt Select PTY 2 Then the PTY function must be activated under FM menu Advanced settings gt PTY settings Receive traffic bulletins from other networks An indicator is shown in the TV screen when PTY is activated Deactivation of the PTY function is performed in FM mode under FM menu Advanced settings gt PTY settings Receive traffic bulletins from other networks Selected pro gramme types PTY are not reset Resetting and removing PTY are performed under FM menu Advanced settings gt PTY settings gt Select PTY gt Clear all PTY search This function searches the entire wavelength for the selected programme type 1 In FM mode select one or more PTY under FM menu Advanced settin
11. Climate settings gt Automatic blower adjust Choose between Low Normal or High e Low Automatic fan control Low airflow is prioritised e Normal Automatic fan control e High Automatic fan control A more intense airflow is prioritised For a description of the menu system see page 149 Temperature control The temperature can be adjusted with the knob For ECC the temperature for the JE driver s side and the passen d 3 ger side can be set sepa gt rately When the car is started the most recent setting is resumed Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher lower temperature than the actual temperature required AC Air conditioning on off When the lamp in the AC but ton illuminates the air condi tioning is controlled by the system s automatic function This way incoming air is cooled and dehumidified When the lamp in the AC button is switched off the air conditioning is disconnected Other functions are still controlled automatically When the max defroster function is activated the air conditioning is switched on automati cally so that the air is dehumidified at the maxi mum setting AC Max defroster Used to quickly remove mist ing and ice from the wind screen and side windows Air flowing to the windows The light in the defroster button illuminates when the function is active W The following als
12. For more information on the car s main battery gaged see page 119 and 392 Temporarily reduced Start Stop function due Battery Support to high current take off means G044747 A Left hand drive car B Right hand drive car 1 Cold start 760 120 e The engine auto starts without the driver de E depressing the clutch pedal Battery for starting 2 Support as CCA A The support battery normally requires no more service than the normal battery that is used for Size 278x175x19 150x90x106 starting A workshop should be contacted in LxWxH 0 the event of questions or problems an author mm ised Volvo workshop is recommended Capacity 70 8 Ah A The values do not apply to the standby battery in cars with D3 engine and automatic gearbox B In accordance with the SAE standard C Largest possible size 08 1 Auto start can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position 2 The battery for starting is described in detail on page 345 gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 347 08 Maintenance and service Battery IMPORTANT 08 If the following instruction is not observed then the Start Stop function may temporar ily cease to work after the connection of an external battery or battery charger e The negative battery terminal on the car s main battery must never be used for connecting an external battery or battery charger only the car chassis
13. H Fully insert the key blade Press the key blade down and hold For information on the key blade see page 51 E Move the gear selector from the P position 2 Models T4 T4F and T5 Automatic gearbox Powershift D Automatic gear positions M Manual gear positions Powershift is a six stage automatic gearbox that has double mechanical clutch discs in contrast to a conventional automatic gearbox A conventional automatic gearbox has a hydraulic torque converter instead that trans fers power from engine to gearbox Powershift transmission operates in the same way and has similar controls and functions as the Geartronic automatic transmission descri bed in the previous section Powershift or Geartronic In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift transmis sion this can be verified by checking the des ignation on the decal number 5 under the bonnet see page 368 The designation MPS6 means that there is Powershift trans mission otherwise it is Geartronic automatic transmission HSA The HSA Hill Start Assist function means that the pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the foot is moved from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal before setting off or reversing uphill The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver acceler ates To bear in mind The transmission s double clutch has overload
14. IMPORTANT Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise Maintenance of adaptive cruise control control system and a coordinated spacing sys components must only be performed at a tem workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Automatic gearbox Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced functionality with the adaptive cruise control s Queue Assistant see page 183 1 NOTE The illustration is schematic details may vary depending on car model i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 179 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 180 Adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system The driver must inter vene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles Nor for oncoming slow or stationary vehi cles and objects Do not use the adaptive cruise control for example in city traffic in dense traffic at junctions on slippery surfaces with a lot of water or slush on the road in heavy rain snow in poor visibility on winding roads or on slip roads The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly measured by a radar sensor Cruise control regulates the speed with acceleration and braking It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used by cruise con trol The brake pedal moves when the cruis
15. gt Scan Teletext It is possible to read Teletext Follow these steps 1 Pressthe button on the remote con trol 2 Enter the page number 3 digits with the number keys 0 9 to select page gt The page is shown automatically Enter new page number or press the remote control buttons gt to go to the next page Return to TV screen with EXIT or by pressing the button on the remote control It is also possible to control the teletext with the coloured buttons on the remote control Information about the current programme Press the INFO button in order to display the information about the current programme the next programme and its start time If the INFO button is pressed once more then addi tional information on the current programme TV can sometimes be displayed such as start and end times and a brief description of the current programme For more information on the INFO button see page 233 To return to the TV picture wait several sec onds or press EXIT Picture settings The settings for brightness and contrast can be adjusted For more information see page 246 The reception is lost Ifthe reception for the TV channel that is being shown disappears then the picture will freeze Shortly after this a message appears informing that the reception has been lost for the current TV channel and a new search for the channel continues When the reception returns the dis play of the
16. ooonccccnninocnniononicnonocconononaninnos 119 E DE feet E A E 120 EGO nme atte e E 126 Al wh A scien ceccoesseccocsesscoseseccsneesccneecccenseccsneccoosesssonns 131 POr LEIE A a csieocieeccsecseetdeeecocadsecaeeceerecmecdeeness 132 ADORI DescentCGontio den rc a a a 134 Parking Drake San aa a A 136 y HomeLinkS AMAS Me 0 a AA 140 3 70 Option accessory for more information see Introduction YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT d 03 Your driving environment Instrument overview Left hand drive 2 ee 690 8000 O Menus and messages direction indicators main dipped beam trip computer Cruise control Horn airbags Combined instrument panel Menu audio and phone control START STOP ENGINE key Ignition switch Hazard warning flashers Door handle Control panel Menu control and audio system 90 93 146 170 Way eS 22 89 1 9 148 230 258 21 9 Ns 82 93 60 65 103 105 148 230 279 MOI oe 0060 8G 88 Control panel for climate control Gear selector Controls for active chas sis Four C Wipers and washing Steering wheel adjust ment Parking brake Bonnet opener Seat adjustment Headlamp control opener for fuel filler flap and tailgate 156 120 174 100 101 89 136 328 84 61 90 289 F i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment
17. Sensor location e The sun sensor is located on the top side of the dashboard e The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel e The outside temperature sensor is located on the door mirror e The humidity sensor is located by the inte rior rearview mirror Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects Side windows and sunroof To ensure that the air conditioning works opti mally the side windows and sunroof if speci fied should be closed Misting windows Remove misting on the insides of the windows by primarily using the defroster function To reduce the risk of misting keep the win dows clean and use window cleaner e Option accessory for more information see Introduction Temporary shut off of the air conditioning When the engine requires full power e g for full acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer the air conditioning can be temporarily switched off There may then be a temporary increase in temperature in the passenger compartment Condensation In warm weather condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car This is normal Ice and snow Remove ice and snow from the climate control system air intake the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen Fault tracing and repair Engage a workshop that has authorisation for the fault tracing and repair of the climate con trol system Volvo
18. VOLVO V70 amp XC70 OWNERS MANUAL Web Edition Volvo for life DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo In order to increase your enjoyment of the car we recommend that The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your you familiarise yourself with the equipment instructions and mainte passengers Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world Your Volvo nance information contained in this owner s manual has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements GD Table of contents 01 Safety o AA E e 18 PNDAGS ecco tee ee near eee ee 21 Activating deactivating the airbag 24 Side airbags SIPS bags cooccccccnccncccoo 26 IMmarabl ICurtain IC M S 28 WELLES PA AA 29 When the systems deploy om 31 Sale nimode A MON 32 Sii aroty M S 33 4 E Option accessory for more information see Introduction AA O AS A o 00 Introduction Important information oe Volvo and the environment c 0cceeee 02 Locks and alarm Remote control key key blade 48 Phivacy IOCKING epa 53 Battery replacement remote control key FA eee eames ta eater ae aes 55 ey ccs el Ce S Si Berio UNIOCKING WEBBR ss0eeseeeeee BE 60 Ginlemsatety ISerks SERERA 65 O ee
19. km h Front Rear Rear Front rear kPa B kPa kPa kPa 230 260 225 55 R 16 0 160 210 260 260 225 50 R 17 1 2 2 3 2 ven 60 80 80 300 300 T6 0 160 230 210 260 260 260 245 40 R 18 160 270 270 290 290 225 55 R 16 0 160 220 210 260 260 260 225 50 R 17 160 260 260 270 270 z Ds 245 45 R 17 0 160 230 210 260 260 260 245 40 R 18 160 260 260 270 270 01 10 00 111 09 Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure Tyre size Speed Load 1 3 persons ECO pressure km h Front Rear Rear Front rear kPa kPa kPa kPa 220 260 09 Specifications 225 55 R 16 0 160 210 260 260 2S 225 50 R17 160 260 260 270 270 T4 245 45 R17 s 0 160 230 210 260 260 260 15 245 40 R 18 160 260 260 270 270 y DRIVe E 0 160 230 210 260 260 260 205 60 R 16 160 270 270 290 290 Temporary Spare Tyre max 80 420 420 420 420 A Economical driving B In certain countries there is the bar unit beside the SI unit pascal 1 bar 100 kPa C Certain markets 01 10 00 11 Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure 09 09 Specifications Tyre size Speed Load 1 3 persons ECO pressure km h Front Rear Rear Front rear kPa kPa kPa kPa 260 215 65 R 16 O 160 230 230 260 260 225 55 R 17 All engines 235 50 R 18 160 240 240 280 280 235 45 R 19 Temporary Spare Tyre max 80 420 420 420 420 A Economical driving B In certain countries there is the
20. 167 010 111 Symbols in the display 09 Meaning Page Information symbols in the roof console display 09 Specifications o nee 9 Symbol Meaning Page Rain sensor 100 CoA Seatbelt reminder 19 Driver Alert System 204 Airbag passenger 24 25 No seat activated Driver Alert Sys 204 207 fee Airbag passenger 25 tem Lane Depar seat deactivated ture Warning Driver Alert Sys 207 tem Lane Depar ture Warning Driver Alert Sys 204 tem Time for a break Option accessory for more information see Introduction 407 az 10 Alphabetical Index A A V AUX IDU asnicar 272 ACC Adaptive cruise control 179 Active Bending Lights ABL 91 Active chassis FOURA C 0ccceees 174 Active Xenon headlamps ccssccseeeeees 91 AdaptatiON ccoccccccccncncccnccncconanonanonanncnannns 118 Adapting driving characteristics 174 Adaptive cruise COntrol cccsecceeeeeees 179 TAU MACN sostenidas 186 radar SCVISON socdscasemnssutchasnacncsynaaeiccesions 185 Adaptive cruise control fault tracing 186 Additional heater Diese l 169 Adjusting headlamp pattern 95 halogen headlaMp ccccssecseeeeeeeeees 96 Adjusting the steering wheel 89 Airbag activating deactivating PACOG 24 driver s and front passenger side
21. 2 Press OK MENU gt New programming is started Programming can be cancelled with EXIT If can take up to a minute to program a channel group if both Band lll and LBand are selected For more information on wavelength see page 242 Navigation in channel group list Ensemble To navigate in and access the channel group list turn TUNE The name of the Ensemble is shown in the upper part of the TV screen When scrolling to the new Ensemble the name changes to the new one A thick grey line sep arates the two channel groups from each other e Service Shows channels irrespective of the channel group to which they are allo cated The list can also be filtered using the selection of programme type PTY filtering see below Scanning The function automatically searches the cur rent wavelength for strong stations When a station is found it is played for approx 8 sec onds before scanning is resumed When a sta tion is playing back it is saved as a preset in the usual way For more information on presets see Preset below Goin DAB mode to DAB menu Scan to start scanning ORC Scanning stops if a station is saved Scanning can also be selected in DAB PTY mode In which case only channels of the pre selected programme type are played Programme type PTY Various types of radio programmes can be selected using the programme type function There are a number of different programme types which
22. 2 5T8 T4C T4F T5 3 2 T6 DRIVe D3 D5 D5 Engine code B5254T10 B4164T B4164T2 B4204T7 B6324S5 B6304T4 D4162T D5204T3 D5244711 P D5244T15 170 4800 132 5700 132 5700 177 5500 179 6400 224 5600 84 3600 120 3500 158 4000 158 4000 231 4800 180 5700 180 5700 240 5500 243 6400 304 5600 115 3600 163 3500 215 4000 215 4000 Torque Nm rpm 340 1700 4800 240 1600 5000 240 1600 5000 320 1800 5000 320 3200 440 2100 4200 270 1750 2500 400 1500 2750 420 1500 3250 440 1500 3000 A Engine code component and serial number can be read on the engine see page 368 B Certain markets C DRIVe for certain markets D Manual gearbox E Automatic gearbox al om o fom 5 HON o MN gt ES 83 0 79 79 87 5 84 82 0 75 81 0 81 0 81 0 932 81 4 81 4 83 1 96 93 2 88 3 a7 93 2 93 2 Swept volume litres Zoe 1596 1 596 1268 Shs 2 953 1 560 1 984 2 400 2 400 Com pression ratio 9031 10 0 1 10 0 1 10 0 1 10 8 1 9 3 1 16 01 16 5 1 16 5 1 165 1 3 2 T6 D3 DRIVe D3 AWD D5 AWD D5 AWD Engine code B6324S5 B6304T4 D5204T3 D5244117 D5244T11 D5244T15 Output kW rpm 179 6400 224 5600 120 3500 120 4000 158 4000 158 4000 243 6400 304 5600 163 3500 163 4000 215 4000 215 4000 Torque Nm rpm 320 3200 440 2100 4200 400 1500 2750 420 1500 2500 420 1500 3250 440 1500 3000 A Engine code component and ser
23. 5 C or lower the maximum running time of the parking heater is 50 minutes The car must be outdoors when the parking heater is used When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from the right hand wheel hous ing which is perfectly normal Refuelling Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel A level is too low the parking heater will be Mt EN switched off automatically and a message DA appears on the information display Acknowl vorvo 31301658 MIA edge the message by pressing the indicator stalk READ button once see page 167 IMPORTANT Repeated use of the parking heater com bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car s battery is recharged adequately to replace WARNING the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis Warning label on fuel filler flap Fuel which spills out can be ignited Switch off the fuel driven heater before starting to refuel Check the information display to see that the parking heater is switched off When it is running the information display shows Park heat ON Parking on a hill If the car is parked on a steep hill the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater iy Option accessory for more information see Introduction
24. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash ing hours setting 3 Select the required hour using the thumb wheel 4 Briefly press RESET to move to the flash ing minutes setting 5 Select the required minute using the thumbwheel 6 Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting 7 Press RESET to activate the timer After setting Park heat timer 1 a second start time can be programmed with Park heat timer 2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Set the alternative time in the same way as Park heat timer 1 Deactivating a timer started heater A timer started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed Pro ceed as follows 1 Press READ 2 Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text Park heat timer 1 or 2 gt The text ON flashes on the display 3 Press RESET gt The text OFF is shown with a constant glow and the heater is switched OFF A timer started heater can be switched off in accordance with the instructions in the section Direct start and immediate stop see page 168 Clock timer The heater s time is connected to the car s clock NOTE All timer programming will be cleared if the car s clock is reset General information about the additional heater In cold climate zones an additional heater may be required to obtain the correct operating temperature in the engine and to obtain suffi
25. Fasten the bags with strap and secure the carrying handle in the hooks Remember that using the electrical socket with the engine switched off involves the risk of discharging the car s battery i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 297 06 298 06 During your journey Cargo area Safety net G024628 Storage space safety net cassettes A rollable safety net comprising two cassettes has a storage space under the cargo area floor hatch Securing the net cassettes G024629 The two part safety net cassette is secured on the rear of the backrest The narrowest cas sette is secured on the left hand side seen from the tailgate 1 Fold the rear seat s backrest forward see page 87 2 Align the cassette s anchor rails in front of the backrest attachment lugs ED 3 Slide the cassette into the attachment lugs 4 Fold back and lock the backrests e Removing the cassettes takes place in reverse order Using the safety net ELLIE T AT Da aM z Option accessory for more information see Introduction Pull the net up from the cassettes The net is self locking after about 1 minute if the rear seat s backrests are raised ED Pull up the right hand section of the net using its strap ED Insert the rod in the mounting on the right hand side and then press it forward the rod locks in with a click Ie Pull out the rod s telescope section and Click it in
26. Inc erkl rer herved at utstyret Bluetooth Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF gt gt 09 Specifications 09 Type approva O OSES approval Ce China RTZ BEA MAP AEH mAH Bee PTE PIR RA FH 1 br BAP TLE EON i AEB DEPARA ER PRE TE E FHM 2 4 2 4835 GHz MEA FIN EIRP REI 10dBi IN lt 100 mW ER lt 20 dBm O Mm RAMA ee R lt 10dBi IN lt 20 dBm MHz EIRP E El O O O ie O De BMA IR 20 ppm RERI GN DE OOF DV BUY E2 5 Ra LE HE LP lt 36 dBm 100 kHz 30 1000 MHz lt 33 dBm 100 kHz 2 4 2 4835 GHz lt 40 dBm 1 MHz 3 4 3 53 GHz lt 40 dBm 1 MHz 5 725 5 85 GHz lt 30 dBm 1 MHz HE 1 12 75 GHz NETH A ECAC ER MARA CLF UL TN OT RETRATA IMEI ELE I RR a oe FIT AP IE WTC Ze eI IE IDA IEE FPR IA BR A E 4 AFA pT RICA HL DARA TCG I SP TOL BER IT I i eh NP 5 PEE AMA BAA ES o Type approval Taiwan EES FE IBC A BEES TR E PAR ES E A NN E EI EDEN EA BT VR EARL EM E Be Ss REE ABI gt EESHA gt IO BP AE gt EUA MAR A gt RRRA FR RARE gt Sa SH AECA GR CLS BYE Ree A SE EP LEE e CCAB10LP0230T7 09 Specifications 09 09 Specifications 010 11 09 Type approval CAI South ME YE Korea Volvo Car Korea NEXT BE N25 IAM2101V Al amp Bluetooth Audio Navigation Radio E E AM2 1 At EFE March 2010 Alpine Electr
27. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 199 Driver Alert Sys Service The system is disengaged required e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Personal preferences Increased sensitivity This option increases Settings are made from the centre console s sensitivity an alarm is triggered earlier and display screen via the menu system in MY fewer limitations apply CAR From there search and locate Settings gt Car settings Driving support systems gt Lane Departure Warning For information on how the menu system is used see page 148 Select from the options On at start up This option sets the function in standby mode each time the engine is started Otherwise the same value as when the engine was switched off is obtained if Option accessory for more information see Introduction General Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console s display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle Parking assistance sound level can be adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal using the centre console s VOL knob or in the car s menu system MY CAR see page 148 Parking assistance is available in two variants e Rear only e Both front and rear e Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver s own responsibility during parking e The sensors have bli
28. SS WARNING une ns Tyre speed class must at least correspond with The car must be fitted with tyres which have the same or a higher load index LI and ote d Mini itted speed ERA SLOP Speed NI PM e SpE speed rating SS than specified If a tyre Tyre dimensions rating is specified in the table see page 387 225 50R17 98W with too low a load index or speed rating is l l The only exception to these conditions is win used it may overheat 07 The dimensions are stated on all car tyres ter tyres both those with metal studs and those Example of designation without where a lower speed rating may be used If such a tyre is chosen the car must not 225 Tyre width mm be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre for example class Q can be driven at a 50 Ratio between tyre wall height and maximum of 160 km h tyre width 07 316 Removing Set up the warning triangle see page 320 if a wheel must be replaced at a busy location The car and jack must be on a firm horizontal sur face 1 Apply the parking brake and engage reverse gear or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox Check that the jack is not damaged that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question which is indicated on the jack s label The label also indicates the jack s maximum lift capacity at a specified minimum lift
29. The adaptive cruise control ACC Adaptive Caen anal hels ihe dri intai f The driver must always be observant with ruise Control helps the driver maintain a safe regard to the traffic conditions and intervene distance from the vehicle ahead The cruise when the adaptive cruise control is not control provides a more relaxing driving expe maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis rience on long journeys on motorways and long tance straight main roads in smooth traffic flows The adaptive cruise control cannot handle The driver sets the desired speed and time all traffic weather and road conditions interval to the car in front When the radar Read the whole of this section for informa detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the tion on the limitations of the adaptive cruise car the speed is automatically adapted to that control The driver must be familiar with this 04 When the road is clear again the car returns to information before using the adaptive cruise the selected speed control i l If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or VOE AYET AWAYE DearS Es jselrel els iol a AEN i maintaining the correct distance and speed ap Warning lamp braking by driver required set to the standby mode and the car comes too even when the adaptive cruise control is close to a vehicle in front then the driver is being used 2 Steering wheel keypad warned by Distance Warning see page 189 about the short distance Radar sensor
30. Towing eye The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right hand side of the bumper front or rear 06 o A t 3 0 I nN E at A o KO Take out the towing eye that is located under the floor hatch in the cargo area 2 The cover for the towing eye s attachment point is available in two variants which must be opened in different ways Open the variant with a recess using a coin or similar inserted in the recess turning it outwards Then turn out the cover completely and remove it The second variant has a marking along one side or in a corner Press the mark ing with a finger and fold out the oppo site side corner at the same time using acoin or similar the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange Turn in the towing eye firmly e g using the wheel wrench After use unscrew the towing eye and return it to its place Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper IMPORTANT The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch Call a recovery service for recovery assistance On certain cars with towbar fitted the towing eye cannot be attached in the rear bracket Attach the towrope in the towbar For this reason it is advisable to store the detachable towbar s towball in the car Recovery Call a recovery service for recovery
31. Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car to decrease the risk of skidding Ensure that tyres of the same type and dimensions and also the same make are fitted to all four wheels Follow the recommended tyre pressures specified in the tyre pressure table see page 389 Tyre care Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged Tyres age and decompose even if they are hardly ever or never used The func tion can therefore be affected This applies to all tyres that are stored for future use Exam ples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discol oration New tyres D A o 5 t o o Tyres are perishable After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity characteristics gradually deteriorate For this reason aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them This is espe cially important with regard to winter tyres The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture This is the tyre s DOT marking Department of Transportation and this is stated with four digits for example 1510 The tyre in the illustration was manufac tured in week 15 of 2010 Summer and winter tyres When summer and winter wheels are changed the wheels should be marked with which side of the car they were mounted on for exampl
32. Wipers and washing gt gt 101 D 03 Your driving environment Wipers and washing Wiper reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window wiping The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged If the rear window wiper is already on at con ue tinuous speed no change is made On cars with rain sensor the rear window wiper is activated with reversing if the sen sor is activated and it is raining 2 This function intermittent wiping when reversing can be deactivated Visit a workshop Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop 03 Your driving environment d Windows rearview and door mirrors Heat reflecting windscreen windscreen with no heat reflecting film see the highlighted area in the above illustration Laminated glass The glass is reinforced which pro vides better protection against break ins and improved sound insu lation in the passenger compartment 03 The windscreen and other windows have lami nated glass Water and dirt repellent coating cy Windows are treated with a coating that improves the view in difficult weather conditions Maintenance see _ er page 361 Areas where IR film is not applied Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice A 47 mm as id control a oe from the windows Use the defroster to 4 Switch for electric child safety locks and remove ice
33. at one speed while video files are fast forwar ded rewound at several speeds Repeatedly press the buttons 3 to increase the fast forward rewind speed for video files Release the button to return to viewing at normal speed Music recognition Gracenote If the car is equipped with navigation then there is a hard drive in the car that contains a database for music recognition of CD audio discs The database contains the most popular songs at the moment If the media player gets a hit in the database then the album title and artist name for the media are displayed and each track shows track title artist and album If the current CD audio disc is not found in the database then the CD text from the disc is used If there is no CD text on the disc then only Track 1 Track 2 etc is displayed 3 it Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place 244 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Media player Scan This function plays the first ten seconds of each disc track audio file To scan 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Scan gt The first 10 seconds of each disc track or audio file are played 3 Cancel the scan with EXIT the disc track or audio file being played back will con tinue playing Random This function plays the tracks in random order To listen to the tracks in random order 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Random 3 Press OK MENU to activate deactivate the fu
34. must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions Be sure to attach the trailer s safety cable to D IMPORTANT Removing the towbar Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch 1 Sc 8 the remainder ofthe towbar should be clean and dry Turn the locking wheel down fully until it comes to a stop Hold it in this position while pulling the towbar rearward and upward WARNING E Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the unlocked position car see page 303 gt gt 06 During your journey 06 306 Driving with a trailer Ey Push the protective cover until it snaps tight Trailer Stability Assist TSA The TSA system Trailer Stability Assist serves to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake The TSA function is part of the DSTC system Dynamic Stability and Traction Control see page 172 Function The snaking phenomenon can occur with any car trailer combination Normally snaking occurs at extremely high speeds But there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds 70 90 km h if the trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly distributed e g too far back In order for snaking to occur there must be a triggering factor e g e Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind e Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole e Sweeping steering whe
35. needs to be loaded Depending on the quality of the disc and the quantity of information there may be a certain delay before playback starts Disc eject A disc remains in the ejected position for about 12 seconds after which it is inserted back into the player for safety reasons Pause When the volume is turned down completely the media player is paused When the volume is increased it starts again Playback and navigation CD audio discs Turn TUNE to access the disc s playlist and navigate in the list Use OK MENU to confirm the selection of the disc track and start play i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system 05 gt gt 243 CS 05 Infotainment system 05 Media player back Press EXIT to cancel and exit the playlist A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist s root level Disc tracks can also be changed by pressing on ri 3 on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad Burned discs audio video files Turn TUNE to access the disc s playlist folder structure and navigate in the list structure Use OK MENU to confirm either selection of sub folder or start of playback of the selected audio video file Press EXIT to either stop and exit the playlist or go up back in the folder structure A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist s root level Audio video files can also be changed by pressing Kea Y gt gt on the centre console or
36. switch off the engine and start it again e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Peyi Message There is a message on the speedometer s display Read it 04 and Constant glow for System check when the engine is started 2 seconds Flashing light DSTC system is being activated DSTC Sport mode is activated SPORT O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 174 Adapting driving characteristics Active chassis Four C Active chassis Four C Continously Controlled Chassis Concept regulates the characteris tics of the shock absorbers so that the car s driving characteristics can be adjusted There are three settings Comfort Sport and Advanced Comfort This setting means that the car is perceived as being more comfortable on rough and uneven road surfaces Shock absorption is soft and the movement of the body is smooth and gentle Sport This setting means that the car is perceived as being more sporty and is recommended for more active driving Steering response is faster than in the Comfort mode Shock absorption is harder and the body follows the road in order to reduce rolling during cornering Advanced This setting is only recommended on very even and smooth road surfaces The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi mum roadholding and rolling in bends is further minimised Operation Chassis settings Use the buttons in the centre console to change
37. 18 kg D X OK IL C X OK IL S 01 Safety 01 Child safety Type of child seat Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats DAT TT X OKA IUL B1 X OKA IUL Front facing child seat 9 18 kg B A X OK IUL X The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and or size class IL Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model limited or semi universal categories IUF Suitable for front facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class A Volvo recommends rear facing child seats for this group 01 Safety 9 Child safety 01 Wi i i ih Upper mounting points for child seats E N o 5 Y gt jo The car is equipped with upper mounting points for certain front facing child seats These mounting points are located on the rear of the seat The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front facing child seats Volvo recommends that small children should sit in rear facing child seats to as late an age as possible For cars with folding head restraints on the outside seats the head restraints should be folded to facilitate the installation of this type of child seat For cars equipped with a cargo area cover over the cargo area this must be removed before a child seat can be fitted in the mounting points For detailed
38. 66 Table of contents HA Rs MM 03 Your driving environment 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 Infotainment system Instruments and controls om ccmmmo 72 Menus and Message8S ccccccocccnonccncnnnnonnn 146 General information on infotainment 226 VOVO SENSUS TE a a E rear ea iea 81 Menu source MY CAR ccccssccceeeeeees 148 CQUIG Kee startar a a a 228 Key poston a a a a teen tren ena ener 82 Climate controli ra 156 General infotainment functions 233 nn a E RT ra agus 84 Fuel driven engine block heater and pas Pcl O eee ee 236 Steering wheel M oooccccccooocooo gt O 89 aay compartment heater 166 co ICAA AAA 243 MONO sm lt lt Y 90 nal heater sssusssissssererirrrssseeeeereeen 169 External audio source via AUX USB Wipers and Washing cccssscsssesssesseessees 100 Trip compy A oa 170 IA PA 247 Windows rearview and door mirrors 103 sil C Stability and traction control sys P Meera BiuetadiiF S 250 on ie 108 h n Al o cronica eg ps TT AAA AA AAA 253 A sunroge O E E E Moooi Remete CONTO Boccaccio 256 _ ny Elise contialk F F QUES O 7 Alcoguard 111 Sme rmoth hamastres A 258 A o AA A ae Staging the emeine aim 115 A Voice recognition mobile phone 266 Adaptive cruise CONTIOI cccccesececcceeees 179 A Starting the engine Flexifuel
39. Cnoosing ches normal operating temperature more this publication comes from FSC certified for environmentally compatible materials quickly which lowers consumption and or E O lt outkee reduces emissions Volvo workshops and the environment l l Regular maintenance creates the conditions nigh speed acacia pies sel puon PA for along service life and low fuel consumption AATA eo ner a ea wina resistance M ixed Sources for your car In this way you contribute to a es AGUDI Al PERINAT AES NOTES Product group from well managed cleaner environment When Volvo s workshops nee mies tor Ests and Ote controlled sources are entrusted with the service and mainte e Always dispose of environmentally hazar AAT E ecu nance of your car it becomes part of our sys tem Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which our workshops are designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment Our workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee dous waste such as batteries and oils in an environmentally safe manner Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended 1996 Forest Stewardship Council Following this advice can save money the planet s resources are saved and the car s durability is extended For more information and further advice see the pages 286 and 386 good environmental care
40. D5244T114 approx 5 9 D5 AWD D52441159 approx 5 9 A Manual gearbox B Automatic gearbox For filling engine oil see page 329 00 211 Fluids and lubricants 09 Other fluids and lubricants 09 Specifications Manual gearbox Volume litres Prescribed transmission fluid MMT6 Le BOT 350M3 M66 1 9 Automatic gearbox Volume litres Prescribed transmission fluid MPS6 Tess BOT 341 TF 80SC 7 0 AW1 Coolant 105 2 5T 3 2 T6 D3 DRIVe 8 9 and D5 Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50 water see the packag M eand AR 9 2 ing T4 E and TAR 9 8 DRIVe 10 5 Brake fluid Brake system 0 6 DOT 4 Power steering Power steering WSS M2C204 A2 or equivalent product fluid 09 Specifications Ol 10 OO 111 09 Fluids and lubricants Washer fluid Cars with headlamp wash ing Cars without headlamp 4 5 washing Fuel Petrol engine approx 70 Diesel engine approx 70 A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285 1 B Only applies to the XC70 C DRIVe for certain markets D Manual gearbox E Automatic gearbox F Only applies to the V70 Under normal driving conditions the gear box oil does not need to be changed during its service life However this may be nec essary under adverse driving conditions see page 381 Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo mixed with water Petrol see page 290 Diesel see page 291 CO emissions and fuel consumption 2 51 aut
41. D5244T15 FWD D5 D5244T15 AWD aut aut 94 95 7Jx16x50 73x16x50 7 5Jx17x55 8Jx17x55 A Lowest permitted load index LI The tyre s load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table For more information see page 315 B Lowest permitted speed rating SS The tyre s speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table For more information see page 315 C Cars without top speed inhibitor 230 km h require the lowest speed rating W FWD AWD LIA 215 65R16 73x16x50 235 55R17 7 5Jx17x55 235 50R18 7 5Jx18x55 8Jx18x55 235 45R19 8Jx19x55 32 B6324S5 T6 B6304T4 D3 DRIVe D5204T3 D3 D5244117 D5 D5244T11 D5 D5244T15 AWD AWD FWD AWD AWD AWD aut aut man aut man aut man aut 96 96 96 96 96 96 lt Lea lt ES H lt EN E A Lowest permitted load index LI The tyre s load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table For more information see page 315 B Lowest permitted speed rating SS The tyre s speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table For more information see page 315 lt HN Ss Ss 01 10 00 11 Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure 09 09 Specifications Approved tyre pressures NoTE All engines tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets Tyre size Speed Load 1 3 persons ECO pressure
42. Driving after a collision If the car is involved in a collision the text Safety mode See manual may appear on the information display This means that the car has reduced functionality Safety mode is a protective state that is enforced when the col lision may have damaged any of the car s vital functions such as the fuel lines sensors for one of the safety systems or the brake system Attempting to start the car First check that no fuel is leaking from the car There must be no smell of fuel either If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage you may attempt to start the car Remove the remote control key and open the driver s door If a message is now shown to the COO effect that the ignition is on press the start button Then close the door and reinsert the remote control key The car s electronics will now try to reset themselves to normal mode Then try to start the car If the message Safety mode See manual is still shown on the display then the car must not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery serv ice used instead Even if the car appears to be driveable hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once moving Moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode See manual has been reset the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position Do not move the car further than necessary Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electron
43. G043763 A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system s status e LED not lit Alarm not armed e The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed e The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm and until the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch and key posi tion I is selected Alarm has been trig gered Arming the alarm Press the remote control key lock button Deactivate the alarm Press the remote control key unlock but ton Deactivating a triggered alarm Press the remote control key unlock button or insert the remote control key in the igni tion switch Other alarm functions Automatic re arming of the alarm This function prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally If the car is unlocked with the remote control key and the alarm is disarmed but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes then the alarm is automatically re armed The car is relocked at the same time Remote control key not working If the alarm cannot be deactivated with the remote control key e g if the key s battery is discharged the car can be unlocked dis armed and the engine started as follows 1 Open the driver s door with the detachable key blade see page 58 gt The alarm is triggered the alarm indica tor flashes rapidly and the siren sounds o Lo t e 2 Insert the remote control
44. If the station list is no longer shown turn TUNE one step in either direction to show the list again and press yeo to switch The list disappears from the TV screen after a few seconds If the station list is no longer shown turn TUNE one step in either direction and press the INEO button in the centre console to change to manual tuning or to return from manual tun ing to the function for Station list Manual tuning The preset from the factory is that the radio shows the station list of the strongest stations in the area when you turn TUNE see the sec tion Station list page 236 When the station list is shown press the iso button in the cen tre console to change to manual tuning This allows you to select a frequency from the list of all available radio frequencies in the selected wavelength In other words if turn TUNE one step in a manual search the frequency is changed from e g 93 3 to 93 4 MHz etc To manually select a station 1 Repeatedly press on the RADIO button until the desired wavelength AM FM1 etc is shown release and wait a second or press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to select a frequency The preset from the factory is that the radio automatically searches for the stations in the area where you are driving See previous section Station list above But if you have changed over to manual tun ing by pressing the ufo button in the cen tre console when the station list was show
45. MENU to select tick in the high lighted menu option or to store the selected function in the memory Turn the TUNE knob to scroll up down among the menu options O EXIT EXIT functions Use EXIT to go back in the menu structure or to undo the most recent selection Depending on the menu level the cursor is on with a press on EXIT the cursor is moved different lengths Short and long presses also produce varying results e Short EXIT presses go back one step in the current menu structure e One long EXIT press leads to the MY CAR source menu e Along EXIT press while in the MY CAR source menu leads out of MY CAR to the menu system s main menu Parent view from where all the car s functions menu sources can be accessed see page 230 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Menu source MY CAR Steering wheel keypad The keypad may vary depending on market Turn the thumbwheel knob to scroll up down among the menu options ED Press the thumbwheel to select tick in the highlighted menu option or to store the selected function in the memory 2 EXIT see additional information page 148 Search paths Current menu level is shown at the top right of the centre console display screen Search paths to the menu system functions are descri bed in this manual in the following form Settings gt Car settings gt Lock settings gt Doors unlock Driver door then all The following is an exam
46. O Climate control Electronic climate control ECC ap Temperature control left hand side O Air distribution air vent instrument panel 2 Electrically heated front seat left hand Air distribution defroster windscreen side Rear window and door mirror defrosters 6 Max defroster see page 106 O Fan a heated front seat right hand side O Air distribution ventilation floor 2 The button has a different location depending on whether or not the car is equipped with ventilated front seat 04 G045214 10 Temperature control right hand side Recirculation AUTO AC Air conditioning on off Ventilated front seat left hand side Ventilated front seat right hand side gt gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 159 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate control Electronic Temperature Control ETC 04 o Y a co t fo o Fan Recirculation 2 Electrically heated front seat left hand 10 Electrically heated front seat right hand side side 6 AC Air conditioning on off Temperature control Max defroster O Air distribution ventilation floor O Air distribution air vent instrument panel Air distribution defroster windscreen 8 Rear window and door mirror defrosters see page 106 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate control Press the button three times for the lowest heat Press the button o
47. Pinch protection If something with sufficient resistance prevents the tailgate from opening closing then the pinch protection is activated e During opening power tailgate operation is deactivated and the tailgate is disen gaged e When closing the tailgate stops and backs off from the obstacle a couple of centimetres WARNING Pay attention to the risk of crushing when opening closing Before starting to open close make sure that there is nobody close to the tailgate as a crushing injury could have serious consequences Always operate the tailgate with caution Opening the tailgate US The tailgate can be opened three ways two of which involve this but ton 1 Only in combination with alarm e Long press on the button in the lighting panel hold the button depressed until the tailgate starts to open e Long press on the button on the remote control key hold the button depressed until the tailgate starts to open e Push down gently on the rubberised pres sure plate under the outer handle Closing the tailgate US Close using this button on the tailgate or manually e Press the button the tailgate closes auto matically Stop the opening closing of the tailgate US This can be done four ways of which three involve this button Press the lighting panel button Press the remote control key button Press the tailgate s button Press the rubberised pressure plat
48. Securing loads Loading oo oo 295 DENS US aenea EEEE 81 Service PFOGFAMME ccccceseeeeeeeeeneeeees 328 Set time interval c ccccssseeesseeeeseeeees 189 Side AINOAG siii 26 Signal input external cccooc 228 247 DIPS DIOS deis 26 SO AAPP a 292 o AS 292 SA oe temporary SPALE ccecceecseceeeseeeees 317 SPN CON TO sre 172 Spin Control UNC Nini 172 Stability and traction control system 172 Stability SYSLCM nnscicuiciniarcaiciin arc 172 S AS 362 Start asSiStanCe oooccccconncoconncconononannnnnnnos 119 Steering force speed related 174 Steering OCK cccceeeesceeeeeeesseeeeeneeeeeeees 116 Steering WHEEI cccccsessceeessseeeeneeeeeeees 89 KEY De isiicivintiitnankidoencimeds 89 149 175 230 keypad adaptive cruise control 181 steering wheel adjustment 89 Stone chips and scratches ooccccoccc 363 10 Alphabetical Index E Storage spaces in the passenger compart T driving with a trailer c cceeeeeeeeees 301 no e 219 1 an 306 10 Sunroof TAJANG E a 62 Trailer stability A a 172 opening and CIOSING eee 109 E sl Trailer Stability ASSiSt ooooononnncnnnnnnc 306 PINCH Protection ccccccseceeceeeseceeseeeees 110 OPa E 63 EN i SUMSCRC orion 110 Temperature I EES Ventilation POSITION cccceceeeereeees 109 actual temperature cc
49. Slide in the new wiper blade until a click is heard Check that the blade is firmly installed The wiper blades are different lengths The blade on the driver s side is longer than the blade on the passenger side 08 Maintenance and service Wiper blades and washer fluid Replacing the wiper blades rear window IMPORTANT Check the wiper blades regularly Neglected maintenance shortens the serv ice life of the wiper blades o N N A ise o 1 Fold out the wiper arm 2 Grip the inner section of the blade by the arrow 3 Turn anticlockwise to use the blade s end position against the wiper arm as a lever to detach the blade more easily The windscreen and headlamp washers share 4 Press the new wiper blade into position a common reservoir Check that it is firmly installed 5 Lower the wiper arm O IMPORTANT Add washer antifreeze during the winter so Cleaning l that the fluid does not freeze in the pump For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen see reservoir and hoses page 360 and onwards For capacities see page 381 ae 08 Maintenance and service 08 Battery Operation The service life and function of the battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts discharging driving style driving con ditions climatic conditions etc e Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running e Check that the cables to the battery are correctly
50. The fol ing li j i N touch the glass part of the bulbs with lowing list contains locations of bulbs and SVET OUE glass p ulbs wi your fingers Grease and oils from your fin other light sources that are specialised or gers are vaporised by the heat coating the unsuitable for changing except at a workshop reflector and then causing damage e Active Xenon headlamps ABL Xenon lamps Do lil Headlamps front Direction indicators door mirrors a Approach lighting door mirrors Courtesy lighting Glovebox lighting General interior lighting in the roof Reading lamps Side position position lamps rear Brake light Rear fog lamp Reversing lamp LED lights general WARNING On cars with Xenon headlamps the replacement of Xenon lamps must be car ried out at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Working with Xenon lamps demands extreme caution because the headlamp is equipped with a high voltage unit All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the engine compartment Loosen and remove the whole headlamp The remote control key must not be turned to key position I or Il during bulb replace ment See the section Key positions fora description of the remote control key s 3 key positions Removing the headlamp 1 2 3 If the remote control key is turned into key position l or Il see page 82 e Briefly press the START STOP ENGINE button to reach key position 0
51. The fuel filter separates condensation from the fuel Condensation can disrupt engine opera tion The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or if you suspect that the car has been filled with contaminated fuel IMPORTANT Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter Diesel particle filter DPF Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter which results in more efficient emission con trol The particles in the exhaust gases are col lected in the filter during normal driving So called regeneration is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature Regeneration of the filter takes place automat ically at an interval of approximately 300 900 km depending on driving conditions Regeneration normally takes 10 20 minutes It may take a little longer at a low average speed Fuel consumption may increase slightly during regeneration Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature This means that a Option accessory for more information see Introduction regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied When the filter has become approximately 80 full of particles a warning triangle on the
52. a risk of colliding with a pedestrian or vehicles in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction The collision warning system has the following three functions pa e Collision Warning Warns the driver of a potentially imminent collision e Brake Support Assists the driver to brake effectively in a critical situation e Auto Brake Brakes the car automatically in the event of an imminent risk of collision with a pedestrian or vehicle in front if the driver does not himself herself react in time by braking and or steering away The Auto Brake function can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed The collision warning system is activated in sit uations where the driver should have started braking a lot earlier which is why the function cannot help the driver in every situation Collision Warning with Auto Brake is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention The collision warning system must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his her driving style If the driver solely relies on Colli sion Warning with Auto Brake to do the brak ing there will be a collision sooner or later The collision warning system and City Safety complement each other For more information on City Safety see page 192 IMPORTANT Maintenance of collision warning system components must only be performed at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is re
53. accelerator pedal steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding with the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car If the driver stops a controlled skid by releasing the accelerator pedal then the DSTC system intervenes and stabilises the car With Sport mode maximum traction is obtained if the car has become stuck or when driving on a loose surface e g sand or deep snow Proceed as follows to select Sport mode i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 1 Press the centre console button MY CAR and search in the display screen s menu system and locate My V70 XC70 gt DSTC For information on the menu sys tem see page 148 2 Uncheck the box and back out of the menu system with EXIT gt The system then allows a more sporty driving style The Sport mode is active until the driver dese lects it or until the engine is switched off after the engine is started the next time the DSTC system is back in its normal mode again 04 Comfort and driving pleasure DSTC Stability and traction control system Symbols and messages in the display DSTC Temporarily OFF DSTC system temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature The function is reac tivated automatically when the brakes have cooled DSTC Service required DSTC system disengaged e Stop the car in a safe place
54. accessory for more information see Introduction G045157 However only one disc at a time can be played in the media player It is possible to play back music from e g an iPod or steaming audio files via Bluetooth The RSE system can be controlled from the front TV screen parental control It is possible to display or play back various media from different sources on each TV screen It is also possible to display or play back media from the same source on one or more of the TV screens front right rear and left rear It is not possible to play back video from RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system USB while a CD or DVD disc is being played back D IMPORTANT When loading luggage and large objects in the vehicle ensure that sufficient space is left for the TV screens in the head restraints so that the TV screens are not scratched or damaged Coverthe TV screens with appro priate covering material during loading The TV screens and remote control do not work at very low or high temperatures they only come alive after the climate control system has created an acceptable operat ing temperature in the passenger compart ment Clean the lens on the IR receiver regularly with a damp cloth a dirty lens affects remote control function Power consumption ignition positions The system can be activated in ignition position lor Il and while the engine is running When the car is being started the film
55. activated passenger air bag 1 For information on activating deactivating the airbag see page 24 ee The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags and sensors A sufficiently violent collision trips 01 Safety 9 01 the sensors and the side airbags are inflated The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision S 01 Safety 01 Inflatable Curtain IC Properties Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof The hook is only designed for light clothing not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example Do not screw or install anything onto the car s headlining door pillars or side panels This could compromise the intended pro tection Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas ie N o N p o 0 The inflatable curtain IC Inflatable Curtain is a Do not load the car higherthan 50 mm under part of SIPS and the airbags It is fitted in the the top edge of the door windows Other headlining along both sides of the roof and wise the intended protection of the inflat protects the car s occupants sitting in the outer able curtain which is concealed in the head seats A sufficiently violent collision trips the lining may be compromised sens
56. also be selected and stored under MY CAR For more information on the menu sys tem MY CAR see page 148 To store a function in the FAV button 1 Select an infotainment source e g RADIO MEDIA etc 2 Select a wavelength or source AM Disc etc Press and hold the FAV button until the favourites menu is shown p 4 Turn TUNE to select an option from the list and press OK MENU to save gt When the source e g RADIO MEDIA etc is active the stored function is available by means of a short press on FAV Option accessory for more information see Introduction GO045301 In some cases there is more information avail able on a radio station song artist etc than 05 can be shown in the TV screen To see more information press the INFO button General audio settings Press SOUND to access the audio settings menu Bass Treble etc Scroll forward with SOUND or OK MENU to your selection e g Treble Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save the setting with OK MENU Continue pressing SOUND or OK MENU to access other options gt gt 233 05 Infotainment system 05 234 General infotainment functions e Surround Can be set to the On Off posi tion When On is selected the system selects the setting for optimal sound repro duction Normally DPLII and Pt then appear in the TV screen If the recording is made with Dolby Digital technology then playba
57. always be in O position when work is being done in the engine compartment see page 82 Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the remote control key is in II position or when the engine is hot Checking the engine oil Volvo recommends Castrol oil products 08 Maintenance and service Engine compartment 08 gt gt 08 Maintenance and service 08 Engine compartment When driving under adverse conditions see page 378 IMPORTANT In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine s service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life starting characteristics fuel consumption and environmental impact An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter vals can be applied Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change otherwise you will risk affecting service life starting characteristics fuel consumption and environmental impact Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used Volvo recommends that oil changes are car ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop Volvo uses different systems for warning of low high oil level or low high oil pressure Cer tain variants have an oil pressure sensor and then the lamp for oil pressure i
58. and ONS vosecacessiaceessasexsebeeneeiuescssnens 381 Fog lamp ON roman agitada 92 Fog lamps e 93 FOG lamps ON Ol sereins 92 FOOL IARC seeretari eenias 132 FOUR C Active ChaSSiS 00c0ees 174 FSC environmental labelling 14 PTS PM e en A 290 fuel CONSUMPTION uscuicociananin aciertos 383 fuel CCONOMY viscis siccntancvecsencswsasteneaneers 319 MGT TINS secaveuccasescsancrstaceaseasdsaceascascesners 292 FUSE DOX casio lecitina 349 IOV SOK RA 354 10 Alphabetical Index 42 az 10 Alphabetical Index FU Sata 349 DOX iN Cargo ANCA ficiccs civecsaierdrsexnindtans cy co ast cie E A 349 cald ZOMG A 358 o A 349 relay fuse box in engine compart MENT e ee eE EEEE 350 LI OO o E iio 358 Fuse table fuses in engine compartment 351 G GOAN O isso nadan 120 QUTOMOAUC usaran diari 120 Mai diisenecitekinscebinkierieeiwbicsaecbsaawintanbe 120 Gear selector inhibitOr oo ocococncocococ 122 Gear selector inhibitor mechanical disen GAG SIMS O UNU MO P Z Po m 123 GEaArtrONniC cccececeecececeeaececececaeaeaeceeaees 121 Glass laminated reinforced 0 cceceseeeeeees 103 Global OPSNING miosina ica 157 GIOVEDOX sesion 220 o A 61 Gross vehicle Weight coooccccnnicoconinoocm 372 GSI Gear selector assistance 127 Hazard warning flaSherS ccsccceceeeeeeees 93 y B A E E ee ee 134 Headlamp levelling
59. assistance IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be transpor ted with the wheels rolling forward An All Wheel Drive car AWD with raised front suspension must not be towed at speeds above 70 km h It should not be towed further than 50 km 06 During your journey CT A o s a sce escetsodsanaees coun seewesstecsuanenseaccedaeeedescd scenes Cz Changin AS A A Foes lt cescceessececesecenaceeecescteeecessccenes 316 re PrEssUlE ERNA a EEEE 319 Warning tran land Gadir a r a A 320 Emergency punClufS ep IRIS ee ei a ae a i l a 321 310 Option accessory for more information see Introduction WHEELS AND TYRES RR y 07 Wheels and tyres 07 Driving characteristics Tyres greatly affect the car s driving characte ristics The type of tyre dimensions tyre pres sure and speed rating are important for how the car performs Direction of rotation co N N pe A 0 The arrow shows the tyre s direction of rotation Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions never between left and right hand sides or vice versa If the tyres are fitted incorrectly the car s braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected
60. be used as they could cause the No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit seatbelt buckle to open accidentally in the front passenger seat if the airbag SRS is activated Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen Label fitted on the end face of the instrument panel on the passenger side see the illustration on page 4 Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life 34 01 Safety 01 Recommended child seats bag Group 0 Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat max 10 kg rear facing child seat secured with the ISOFIX fixture system Group 0 Type approval E5 03301146 max 13 kg L Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat rear facing child seat secured withthe rear facing child seat secured withthe rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt car s seatbelt car s seatbelt Type approval E1 04301146 Type approval E1 03301146 Type approval E1 03301146 U U U Rear facing child seat Child Seat Rear facing child seat Child Seat Rear facing child seat Child Seat rear facing child seat secured withthe rear facing child seat secured withthe rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Use a pro car s seatbelt and straps car s seatbelt and straps tective cushion between the child seat i i E E en naera Type approval E5 03135 Ty
61. blade and is opened the alarm is trig gered Ep Slide the spring loaded catch to the side 2 Deactivate the alarm by inserting the H At the same time pull the key blade straight remote control key in the ignition switch out backwards For a car with the Keyless system see Attaching the key blade page 58 Carefully refit the key blade into its location in the remote control key 1 Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot 52 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm Privacy locking General information on privacy locking locked and the tailgate lock is disconnected Activate deactivate from the central locking the tailgate cannot be JE E TAs opened with either the central locking button in 02 the front doors or the remote control key E This means that the remote control key without key blade can only be used to activate deacti vate the alarm to open the doors and to drive the car The remote control key without key blade can then be handed over to the service or hotel staff E the loose key blade is retained by the car Activating privacy locking To activate privacy locking Do not forget to pull out the cargo cover over the cargo area before closing the tail E Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock gate see page 300 cylinder gt Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise The keyhole is ve
62. by various factors such as tall buildings or the TV transmitter being far away Coverage level can also vary depending on where in the country you are located IMPORTANT A TV licence is required for this product in some countries Overview CO gt p 7 F FE ee 6045309 EE Centre console control panel MEDIA key 2 Station presets numeric input E Navigate in channel lists or menus by turn ing TUNE O Confirm your selection or go to the menu by pressing OK MENU E EXIT leads up in the menu system stops the function in progress O The next available channel is shown by pressing Dl If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console For a description of the buttons in the steering wheel see page 230 For a description of the remote control see page 256 Menus The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key pad For general information on menu naviga tion and menu structures see page 279 Watch TV If this is the first time the TV function is used or the country of residence has changed then the setting of TV channels must first be carried out To set the TV channels to see the sec tion Searching TV channels Preset list page 254 Repeatedly press on MEDIA until TV is shown in the TV screen release the button and wa
63. centre backrest s head restraint downwards see page 86 El The outer head restraints are lowered auto matically when the outer backrests are lowered Pull up the backrest s locking handle 4 while folding the backrest for ward at the same time A red indicator on the lock catch E shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place When the backrest has been raised the red indicator should no longer be showing If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seats are firmly locked after raising Electrical lowering of the rear seat s outer head restraints Lal F ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN 03 gt gt 87 D 03 Your driving environment The remote control key must be in position lor Il L Press the button to lower the rear outer head restraints to improve rearward visi bility oa WARNING Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are any passengers using of the outer seats N Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard WARNING The head restraints must be in locked posi tion after being raised 88 G021138 Adjusting the steering wheel Lever releasing the steering wheel Possible steering wheel positions The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and depth 1 Pull th
64. cm i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 01 Safety 9 Activating deactivating the airbag 01 WARNING Activated airbag passenger seat Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm Deactivated airbag passenger seat No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life Messages PASSENGER Rje AIRBAG OFF Y2 G017724 Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated A text message and a symbol in the roof panel indicate that the airbag for the front passenger When the remote control key is turned to key position Il or Ill the warning symbol for the airbag is displayed on the combined instrument panel for approx 6 seconds see page 21 seat is deactivated See preceding illustration Te Following which the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag For more information about the different key positions for the remote control key see page 82 o N pa o o Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated see preceding illustra
65. con trol key s key blade be used to change posi tion For information on the key blade see page 51 Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger the life of passengers in the Car If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag but does not have a PACOS switch Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch then the airbag will always be activated Never place a child in a child seat or ona booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas senger seat if the message in the roof panel see page 25 indicates that the airbag is deactivated and if the warning symbol for the airbag system is also displayed in the combined instrument panel This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction Visit a workshop as soon as possible Volvo recommends that you contact an author ised Volvo workshop Activating deactivating Ki a a hi 1 s s G044058 pa a Switch location The airbag is activated With the switch in this position persons taller than 140 cm can sit in the front passenger seat but never children in a child seat or on a booster cushion EJ The airbag is deactivated With the switch in this position children in a child seat or on a booster cushion can sit in the front passenger seat but never persons taller than 140
66. deactivated by a workshop Volvo recom mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop 3 Applies to certain markets In position dipped beam is always acti vated automatically when the engine is running or when the remote control key is in position Il Main beam Main beam can be activated when the head lamp control is in position 0 3 or EN Activate deactivate main beam by moving the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and release When main beam has been activated the sym bol ED illuminates in the combined instru ment panel Active Xenon headlamps ABL 021143 Headlamp pattern with function deactivated left and activated right respectively If the car is equipped with active Xenon head lamps Active Bending Lights ABL the light from the headlamps follows the steering wheel movement in order to provide maximum light ing in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety The function is activated automatically when the car is started In the event of a fault in the function the symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel at the same time as the information display shows an explana tory text and a further illuminated symbol i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment D 03 Sl D 03 Your driving environment Lighting Symbol Display Specifica tion Headlamp The system failure is
67. depending on the situation The user starts the dialogue by saying Phone gt call number or Phone call number System reply Number User action Start saying the numbers as individual units i e six eight seven etc in the phone number If you say several numbers and pause the sys tem will repeat them and then say Continue Continue to say the numbers When finished finish the command by saying Call e You can also change the number by saying the commands Correct which deletes the last sooken group of numbers or Delete which deletes the whole spoken phone number Dialling from the call register The following dialogue allows you to make a phone call from one of your mobile phone s call registers The user starts the dialogue by saying Phone gt call from the call register or Phone call from the call register Continue by responding to the system s prompts Call a contact The following dialogue allows you to call your pre defined contacts in the mobile phone The user starts the dialogue by saying Phone gt call contact or Phone call contact Continue by responding to the system s prompts Consider the following when you call a contact e f there are several contacts with similar names they will be presented in the dis 268 Option accessory for more information see Introduction play in the numbered rows and the system prompts you to select a row number e If t
68. disrupted by surrounding radio waves buildings topographical conditions etc Detachable key blade A remote control key contains a detachable key blade of metal with which some functions can be activated and some operations carried out The key blade s unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops which are rec ommended when ordering new key blades Key blade functions Using the remote control key s detachable key blade e the driver s door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key see page 58 e the rear doors mechanical child safety locks can be activated deactivated see page 65 ad 51 02 Locks and alarm 02 02 Locks and alarm Remote control key key blade e access to the glovebox and cargo area 2 Lightly press the key blade You should privacy locking can be blocked see hear a click when the key blade is locked 02 page 53 in e the airbag for front passenger seat PACOS ve be activated deactivated Unlocking doors with the key blade Bede If central locking cannot be activated with the Removing the key blade remote control key e g if the batteries are discharged then the driver s door can be opened as follows 1 Unlock the driver s door with the key blade in the door handle s lock cylinder See also the figure and further information on page see page 58 When the door has been unlocked using the G021082 key
69. environmental standards and is also manufac tured in one of the cleanest and most resource efficient plants in the world Volvo Car Corpo ration has global ISO certification which includes the environmental standard ISO 14001 covering all factories and several of our other units We also set requirements for our partners so that they work systematically with environmental issues Fuel consumption Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emis sion of the greenhouse gas carbon dioxide It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con sumption For more information read under the heading Reducing environmental impact Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the con cept Clean inside and out a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger com partment via the air intake A sophisticated air quality system lAQS Inte rior Air Quality System ensures that the incom ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out side The system consists of an electronic sensor and a carbon filter The incoming air is moni tored continuously and if ther
70. from the mirrors see B 87mm disengaging rear power window buttons page 106 see page 65 The windscreen is equipped with a heat Rear window controls reflecting film IR that reduces the solar heat _ radiation into the passenger compartment Front window controls The positioning of electronic equipment such as a transponder behind a glass surface with AN WARNII heat reflecting film may affect its function and Check that none of the rear seat passengers performance is in danger of becoming trapped in any way For the optimal function of electronic equip pub closing the windows from the driver s ment it should be positioned on the part of the gt gt 2 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 103 03 Your driving environment 03 Operating Windows rearview and door mirrors Make sure that children or other passengers are not in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the windows in par ticular when the remote control key is used If there are children in the car remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car r ji ES on S 5 iro j Fe a gt Gi 0 A Operating the power windows Operating without auto Operating with auto All power windows can be operated using the control panel in the driver s door Each control panel in the other doors can only control its own respec
71. gear is engaged can be changed in the settings menu see page 148 The camera image is shown on the centre con sole s screen WARNING e The parking camera serves as an aid It does not relieve the driver of responsi bility when reversing e The camera has blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected e Be aware of people and animals in the vicinity of the car CAM button location The camera shows what is behind the car and if something appears from the sides The camera shows a wide area behind the car and part of the bumper and any towbar Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly this is normal Objects on the display screen may be closer to the car than they appear to be on the screen If another view is active the parking camera system takes over automatically and the cam era image is displayed on the screen E Option accessory for more information see Introduction When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken lines are shown graphically which illustrate where the car s rear wheels will roll with the current steering wheel angle this facilitates tight parking reversing into tight spaces and for hitching a trailer The car s approximate exterior dimensions are also illustrated by two dashed lines the park assist lines can be deac tivated in the settings menu If the car is also equipped with parking assis tance sensors then their information is dis played graphically as
72. his her foot on the brake pedal e Inthe event of the accelerator pedal being depressed rapidly e Inthe event of rapid steering wheel move ments e Inthe event of a sudden turn so that the car rolls The camera sensor also has certain limitations For more information see page 199 04 Comfort and driving pleasure The driver is only warned once each time the wheels cross a line So there is no acoustic alarm when there is a line between the car s wheels Symbols and messages in the display 1 AX Lane departure warning The function is switched on off ms i g ON Lane departure warn Shown at switch on off I ing OFF The text disappears after 5 seconds Lane Depart Warn Standby The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km h lt 65 km h Lane Depart Warn Unavail The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged able Read about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 199 Lane Depart Warn Availa The function scans the carriageway s side markings ble gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 207 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 208 Driver Alert System LDW Windscreen Sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged blocked Shown in the event of snow ice or dirt on the windscreen for example e Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor
73. hub 2 Put on the wheel Tighten the wheel bolts thoroughly 3 Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate G043932 il 4 Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise It is important that the wheel bolts are tight ened properly Tighten to 140 Nm Check the torque with a torque wrench 5 Refit any full wheel covers The wheel cover outlet for the valve must be positioned over the valve on the wheel rim during fitting WARNING Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack Park the car so that passengers have the car or preferably a crash barrier between them and the road Spare wheel The spare wheel Temporary spare is only intended for use temporarily and must be replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos sible The car s handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel The car s ground clearance is affected accordingly Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle you cannot use snow chains at the same time On all wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected The spare wheel must not be repaired The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table see page 389 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 07 Wheels and tyres 07 g
74. in sit uations where the driver is steering braking or accelerating in a clear manner even if a colli sion is unavoidable 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 City Safety When City Safety has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta tionary for a maximum of 1 5 seconds If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when City Safety has stopped the car unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand Keep the windscreen surface in front of the laser sensor free from ice snow and dirt see the illustration for sensor loca tion page 192 Do not affix or mount anything on the windscreen in front of the laser sensor Remove ice and snow from the bonnet snow and ice must not exceed a height of 5cm The Windscreen Sensors blocked message is not shown for all situations in which the laser sensor is blocked The driver must therefore be diligent about keeping the windscreen and area in front of the laser sensor clean The following table presents possible causes for the message being shown along with sug gestions for appropriate action The windscreen sur Clean the wind face in front of the screen surface in laser sensor is dirty front of the sensor or covere
75. in the Centre console controls for radio functions tion and menu structures see page 279 area The currently tuned station is indi 05 RADIO button for selecting the wavelength cated with enlarged text in the list AM FM1 FM2 DAB1 DAB2 Radio AM FM 3 Turn TUNE again in either direction to 2 Station presets 0 9 f select a station from the list Tuning Select the desired frequency station or navigate in the radio menu by turning Automate tuming 1 Repeatedly press on the RADIO button TO until the desired wavelength AM FM1 Confirm your selection or go to the radio etc is shown release and wait a second menu by pressing OK MENU or press OK MENU E Hold in the button for next previous avail 2 Holdin e in the centre console or le station Short f able station Short press for preset in the steering wheel keypad The radio searches for the next previous available station 1 Only applies to FM1 FM2 236 Option accessory for more information see Introduction e The list only shows the frequencies of stations that are currently being received not a complete list of all radio frequencies on the selected wave length If the signal from the currently received station is weak this may prevent the radio from updating the station list If this occurs press the i Eo button while the station list is shown in the dis play screen in order to change to man ual tuning and set a frequency
76. in the car because it can easily be folded up in the roof and so be out of the way if a longer cargo area is required However if desired the safety grille can be dismantled and removed from the car For safety reasons the safety grille must always be correctly fastened and secured when being refitted Fitting The backrests must first be lowered to allow the safety grille to be fitted see page 87 The safety grille is most easily fitted removed by two people via the rear doors During fitting the handle should be on the front of the EE see the illustrations El G018367 i A i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 During your journey Cargo area 06 gt gt 299 06 During your journey 06 300 Cargo area G018368 QD oO oO o 0 Position the handle in fitting position see illustration Press gently on the handle to enable it to be turned into position see arrow Press the strut in towards the grille and align the grille in the roof mounting Turn the handle 90 ER Press gently as in the illustration 1 if necessary Secure the grille by angling the handle 90 P e Removal of the grille takes place in reverse order Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it into the recesses at the cargo area s rear posts IMPORTANT The safety grille cannot be folded up or down when the cargo cover is fitted Attaching
77. injuries The information includes details of the status and functionality of various systems and modules in the vehicle with regard to engine throttle steering and brake systems amongst other things This information may include details regarding the way the driver drives the vehicle such as vehi cle speed brake and accelerator pedal use steering wheel movement and whether or not the driver and passengers have used their seatbelts For the reasons given this informa tion may be stored in the vehicle s computers for a certain length of time but also as a result of a collision or incident This information may be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to further develop and further enhance safety and quality and as long as there are legal require ments and other regulations that Volvo needs to consider Volvo will not contribute to the above descri bed information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner s consent However due to national legislation and regulations Volvo may be required to disclose such infor mation to authorities such as police authorities or others who may assert a legal right to have access to it To be able to read and interpret the information recorded by the computers in the vehicle requires special technical equipment that Volvo and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo have access to Volvo is responsible that the information which is transferred to Volvo durin
78. interrupted or deactivated The message ALARM appears on the TV screen when an alarm message is transmitted Traffic information TP This function allows traffic information sent within a set station s RDS network to break through The TP symbol indicates that the function is activated If the preset station can send traffic information then this is shown by TP glowing brightly in the TV screen otherwise TP will be grey Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu gt TP Enhanced Other Networks EON This function is useful in urban areas with many regional radio stations It allows the distance between the car and the radio station trans mitter to determine when programme functions should interrupt the current audio source Activate deactivate in FM mode by select ing one of the options under FM menu gt Advanced settings gt EON e Local interrupts only if the radio station transmitter is close e Distant interrupts if the station trans mitter is far away even if there is a lot of static TP from selected station all stations The radio can only interrupt for traffic informa tion from the selected station or all stations within the RDS network Goin FM mode to FM menu gt Advanced settings gt Set TP favourite to change News This function allows news broadcasts sent within a set station s RDS network to break through The NEWS symbol indicates that the function is active
79. is a function that informs the driver about the time interval to vehicles in front Distance Warning is active at speeds above 30 km h and only reacts to vehicles driving in front of the car in the same direction No dis tance information is provided for oncoming slow or stationary vehicles G045221 Orange warning lamp An orange warning lamp in the windscreen illu minates with a constant glow if the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time interval OLA Distance warning is deactivated during the time the adaptive cruise control is active Distance warning only reacts if the distance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the pre set value the speed of the driver s vehicle is not affected Operation Press the button in the centre console to switch the function on or off The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button 1 NOTE The illustration is schematic details may vary depending on car model Distance Warning Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console in which case the function is handled by the car s menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Warning distance For a description of the menu sys tem see page 148 Set time interval Controls and display for time interval Time interval Increase decrease Press up to increase down to decrease 2 Time in
80. limitations see page 185 Strong sunlight reflections or strong varia tions in light intensity as well as wearing sunglasses could mean that the warning light in the windscreen cannot be seen Poor weather or winding roads could affect the radar sensor s capacity to detect vehi cles in front The size of other vehicles could also affect detection capacity e g motorcycles This could mean that the warning lamp illumi nates at a shorter distance than the setting or that the warning is temporarily absent Extremely high speeds can also cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than that set due to limitations in sensor range Set time interval during adjustment Distance Warning Radar blocked See manual Distance Warning temporarily disengaged any The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles e g in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 185 Collision warn Service Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged required Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended i i 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 187 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 192 City Safety General City Safety is a function for he
81. medio de la presente Alpine Electronics Inc declara que el Bluetooth Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE ME THN MAPOY2A Alpine Electronics Inc AHAQNEI OTI Bluetooth Module 2YMMOP ONETAI MPO2 TIZ OYZIOAEIZ ANAITHZEIZ KAI TI AOINES 2XETIKE2 AIATA EIZ TH OAHTIA2 1999 5 EK Par la pr sente Alpine Electronics Inc d clare que l appareil Bluetooth Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Con la presente Alpine Electronics Inc dichiara che questo Bluetooth Module conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Ar So Alpine Electronics Inc deklar ka Bluetooth Module atbilst Direktivas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saistitajiem noteikumiem Siuo Alpine Electronics Inc deklaruoja kad Sis Bluetooth Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB Direktyvos nuostatas Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics Inc dat het toestel Bluetooth Module in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Hawnhekk Alpine Electronics Inc jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth Module jikkonforma mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti o rajn relevanti li hemm fid Dirrettiva 1999 5 EC Alul rott Alpine Electronics Inc nyilatk
82. mm gt gt as Q 03 Your driving environment Lighting Aligning the templates D o E ise 0 Upper row masking left hand drive cars templates A and B Lower row masking right hand drive cars templates C and D 03 Your driving environment ED Ps Lighting Templates for halogen headlamps D 03 Your driving environment 03 100 Wipers and washing Windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers Rain sensor on off 2 Thumbwheel sensitivity frequency Windscreen wipers off 0 Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers Single sweep IX Raise the stalk switch and release to make one sweep Intermittent wiping INT Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when inter mittent wiping is selected Continuous wiping WZ The wipers sweep at normal speed NY Y The wipers sweep at high speed IMPORTANT Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in and that any snow or ice on the wind screen and rear window is scraped away IMPORTANT Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen The wind screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating Service position wiper blade For cleaning the windscreen wiper blades and replacement of wiper blades see see page
83. mm the tread depth will be level in height with the tread wear indicators Change to new tyres as soon as possible Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow Rims and wheel bolts IMPORTANT The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm Overtightening can damage the nuts and the bolts Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso ries Check the torque with a torque wrench Locking wheel bolts Locking wheel bolts can be used on both alu minium and steel rims Under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lock able wheel bolts G043840 Located under the cargo area floor are the car s towing eye jack and wheel wrench There is also space for the sleeve for the lock able wheel bolts Jack The jack s thread must always be well greased Option accessory for more information see Introduction 07 Wheels and tyres 07 gt gt 313 07 Wheels and tyres 07 314 The original jack should only be used for changing to the spare wheel The jack s thread must always be well greased Tools returning into place G029336 The tools and jack must be returned to their correct places after use The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to have space The foam block and spare wheel are replaced in the reverse order to taking out Note that there is an ar
84. mounting points for child seats 45 Cigarette lighter SOCk t oocccccccconoccom o 220 Oy Sately M aaa 192 Cleaning automatic car WASNES cccccceeeeeees 360 Cally WAS Menotti rta 360 MAS 361 SS AIO AA Un 363 UPRO assmeisictiocio tenis 362 Clean Zone Interior Package CZIP 157 Climate control ussiionataa caca 156 Generals T T E A T 156 SONO Si cscesncardioncactnreictsawtandentueeiavsecanre 156 Clock SCUUING sessions acido 80 COs emissions ess id 383 COINS HOM xs isdn Po tintoe ten cuallianielianaaion 32 Collision WAIrNING cseceeseeeeeeeeeees 196 197 Collision warning system radar SENSOM ccceeseeeeeeees 185 192 197 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 196 Colour code DAI irestiiectiertedeuscrasectemaxs 364 Combined instrument panel 146 Comfort inside the passenger compart MON rc epicneticro pieces 219 COMES restando coc 108 CONDON ora 108 setting the ZON ocicooccccncncccncninnnnnnnnos 108 Condensation in headlamps 360 controls Centre console oocooccccccinccccnccnaso 229 279 Controls Centre CONSOIE ccccceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeees 148 Cooling SY SUSI Lacasa 286 Crash see ColliSiON ooonconncnnconncnccnnnnnos 32 Cruise CONTO iia cenas 175 CZIP Clear Zone Interior Package 157 DABA Ossa dit 240 Deadlock GEACUVATON binusiancassasaancsubasmaaveancgusqiantee 63 temporary deactivati0N ccccoo
85. not sure whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other object e g a speed bump e when the speed is below 15 km h and the vehicle in front turns off so the cruise con trol no longer has a vehicle to follow Automatic braking ceases when stationary In certain situations the cruise control inter rupts braking when stationary This means that the foot brake is released and the driver must brake himself herself Cruise control releases the foot brake and is set in standby mode when e the driver puts his her foot on the brake pedal the parking brake is applied the gear selector is moved to P NorR position e the driver sets the cruise control in standby mode Adaptive cruise control Automatic activation parking brake In some situations the cruise control applies the parking brake in order to keep a stationary car remaining stationary This takes place if e the driver opens the door or takes off his her seatbelt e DSTC is changed from Normal to Sport mode e cruise control has held the car stationary for more than 2 minutes the engine is switched off the brakes have overheated The radar sensor and its limitations Apart from the adaptive cruise control the radar sensor is also used by the Collision Warning with Auto Brake function See page 196 and the Distance Warning function see page 189 The function of the radar sen sor is to detect cars or larger vehicles in the s
86. off their seatbelt Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system Visit a workshop Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work shop Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates the brake fluid level may be too low Stop the car in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir see page 333 If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system 1 Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine 2 Restart the engine e f both symbols extinguish continue driving e Ifthe symbols remain illuminated check the level in the brake fluid reservoir see page 333 If the brake fluid level is nor mal but the symbols are still illuminated the car can be driven with great care to a workshop to have the brake system checked Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop WARNING If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid The loss of brake fluid must be investigated by a workshop Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop Instruments and controls If the brake and ABS symbols are illumi nated at the same time there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking Warning The
87. on the other side E Pull up the left hand safety net and hook it into the rod e Folding up takes place in reverse order The net can also be used when the rear seat s backrests are folded forward Removing the net cassettes 1 Roll the safety nets into the cassettes in accordance with the procedure in the sec tion entitled Using the safety net but in reverse 2 Fold the whole backrest forward Slide the cassettes out until they loosen from the anchor rails Store the cassettes in their compartment under the cargo area floor hatch Loads in the cargo area must be firmly secured even if the safety net is correctly fitted Safety net combined with cargo cover G018247 Puller straps for raising the net The safety net can also be raised from the rear seat when the cargo cover is extended Follow the procedure in the section entitled Using the safety net The straps for raising are located by the arrows d j m r J a re 0 m g a y F kaa j Bii i Fii P j E 0 y r i LE B b L d b rl H Y i u i i i i ais K a j A safety grille prevents loads or pets from being thrown forward in the passenger com partment in the event of sudden braking Folding up Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and pull back up The safety grille cannot be folded up or down when a cargo cover is fitted Fitting removal The safety grille is normally permanently instal led
88. or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed e Glow not constant The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx 3 seconds This proc 1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer ess Is repeated for approx 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a roll ing code The garage door gate or sim ilar is not activated when the pro grammed HomeLink button is depressed Continue the programming in accordance with the following Locate the programming button on the receiver for the garage door for example normally located close to the antenna s bracket on the receiver If you have diffi culty in finding the button consult the supplier s manual or contact the supplier via the Internet www homelink com Depress and release the programming button The button flashes for approx 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period Depress the programmed button on HomeLink while the programming but ton is still flashing keep it depressed for approx 3 seconds and then release Repeat the press hold release sequence up to 3 times to conclude the program ming Programming individual buttons To reprogram an individual button proceed in accordance with the following 1 3 Depress the required button on HomeLink and do not release until step 3 has been complet
89. or traffic weather or road condi tions City Safety does not react to vehicles driving in a different direction from the car to small vehicles motorcycles and bicycles or to humans and animals City Safety M can prevent collision at a speed difference of less than 15 km h ata higher speed difference it is only possible to reduce collision speed In order to obtain full brake function the driver must depress the brake pedal Never wait for City Safety to engage The driver always bears responsibility for main taining the proper distance and speed 1 NOTE The illustration is schematic details may vary depending on car model z Option accessory for more information see Introduction Function Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window City Safety detects the traffic in front of the car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of the windscreen If there is an imminent risk of collision City Safety will automatically brake the car which may be experienced as sudden braking If the speed difference is 4 15 km h in relation to the vehicle in front then City Safety can completely prevent a collision City Safety activates a short sharp braking and stops the car in normal circumstances just behind the vehicle in front For most drivers this is well outside normal driving style and may be experienced as being uncomfortable City Safety If the difference in speed between th
90. phone book see page 262 3 Press OK MENU The call is interrupted with EXIT Disconnecting the mobile phone Automatic disconnection takes place if the mobile phone moves out of the audio system s range The connection to the mobile phone can be interrupted manually via a long press on TEL or in phone mode under Phone menu gt Disconnect phone For more information on connection see page 261 The handsfree function is deactivated when the engine is switched off or when a door is opened 2 Only Keyless Drive When the mobile phone has been discon nected an ongoing call can be continued by using the mobile phone s built in microphone and speaker Even when your mobile phone has been manually disconnected some mobile phones may automatically couple up to the last handsfree unit connected e g when a new call begins Making and receiving calls Incoming call Press OK MENU to answer the call even if the audio system is in e g RADIO or MEDIA mode Refuse or end with EXIT Automatic answer The automatic answer function means that calls are accepted automatically Activate deactivate in phone mode under Phone menu Call options Auto answer i Option accessory for more information see Introduction In call menu Press OK MENU during an ongoing call to access the following functions e Mute audio system microphone is muted e Mobile phone the call is transferred from handsfree to th
91. protection that is activated if it becomes too hot e g if the car is held stationary with the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a long time Overheated transmission causes the car to shake and vibrate and the warning symbol illu minates and the information display shows a message The transmission can also overheat during slow driving in queues 10 km h or slower on an uphill gradient or with a trailer i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment D Gearboxes 03 123 D 03 Your driving environment 03 Gearboxes hitched The transmission cools down when the car is stationary with foot brake depressed and the engine running at idling speed Overheating during slow driving in queues can be avoided by driving in stages Stop the car and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until there is a moderate distance to the traffic ahead drive forward a short distance and then wait another moment with your foot on the brake pedal IMPORTANT Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary on an uphill gradient do not hold the car with the accelerator pedal The gearbox could then overheat For important information regarding Powershift transmission and towing see page 307 Text message and action In some situations the display may show a message at the same time as a symbol is illu minated Symbol Display Driving characteristics EA T
92. raph a man T4C aut 15 3 2 aut 3 2 AWD aut 299 344 222 2118 238 2308 208 238 259 264 308 320 12 8 14 7 9 6 12 85 10 3 14 08 9 0 102 11 3 13 2 13 9 157 168 129 1258 139 1348 127 139 148 155 160 169 6 7 7 2 5 6 7 68 6 0 8 28 5 5 6 0 6 4 6 7 6 9 7 3 09 Specifications 209 232 163 1578 175 1698 157 175 189 195 214 224 co om coe fom eo as 9 0 9 9 7 0 9 68 7 5 10 35 6 8 7 5 8 1 8 4 9 2 SIT 01 10 00 11 09 gt gt 01 10 00 111 09 09 Specifications i T6 AWD 344 14 8 175 TE 237 10 2 DRIVe man 139 5 3 108 4 1 119 4 5 D3 169 6 4 119 4 5 137 5 2 D3 aut 211 8 0 129 4 9 159 6 0 D5 man 165 6 3 116 4 4 134 5 1 D5 224 8 5 129 4 9 164 6 2 D5 AWD 282 8 8 142 5 4 175 6 6 A Flexifuel engines can be driven on both 95 octane unleaded petrol and bioethanol E85 Both fuels are filled in the common fuel tank so that any variations of mixing ratios between these two fuels is possible For more information see page 118 C DRIVe for certain markets D Without Start Stop 3 2 AWD T6 AWD DRIVe D3 D3 AWD D3 AWD D5 AWD D5 AWD gram km om litre 100 km A urban driving man jab El jab ANA a a 09 Specifications 326 351 178 221 173 229 173 229 14 0 181 7 8 12 1 1
93. red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and or driveability of the car An explan atory text is shown on the information display at the same time The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the READ but ton see page 146 The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other sym bols Action 1 Stop in a safe place Do not drive the car further 2 Read the information on the information display Implement the action in accord ance with the message in the display Clear the message using the READ button Reminder doors not closed If one of the doors the bonnet or tailgate is not closed properly then the information or warn ing symbol illuminates together with an explan 2 Only cars with alarm atory text message in the combined instrument panel Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door bonnet or boot lid whichever is open If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx 7 km h then the information symbol illuminates If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx 7 km h then the warning symbol illuminates Trip meter G044561 Trip meter and controls Display for trip meter 2 Controls for switching between trip meters T1 and T2 as well as resetting the trip meters The meters are used to measure short dis tances One short pre
94. see page 62 Panic function Used to attract attention in an emergency Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to acti vate the direction indicators and the horn The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds Otherwise the function switches off automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds Range The remote key s functions have a range of about 20 m from the car Ifthe car does not verify a button being pressed move closer and try again The remote control key functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio waves buildings topographical conditions etc The car can always be locked unlocked using the key blade see page 51 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction G021080 Remote control key with PCC Personal Car Communicator ap Information button Indicator lamps Using the information button enables access to certain information from the car via the indica tor lamps Using the information button Press the information button Fi gt All indicator lamps flash for approxi mately 7 seconds and the light travels around on the PCC This indicates that information from the car has been read If any of the other buttons are pressed during this time then the reading is inter rupted Ml If none of the indicator lamps illumi nates with repeated use of the inf
95. show the selected speed e g 100 km h OLE Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km h Changing the speed In active mode the speed is adjusted with long or short presses on or the last press is stored in the memory A temporary increase in speed with the accel erator pedal e g during overtaking does not affect the cruise control setting the car returns to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released If any cruise control button is held depressed for more than approx 1 minute then cruise control is disengaged The engine must be switched off in orderto reset cruise control Temporary deactivation standby mode Press o to temporarily disengage the cruise control and set it in standby mode set speed is shown in brackets in the display 5 e g 100 km h Automatic standby mode Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if e wheels lose traction the foot brake is used speed falls below approx 30 km h the clutch pedal is depressed the gear selector is moved to neutral posi tion automatic gearbox e the driver maintains a speed higher than the set speed for longer than 1 minute The driver must then regulate the speed Resume set speed Cruise control in standby mode is re activated with one press on the steering wheel button D the speed is then set to the last stored speed A significant inc
96. shown repeatedly contact a workshop Transmission hot Reduce speed Transmission hot Stop safely Temporarily OFF Low battery Power save mode the problem has arisen page 124 Drive more smoothly or stop the car in a safe manner Disengage the gear and run the engine at idling speed until the message clears Critical fault Stop the car immediately in a safe manner and con tact a workshop A function has been temporarily switched off and is reset auto matically while driving or after starting again The audio system is switched off to save energy Charge the bat tery A Part of message shown together with information on where B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended C For more messages concerning automatic transmission see 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 y 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 Menu source MY CAR General information on MY CAR Many of the car s functions are handled in this menu source such as setting the clock door mirrors and locks Navigation in the menus is carried out using buttons on the centre console or with the steer ing wheel s right hand keypad Certain functions are standard others are optional the range also varies depending on the market Operation Centre console controls Centre console controls for menu navigation Press MY CAR to open the menus under MY CAR Press OK
97. the next previous available station For more information on the radio see page 236 Watching TV It is possible to watch TV via the car s media player ii Option accessory for more information see Introduction 1 Switch on the wireless headphones select CH A for left hand screen or CH B for right hand screen 2 Aim the remote control at the IR receiver on the TV screen press repeatedly on MEDIA to TV release and wait a few sec onds and the selection is accepted 3 Select a channel with one of the preset buttons 0 9 on the remote control or press m4 gt gt the next previous channel available in the area is displayed For more information on the TV see page 253 Menu navigation RSE General The RSE menus are operated both from the front TV screen and from either of the rear TV screens From the front TV screen it is possible to both activate a source for a rear TV screen and to make certain settings forthe two rear TV screens RSE menus front TV screen To access the menu RSE must first be selected under MEDIA via the front TV screen Then press OK MENU to access the menu Turn TUNE to the desired selection and con firm with OK MENU The remote control and steering wheel keypad can also be used It is possible to make settings for either right or left hand TV screen or both TV screens Left RSE screen menu Right RSE screen menu and Both RSE screen menus Power off Power on RADI
98. the air conditioning is not engaged which can cause a risk of misting on the windows Fan knob for ECC Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed If AUTO is selected then fan speed is regulated automatically The previously set fan speed is disengaged i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Fan knob for ETC Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed Air distribution G043938 ap Air distribution defroster windscreen 2 Air distribution air vent instrument panel Air distribution ventilation floor The figure consists of three buttons When pressing the buttons the corresponding figure is illuminated in the TV screen see figure below and an arrow in front of each part of the figure shows the air distribution that is Climate control selected For more information on air distribu tion see page 165 The selected air distribution is shown in the centre console TV screen AUTO The Auto function automati cally regulates temperature air conditioning fan speed recirculation and air distribu tion If you select one or more manual functions the other functions continue to be controlled auto matically All manual settings are disengaged when AUTO is pressed The TV screen shows AUTO CLIMATE 1 Only applies to ECC Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt
99. the car i 1 Carefully prize out the batteries Opening 2 First install one new one with the side a D gt Slide the spring loaded catch to the l up Sue 3 Position the white plastic tab in between 23 At the same time pull the key blade and finally install a second new battery with straight out backwards the side down El E gt Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the Battery type hole behind the spring loaded catch and Use batteries with the designation CR2430 3V 3 gently prize the remote control key up one in the remote control key and two in the PCC Assembly Turn the remote control key over with the 1 Press the remote control key together buttons facing up this is to avoid the bat teries falling out when it is opened 2 Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot IMPORTANT 3 Lightly press the key blade You should Avoid touching the battery and its terminals hear a click when the key blade is locked with your fingers as this could damage their in functionality gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 55 02 Locks and alarm Battery replacement remote control key PCC IMPORTANT 02 Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way 56 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Keyless lock and ignition system only PCC General G017871 The keyless dr
100. the cargo cover Eb Move one end piece of the cover into the recess on the side panel E Move the other end piece into the corres ponding recess E Press both sides in A click should be audible and the red marking should disap pear gt Check that both end pieces are locked e Option accessory for more information see Introduction Removing the cargo cover 1 Press in one end piece button and lift it out 2 Carefully angle the cover up out and the other end piece loosens automatically Lowering the cargo cover s rear sealing disc In its rolled in position the cargo cover s rear sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the cargo area when it is fitted Pull the sealing disc back gently free from its support shelves and lower General Payload depends on the car s kerb weight The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories e g towbar reduces the car s payload by a corresponding weight For more detailed information on weights see page 372 If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo then the car is delivered with the necessary equip ment for driving with a trailer e The car s towing bracket must be of an approved type e If the towbar is retrofitted check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer e Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket complies with the specified maximum towball load e Incr
101. the speed is below 10 km h the system is reactivated Front parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied or P mode is selected in a car with an automatic gear box 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Park assist syst D IMPORTANT Cleaning the sensors D NOTE Dirt ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals When fitting auxiliary lamps Remember that they must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps could then be detected as obstacles Fault indicator If the information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the informa tion display shows Park assist syst Service required then parking assistance is disen gaged IMPORTANT In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig nals that are caused by external audio sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre quencies that the system works with 04 G018129 Examples of such sources include horns wet tyres on asphalt pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc G018067 Sensor location rear The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly Clean them with water and car shampoo gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 26 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 212 Park assist camera General The parking camera is an assist system and is activated when reverse
102. these characteristics could cause personal injury For further information contact the supplier via the Internet www homelink com Programming for the first time The first step erases the memory in HomeLink and must not be carried out when only one individual button is being reprogram med 1 Depress the two outer buttons and do not release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx 20 seconds The flash ing indicates that HomeLink is set in learn mode and is ready to be pro grammed 2 Position the original remote control 5 30 cm from HomeLink Monitor the indi cator lamp The particular distance that is required between the original remote control and HomeLink depends on the programming of the device in question Perhaps several attempts will be required at different dis tances Maintain each position for approx 15 seconds before trying a new one Depress the button for the original remote control and the button to be programmed on HomeLink simultaneously Do not release the buttons until the indicator lamp has changed over from slow to rapid flash ing The rapid flashing indicates successful programming Test the programming by depressing the programmed button on HomeLink and watching the indicator lamp e Constant glow The indicator lamp illu minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed this indicates that the programming is complete The garage door gate
103. ve Information display and controls for menus 1 READ access to message list and mes sage confirmation 2 Thumbwheel browse between menu options RESET reset the active function Used in certain cases to select activate a function see the explanation under each respective function The menus shown on the information displays in the combined instrument panel are con trolled with the left hand stalk switch The menus shown depend on key position see page 82 If a message appears then this must 1 Only certain markets 2 Programming is only possible when the engine is switched off 3 Cannot be selected when the additional heater is operating be acknowledged with READ for the menus to be shown Menu overview Some of the following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car km to empty tank 1 100km average 1 100km instantaneous km h average speed km h current speed Engine oil level Wait Tyre pressure Calibration Park heat timer 2 Direct start Park heat ON Additional heat auto ON Lane Depart Warn Driver Alert ii Option accessory for more information see Introduction Message Tmt hem LF ze A Dou ie EPEE y i _ f TE u Time for regular SEPVICE AP esc Text message in the information display When a warning information or indicator sym bol illuminates a corresponding message appears on
104. wheels away from the kerb If the car is parked facing downhill e Turn the wheels towards the kerb Get into the habit of always applying the parking brake when parking on a slope leaving the car in gear or in P if it has auto matic transmission is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation Parking brake Disengaging the parking brake PUSH LOCK N o 10 SY o 0 Parking brake control release Cars with manual gearbox Releasing manually 1 Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch Press the foot brake pedal down firmly Pull the control gt The parking brake releases and the combined instrument panel symbol goes out 1 For a car with the Keyless system Press START STOP ENGINE The parking brake can also be released manually by depressing the clutch pedal instead of the brake pedal Volvo recom mends the use of the brake pedal Releasing automatically 1 Start the engine 2 Engage 1st gear or reverse gear 3 Ease up the clutch and depress the accel erator gt The parking brake releases and the combined instrument panel symbol goes out Cars with automatic gearbox Releasing manually 1 Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch Press the foot brake pedal down firmly Pull the control gt The parking brake releases and the combined instrument panel symbol goes out Releasing automatically 1 Put the seatbe
105. with normal voice at normal speed e Do not speak while the system is replying the system cannot understand commands during this time e The car s doors windows and sunroof must be closed e Avoid background noise in the passenger compartment If the driver is unsure of which command to use he she can say Help the system then responds with a few different com mands which can be used in the current sit uation Voice commands can be disabled by saying Cancel not speaking a long press on the steering wheel but ton for Voice recognition Press EXIT or another source button e g MEDIA Help functions for voice recognition e Instructions A function that helps you get familiar with the system and the procedure for giving commands e Voice training A function that enables the voice recognition system to learn to know your voice and your accent The function provides an opportunity to voice train two user profiles The help functions can be accessed by press ing the MY CAR button on the control panel in the centre console and then turning TUNE to the desired menu option Instructions The instructions can be started in two ways ORC This instruction and voice training can only be started when the car is parked e Press the button for Voice recognition and say Voice instructions e Activate the instructions in the menu sys tem MY CAR under Settings gt Voice settings Voice tutor
106. 10 20 10 10 08 Maintenance and service 08 gt gt 351 08 Maintenance and service Relay coil relay vacuum pump 5 cyl petrol Headlamp control Internal relay coils Auxiliary lamps Horn S 0005650080 amp Relay coil main relay engine management system Engine control module 5 6 cyl petrol Transmission control module 6 Compressor A C not 5 cyl die sel Coolant pump 5 cyl diesel Start Stop 08 20 15 10 15 iS 33 Relay coil relay compressor A C not 5 cyl diesel Relay coil relay coolant pump 5 cyl die sel Start Stop Relay coils in central electrical unit in engine compartment cold zone Start Stop Actuator solenoid starter motor S 35 Ignition coils 4 cyl petrol Glow control module 5 cyl die sel Ignition coils 5 6 cyl petrol Capacitor 6 cyl la Engine control module petrol Engine control module diesel 352 9 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 5 30 10 20 10 15 ky Valves 1 6 petrol Mass air 10 flow sensor 1 6 petrol Mass air flow sensor D4162T Control valve fuel flow D4162T Mass air flow sensor 5 6 cyl 15 Control valves 5 cyl diesel Injectors 5 6 cyl petrol Engine control module 6 cyl Compressor A C 5 6 cyl 10 Engine valves Engine control module 6 cyl Solenoids 6 cyl without turbo Actuator motors inta
107. 15 387 TOWING OY cccccccnccnnoooccnnoncnnnnnanonancnnonannnnns 308 Speed Mati cococcconconornononnnoneoneneenenss 315 tread wear indicators 313 Ae E A 301 WINS TOS acen 314 10 Alphabetical Index U low oil presSUlB ococoononccccononnonconanonnnnnons 78 Wheels and tyr8S occccocccccocccononoconanonnnnos 312 parking brake applled 18 Whiplash injury WHlPS coccion 29 10 l p Jury Unlocking seatbelt reminde cccccsseeceeeeeeeeees 78 os l WHIPS from the si saesactvctccesasnoisencteeiesci s 60 WU IN EE aorta 78 rectas 60 child seat booster CuUShi0ON oocccoo 29 NS Warning sound whiplash IU iiaves cvecnticevancupeteoestxiacesn LO USB TOM OOOoOPUoO ZP 247 llisi i LON ie dvadiistatwnbescias 197 A a o ee Windows rearview and door mirrors 103 Warni ai teM 21 o bd yon Windscreen WashinNQ coonccccconnnncnconannnnos 101 Warning WAN GIS rmcnina coa 320 y RARO Windscreen WiperFS cccocccocccconcconinnnononinons 100 Washer fluid filliIMQ oooomooooo 343 FAI SEAS PPP A 100 Vanny MITO xcocstcaccenndexttbedsntiazssonion 94 221 Washer nozzles heated iiivissrsesiss 101 Winter Oriving c se scssecseseseeseesesseeseeseeseeees 287 Ventilation a aaa 1 58 Washers Winter tyres A EN 31 4 Vibration dame IT mcoconononcnrarornronanonenonononos 302 PAAT UNCON at pep ha Wiper blades cooocccnnnonoccccnoninonanncnnnnnos 342 washer fluid filli
108. 163 e Recirculation timer for passenger com partment air see page 164 e Automatic rear window defrosting see page 106 e Air quality system IAQS see page 164 The climate control system s functions can be reset to the default settings via the menu sys tem in MY CAR and this is carried out under Settings gt Climate settings gt Reset climate settings A Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 157 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 158 Climate control Air distribution G017699 The incoming air is divided between a number of different vents in the passenger compart ment Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode If necessary it can be controlled manually see page 165 Air vents in the dashboard Ey Closed Open e Lateral airflow Vertical airflow Aim the outer vents at the side windows to remove misting i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Air vents in the door pillars G044552 G021368 Ey Closed E Open e Lateral airflow Vertical airflow Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist ing in cold weather Aim the vents into the passenger compartment to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear seat in hot weather NOTE Remember that small children may be sen sitive to air flows and draughts 04 Co mfort and driving pleasure
109. 2 filling brake Tildas 334 symbols in the combined instrument E A A A A EE 133 Bulbs see Lighting ccooocnconnnocoono 335 C Calls INCOMING o e 260 Opera NO esinin ei 260 Camera SENSOM ccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 193 199 FAN CANS E 360 Car care leather upholstery 362 Cargo area Cargo COVO eenaa 300 NG a0 0 EEE T 94 NVC yo A o 294 mounting DONS ucancioniaisane i n 295 safety alle ia 299 SAGT AAA nnn An 298 Cargo COVEN sos E 300 Car UDNOISTCNY srisccctesensinsavtadnenbennamneuentesens 362 Gar WAS Maio 360 Catalytic CONVEMTEN ccccceeseceeeeeeeeeeeeees 290 RECOV SN Y ERC E 308 6 E Pee o Ann 243 Centre CONSOLIE ccccceeceeesseeeseeeeeeeeees 148 Chassis SettingS ccccccscecssseeeseeeeeneeees 174 Checking and topping up the coolant 332 Checking the engine oil level 329 A ee eer 33 Child Safety lOCKS ccoonciccccnniononoo 41 child seats and side airbags 26 location in the Cal cccsececsseeeeseeeeaeees 33 EE E E CAPO oo 33 Child safety lOCKS ocoooccciocococococononanoss 65 e AAPP 33 CHANG SC AUS A 33 integrated two stage booster cushion 39 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats 41 FECOMMENGD SO isciicinnci dianas vende 35 10 Alphabetical Index E 10 Alphabetical Index size classes for child seats with the ISO FIX fixture SySteM occconcccononcconcnncnnnnnonos 41 upper
110. 3 84 Front seats G021127 Lumbar support adjustment turn the wheel Forward backward lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and ped als Check that the seat is locked after changing position Raise lower front edge of seat cushion pump up down Adjust backrest rake turn the wheel 5 Raise lower the seat pump up down O Control panel for power seat 1 Also applies to power seat WARNING Adjust the position of the driver s seat before setting off never while driving Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident Lowering the front seat backrest G043898 The passenger seat backrest can be folded forward to make room for long loads 13 Move the seat as far back down as possi ble E gt Adjust the backrest to an upright position i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction E Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest and fold it forward 4 Push the seat forward so that the head restraint locks in under the glovebox Raising takes place in reverse order WARNING Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is properly locked after being folded up in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident Power seat G021133 Front edge of seat cushion up down Seat forward backward and up down
111. 342 and 360 Rain sensor The rain sensor automatically starts the wind screen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen The sensitivity of 1 Replacing the wiper blades see page 342 service position wiper blade see page 342 and filling washer fluid see page 343 e Option accessory for more information see Introduction the rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumbwheel When the rain sensor is activated a light in the button the rain sensor symbol is shown in the right hand display in the combined instrument panel Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor the car must be running or the remote control key in position I or Il while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button The windscreen wipers make one sweep Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make an extra sweep Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi tivity and downward for lower sensitivity An extra Sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward deactivate Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but ton or move the stalk switch down to another wiper program The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch or five minutes after the engine has been switched off IMPORTANT The windscreen wipers could s
112. 5 09 Specifications 09 Symbols in the display Information 76 read display text Main beam on Left hand 76 direction indi cators Right hand 76 direction indi cators 112 lt ey a DRIVe Start Stop Meaning Page 76 91 76 129 Other information symbols in the combined instrument panel Adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control 5 E o 406 Meaning Page leas 181 187 187 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction CO Adaptive cruise control Distance Warning Distance Alert Adaptive cruise control Distance Warning Distance Alert Adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control Distance Warning Distance Alert Adaptive cruise control Distance Warning Distance Alert Adaptive cruise control Radar sensor 187 190 187 190 187 182 189 182 189 181 187 190 201 07 an fu Ci 7 0 id ES Y A Wi Q afe Start Stop Adap tive cruise control Speed limiter Camera sensor Laser sensor Auto Brake Dis tance Warning Distance Alert City Safety Collision warning system Fuel driven engine block heater and passenger com partment heater ABL system Fuel filler flap right hand side Low battery CO 123 17 Wie 15 201 204 207 190 195 201 167 91 289
113. 88 8 1 6 8 125 4 8 8 4 139 5 3 6 5 135 Dal 87 150 Del 6 5 135 Sul el 150 Saf B extra urban driving C combined driving 234 248 144 169 149 179 149 17 9 If the consumption and emission data is missing then it is included in the enclosed supplement 01 10 OO 17 09 01 10 00 111 09 Specifications Fuel consumption and emissions of carbon dioxide Fuel consumption and emission values in the table above are based on specific EU cycles that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic version and without extra equipment The car s weight may increase depending on equipment This as well as how heavily the car is loaded increases fuel consumption and carbon diox ide emissions There are several reasons for increased fuel consumption compared with the table s val ues Examples of this are e The driver s driving style e Ifthe customer has specified wheels larger than those fitted as standard on the mod el s basic version then resistance increa ses e High speed results in increased wind resis tance e Fuel quality road and traffic conditions weather and the condition of the car Even a combination of the above mentioned examples can result in significantly improved 1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment EU driving cycles all in accordance with EU Directive 80 1268 EEC Euro 4 E
114. Backrest rake The power front seats have overload protection which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object If this happens go to key position I or 0 and wait a short time before adjusting the seat again Only one movement forward back up down can be made at a time Preparations The seats can be adjusted for a certain time after unlocking the door with the remote con 2 For key memory for keyless drive see page 58 trol key without the key in the ignition switch Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi tion land can always be made when the engine is running Seat with memory function G021134 Store setting Memory button Memory button 6 Memory button O Button for storing settings 1 Adjust the seat and the door mirrors 3 Only if the car is equipped with power seat and retractable power door mirrors 2 Hold the button depressed to store set tings while depressing one of the memory buttons Using a stored setting Hold one of the memory buttons depressed until the seat and the door mirrors stop If you release the button then the movement of the seat will stop Key memory in remote control key The positions of the driver s seat and the door mirrors are stored in the key memory when the car is locked with the remote control key nn E G014387 When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key it was locked with and the driver s g Option accessory for more informat
115. Badig EN 300 328 V1 7 1 2006 10 EMC EN 301 489 17 V1 3 2 2008 04 EN 301 489 1 V1 8 1 2008 04 1807637 2 2004 Safety IEC 60065 Ed 7 2001 Amd 1 2003 EN 60065 2002 Amd 1 2006 Ycar of affixing CE marking Pai Signature Mimba Name Shinichi Asuke Date November 12 2009 CE Czech Alpine Electronics Inc t mto prohla uje e tento Bluetooth Module je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi Republic ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Denmark Undertegnede Alpine Electronics Inc erkl rer herved at f lgende udstyr Bluetooth Module overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Germany Hiermit erkl rt Alpine Electronics Inc dass sich das Ger t Bluetooth Module in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet 395 09 Specifications Type approval RA Estonia UK Spain Greece France Italy Latvia Lithuania Nether lands Malta Hungary K esolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics Inc seadme Bluetooth Module vastavust direktiivi 1999 5 EU pdhin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele s tetele Hereby Alpine Electronics Inc declares that this Bluetooth Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Por
116. CAR 3 My V70 XC70 The display screen shows a grouping of all of the car s driver support systems these can be activated or deactivated here My DRIVe Parts of Volvo s DRIVe concept are described here amongst other things e Start Stop e ECO driving guide For more information see page 126 Driver support system P Support systems Collision Warning Univailable ea Vi Lane Depart Warning Univailable Driver Alert Univailable G045296 MY CAR Support systems MY CAR gt Support systems The display screen shows a summary of the current status of the car s driver support sys tems Setup menus Shown here are the 4 first menu levels under MY CAR gt Settings Some menus have fur ther submenus these are then described in detail in their respective sections When selecting whether a function should be activated On or deactivated Off a square is displayed On Selected square n Option accessory for more information see Introduction Off Empty square e Select On Off with OK then back out of the menu with EXIT Car settings Car key memory p 85 en and 105 Off Lock settings p 49 Doors automatic lock and On Off Doors unlock All doors Driver door then all Keyless entry All doors Any door Doors on same side Both front doors 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Menu source MY CAR Reduced Guard p 63 Home safe light duration p 95 Steerin
117. Fuel driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater oye Operation 2 34 0100 fin to empty tank i G044582 LA 1 i 1 READ button 2 Thumbwheel RESET resets selects For more information on the information dis play and READ see page 146 Symbols and display messages When one of the timer s settings or Direct start is activated the infor mation symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates while the information display shows an explanatory text and a further illumi nated symbol The table shows symbols and display texts that appear Figure 2 in the symbol means the second climate control system in the car where the normal climate control system is the first The figure 2 has nothing to do with TIMER 1 or TIMER 2 Sym Display Specification wi bol 2 Fuel heater ON Timer is set for Fuel heater The heater is switched on and running The heater s timer is activated after the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch and leaving the car the engine and passenger com partment are heated at the set time FI Heater stopped Low bat tery Heater unavail Low fuel level Park heater Service required The heater has been stopped by the car s electron ics in order to facil itate starting the engine Setting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low approx 7 litr
118. Infotainment system 05 274 RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system Audio off It is possible to mute the two rear TV screens from the front TV screen The function is acti vated under RSE settings Mute in accord ance with point 2 4 in the section Selection of source in the rear TV screens see page 273 TV screen off It is possible to switch off the video for the two rear TV screens from the front TV screen The function is activated under RSE settings gt Display off in accordance with point 2 4 in the section Selection of source in the rear TV screens see page 273 Press one of the remote control s numeric keys 0 9 to switch on the TV screen again The TV screen is also switched to the On mode when the ignition is switched on Switching off the remote control front It is possible to switch off the IR receiver for the front TV screen which means that the remote control cannot be used for the front TV screen The function is activated under RSE settings gt Disable remote control front in accord ance with point 2 4 in the section Selection of source in the rear TV screens see page 273 1 Only available for playing back video files and displaying TV 2 Only applies to DVD video discs TV screen settings rear TV screen When playing back video files and displaying TV a pop up menu is available by means of pressing 2X onthe remote control The pop up menu has different content dependin
119. Introduction 187 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 188 Adaptive cruise control Cruise control Unavailable Cruise control cannot be activated This could be due to e brake temperature is high e the radar sensor is blocked by e g wet snow or rain Radar blocked See manual Cruise control temporarily disengaged e Theradar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles For example in the event that heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 185 Cruise control Service Cruise control disengaged required e Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Press Brake To hold The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to acoustic alarm take over and hold the car but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll a Only with Queue Assistant e The driver must brake himself herself The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal Below 30 km h Only fol Shown with attempts to activate the cruise control at speeds below 30 km h without a vehicle in front lowing within the activation distance approx 30 metres Only with Queue Assistant a Option accessory for more information see Introduction General Distance Warning Distance Alert
120. Miscellaneous e The default setting is that the camera is activated when reverse gear is engaged e One press on CAM activates the camera even if reverse gear is not engaged e Change between normal and zoomed image by turning TUNE or by pressing CAM e lf the car has more cameras installed then the camera in use is changed by turning TUNE i rl A Option accessory for more information see Introduction Limitations A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on the rear of the car could obscure the camera s view Pay attention to the possibility that even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured it could be a relatively large sector that is hidden from view Obstacles could thereby go undetected until they are very close to the car To bear in mind e Keep the camera lens free from dirt ice and snow e Clean the camera lens regularly with luke warm water and car shampoo take care not to scratch the lens 04 Comfort and driving pleasure BLIS Blind Spot Information System General information on BLIS If necessary the system can be switched off WARNING The system is a supplement to not a temporarily see the section Activate deacti vate replacement for a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors It can never replace the driver s attention and responsibility The Blind spots responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests
121. N Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 131 D 03 Your driving environment 03 Foot brake General The car is equipped with two brake circuits If one brake circuit is damaged then this will mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to produce the normal braking effect The driver s brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo WARNING The brake servo only works when the engine is running If the brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force must be used to brake the car In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking Engine braking is most efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up For more general information on heavy loads on the car see page 378 Anti lock braking system The car is equipped with ABS Anti lock Braking System which prevents the wheels from locking during braking This means the ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal A short test of the ABS system is made auto matically after the engine has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal A further automatic test of the ABS system may be made when the car reaches 10 km h The test may be experien
122. N 07 6 Unscrew the wheel s dust cap and screw 1 Open the lid of the emergency puncture in the air hose valve connection to the bot Risk of overheating The compressor must repair kit tom of the thread on the tyre s air valve not run for more than 10 minutes 2 Detach the label for maximum permitted ne Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and speed and affix it to the steering wheel start the car 10 Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge Minimum 322 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Emergency puncture repair TMK pressure is 1 8 bar and maximum 3 5 bar Release air with the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high If the pressure is below 1 8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big The journey should not be continued Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended 11 Switch off the compressor and unplug the cable from the 12 V socket 12 Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit the valve cap 13 As soon as possible drive approximately 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km h so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre Rechecking the repair and pressure 1 Reconnect the equipment 2 Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge e lf it is below 1 3 bar then the tyre is insufficiently sealed The journey should not be continued Contact a tyre centre e f the tyre pressure is higher than 1 3 bar the tyre mus
123. NING Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva lent chains designed for the car model and tyre and rim dimensions In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop The wrong snow chains may Cause serious damage to your car and lead to an accident 07 Wheels and tyres Specifications R Radial ply Traffic regulations determine how fast a car The car has whole vehicle approval This SPE can be driven not the speed rating of the tyres means that certain combinations of wheels and 17 Rim diameter in inches ict approved z the permissible com E E SS NOTE ANON ee Pags tyre load tyre load index LI It is the maximum permitted speed that is stated in the table ld E ri m collado fi fdi W Speed rating for maximum permitted asia rims have a designation of dimen speed speed rating SS In this case sions for example 7Jx16x50 270 km h Q 160 km h used only on winter tyres 7 Rim width in inches Loca index un J Rim flange profile Each tyre has acertain capacity to carrya load H 210 km h a load index LI The car s weight determines 16 Rim diameter in the load capacity required of the tyres Mini V 240 km h inches mum permitted index is specified in the table W 270 km h l l see page 387 50 Off set in mm dis l Y 300 km h tance from wheel Speed ratings centre to wheel con Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum tact surface against speed a speed rating Speed Symbol
124. O Instruments and controls Function Page 03 13 D 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls Right hand drive A 20 600 oof 00 808 Hazard warning flashers START STOP ENGINE key Ignition switch Cruise control Combined instrument panel Horn airbags Menu audio and phone control Wipers and washing Headlamp control opener for fuel filler flap and tailgate Door handle Control panel Seat adjustment Bonnet opener Function Page 93 Vs 82 li Wis DAS 22 89 148 230 258 219 100 101 61 90 289 60 65 103 105 84 328 14 B 16 SS 00 Parking brake Steering wheel adjust ment Menus and messages direction indicators main dipped beam trip computer Controls for active chas sis Four C Gear selector Control panel for climate control Menu control and audio system 136 89 90 93 146 170 174 120 156 148 230 279 Information displays G044558 The information displays show information on some of the car s functions e g cruise control trip computer and messages The information is shown with text and symbols There are further descriptions under the func tions that use the information displays Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment D Instruments and controls Function
125. O MEDIA RSE settings Mute Display off Disable remote control front TV parental control Reset all RSE settings 5 Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV Pop up menu RSE Press K on the remote control when a video file is being played back or the TV is being displayed in order to access the pop up menu Menu selections are made using the scroll wheel and the buttons on the remote control For information on the remote control see page 256 Display format Image settings Day Night mode Source menu DVD disc menu RSE menus rear TV screens Press K on the remote control when a source e g Disc is selected in order to access the RSE menus for the rear TV screen Menu selections are made using the scroll wheel and the buttons on the remote control For information on the remote control see page 256 RADIO Menu valid for AM FM1 FM2 DAB1 and DAB2 Day Night mode Display off Reset all RSE settings MEDIA RSE CD Audio menu Disc menu Random Day Night mode Display off Reset settings for disc RSE CD DVD Data menu Disc menu Random Repeat folder DivX VOD code What is shown in the pop up menu for the source menu depends on what is being played back or displayed it can be e g Disc menu or USB menu 7 Only applies to DVD video discs A Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system RSE Rear Seat Entertainment syste
126. Page 03 gt gt 79 D 03 Your driving environment 03 76 Instruments and controls Meters G044559 Meters in the combined instrument panel Speedometer 2 Fuel gauge See also Trip computer page 170 and Refuelling page 289 Tachometer The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute rpm Indicator information and warning symbols G044560 Indicator and warning symbols Main beam and direction indicator symbol B Indicator and warning symbols Symbol for DRIVe Start Stop see page 126 O Indicator and information symbols Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in key position Il or when the engine is started When the engine has started all the symbols should go out except the parking brake sym bol which only goes out when the brake is dis engaged If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position Il then all symbols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol for faults in the car s emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure Indicator and information symbols Symbol Specification ABL fault Emissions system ABS fault Rear fog lamp on Stability system Stability system sport mode SPORT ol Engine preheater diesel Low level in fuel tank Information read display text 1 For certain engine variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used Wa
127. Reducing environmental impact You can easily help reduce environmental impact here are a few tips 14 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Introduction Doo O h N Seatbelts ik Le eet POM oooh A E E 18 PRBS ies A AA 21 Activating deactivating the AirDaQ ccc0 ceccesescceseecceesecccenesccsenenseneess 24 Soh o CENEL SE er e e oc cccceccecccsscecceneesceeedcceereccneeeecsascccavencoeeescenesces 26 EIEI eaea a eee nen nen en ene 28 WOM A Mogae nir2ma ss svenedentcuwsrsevd ddecssdededead veseeveriaens 29 Viner the SISTEMA OY ac a Ea ea a 31 Safe MA A 32 CN l safety rotas Pietra ar a 33 16 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction SA El x SAFETY 9 01 Safety 01 18 Seatbelts G020995 Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used Ensure that all passengers use their seatbelts It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection Do not lean the backrest too far back The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position Putting on a seatbelt Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by press ing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle A loud click indicates that the belt has locked The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear seat 1 Certain markets Releasing the seatbelt Press the red button on the seatbelt b
128. Reinstall the parts in reverse order 08 Maintenance and service Main beam Halogen Y N e A o o 1 Detach the headlamp Remove the cover see page 336 Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise and then pulling straight out 4 Unplug the connector from the bulb Replace the bulb and align it in the socket and turn clockwise in order to secure it It can be secured in one position Reinstall the parts in reverse order Extra main beam ABL headlamps E N A o 0 Detach the headlamp Remove the cover see page 336 Detach the bulb by pressing the holder downwards Unplug the connector from the bulb Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it in It can only be secured in one position Reinstall the parts in reverse order Position parking lamps g N E QA o 0 Detach the headlamp Remove the cover see page 336 For better access detach the main beam bulb first Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulb holder Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one It can only be secured in one position Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press until a clicking sound is heard Reinstall the parts in reverse order i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 337 08 Maintenance and service 1 Detach the headlamp Remove the small round cover Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the 1 bulb 2 4 Remove t
129. Storing the position The mirror positions are stored in the key mem ory when the car has been locked with the remote control key When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key the mirrors and the driver s seat adopt the stored positions when the driver s door is opened The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings gt Car key memory Position of door mirrors and driver s seat in key For a description of the menu system see page 149 Angling the door mirror when parking The door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when parking for example Engage reverse gear and press the Lor R button When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position after about 10 seconds or earlier by pressing the button labelled L or R respectively Automatic angling of the door mirror when parking When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is automatically angled down so that the driver F i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment O 03 105 Q 03 Your driving environment 03 Windows rearview and door mirrors can see the side of the road when parking for example When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original posi tion after a while The function can be activated deactivated in the menu sy
130. TV channel starts immediately It is possible to change channel at any time when the message is shown If the message Reception lost searching is shown then this is because the system has detected that there is no reception for all TV channels One possible reason may be that a border has been crossed and that the system is set to the wrong country In which case change to the right country in accordance with Searching TV channels Preset list see page 254 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system 05 209 CS 05 Infotainment system Remote control The remote control can be used for all func tions in the infotainment system The remote control s buttons have the same functions as Do not expose the remote control to direct sunlight e g on the instrument panel oth erwise problems may arise with the batter the buttons in the centre console or steering wheel keypad When using the remote control first press the NAV RADIO MEDIA TEL remote control s button t to position F 44 i Cc Then aim the remote control at the IR receiver which is located to the right of the INFO button LER Change between DVD S see page 233 in the centre console u MENU a L Rear left TV screen If the car is fitted with rear TV screens and you want to operate one of these select the F Front TV screen required TV screen with the button a onthe R Rear ri
131. The fuses in C are located under A On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses e Fuses 1 7 and 42 44 are of the Midi Fuse type and must only be replaced by a work shop e Fuses 8 15 and 34 are of the JCASE type and should be replaced by a workshop e Fuses 16 33 and 35 41 are of the Mini Fuse type 1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended O 000 Primary fuse for the central elec tronic module CEM with fuse box B under the glovebox Primary fuse for the central elec tronic module CEM with fuse box B under the glovebox Primary fuse for central electri cal unit in cargo area Primary fuse for central electri cal unit in passenger compart ment with fuse box A under the glovebox Primary fuse for central electri cal unit in passenger compart ment with fuse box A under the glovebox PTC element air preheater Headlamp washers Windscreen wipers 50 60 60 60 100 20 30 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 009060090088 SO Parking heater Ventilation fan ABS pump ABS valves Headlamp levelling Active Xenon headlamps ABL Primary fuse for the central elec tronic module CEM with fuse box B under the glovebox ABS Speed related power steering Engine control module Trans mission control module Air bags Heated washer nozzles 40 40 20
132. U Character list o wxyz WXYZ9 Changing the input mode see table below Ph k x FAV Shift between upper and lower ene oe case letter To search for or edit a contact go in phone mode to Phone menu gt Phone book gt Search 4 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia gt gt i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 263 05 Infotainment system 05 264 Bluetooth handsfree 123 Change between letters and ABC numbers with OK MENU More Change to special characters with OK MENU gt Leads to the phone book 3 Turn TUNE to select a contact press OK MENU to see the saved numbers and other infor mation A short press on EXIT deletes an input char acter Along press on EXIT will clear all entered characters By pressing a number key in the centre console when the text wheel is shown see illustration above a new character list 1 appears in the TV screen Continue repeatedly pressing the number key to the desired letter and then release Continue with the next letter and so on When a button is depressed the entry is confirmed when another button is depressed To enter a number hold in the corresponding number key New contact Entering letters for New contact Changing the input mode see table below Input field New contacts can be added in phone mode under Phone menu gt Phone book gt New contact There is no text w
133. U Regulation no 692 2008 Euro 5 and UN ECE Regulation no 101 The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra urban driving Urban driving the measurement starts with cold starting the engine The driving is simulated Extra urban driving the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 120 km h The driving is simulated V70 with the D5 engine and 6 speed manual transmission or DRIVe engine and 6 speed manual transmission are started in 2nd gear The value for combined driving which is given in the table according to legislation is a combination of urban driving and extra urban driving CO emission to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions from the two drive cycles the exhaust gases are collected These are then analysed and give the value for CO emissions consumption For further information please refer to the regulations referred to Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in a comparison with the EU driving cycles which are used in the certification of the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based To bear in mind Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce consumption e Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel eration as well as braking too hard e Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly select ECO tyre pressure for best results see the tyre pressure table on page 389 e Choice of tyres can affect fuel consu
134. Upper illustration ED Pull out the headlamp s locking pins gt Pull the headlamp straight forward IMPORTANT Do not pull the electrical cable only the con nector Lower illustration Ep Detach the headlamp connector by pressing down the clip with your thumb 08 Maintenance and service 08 gt gt 08 Maintenance and service ED At the same time guide out the con nector with your other hand 4 Lift out the headlamp and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens 5 Replace the bulb in question Securing the headlamp 1 Plug in the connector a clicking sound should be heard 2 Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins Check that they are correctly inserted 3 Check the lighting The headlamp must be mounted and the con nector correctly installed before the lighting is switched on or the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch 08 Removing the cover N A o 0 Before starting to replace a bulb see page 335 1 Open the lock clamp by pressing up out 2 Press down the clips on the cover and remove it Reinstall the cover in reverse order Dipped beam halogen N E QA o 0 Detach the headlamp see page 335 Remove the cover Unplug the connector from the bulb e A IA Detach the bulb by pressing the holder downwards 5 Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it in It can be secured in one position
135. a L d T 86 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Adjust the head restraint according to passen ger height so that the whole of the back of the head is covered if possible Slide it up as required To lower the head restraint again the button located in the centre between the backrest and head restraint see illustration must be pressed in while the head restraint is pressed down Manual lowering of the outer head restraints rear seat G043830 Pull the locking handle closest to the head restraint to fold the head restraint forward The head restraint is moved back manually until a click can be heard Lowering the rear seat backrest There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down The seat belts must not be connected either Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery The triple section backrest can be folded in different ways The front seats may need to be pushed for wards and or the backrests adjusted upwards in order that the rear backrests can be folded forward fully e The left hand section can be folded sepa rately e The centre section can be folded sepa rately e The right hand section can only be folded together with the centre section e lf the entire backrest is to be folded then the different sections should be folded separately If the centre backrest is being lowered fold and adjust the
136. activated see page 189 123456 Only use the time interval that is allowed in accordance with local traffic regulations If cruise control does not seem to react to activation the reason may be that the time interval to the closest vehicle prevents an increase in speed The higher the speed the longer the calcu lated distance in metres for a specific time interval 5 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Temporary deactivation standby mode Press the steering wheel button 0 to tempo rarily disengage the cruise control and set it in standby mode set speed is shown in brackets in the display e g 100 Keypad without Speed limiter Press the steering wheel button f to tempo rarily disengage cruise control and set it in standby mode Standby mode due to driver intervention Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if e the foot brake is used e the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than 1 minute e the gear selector is moved to N position automatic gearbox e the driver maintains a speed higher than the set speed for longer than 1 minute The driver must then regulate the speed A temporary increase in speed with the accel erator pedal e g during overtaking does not affect the cruise control setting the car returns to the last stored speed when the accel
137. afforded by the seatbelt on the passen ger side It is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest Seatbelts must be secured Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located 01 Safety 9 01 WARNING Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life S 01 Safety Activating deactivating the airbag Key switch off PACOS General information The airbag for the front passenger seat can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch PACOS Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch For information on how to activate deactivate see under the heading Activating deactivating Key switch off switch The switch for the passenger airbag PACOS is located on the passenger end of the instru ment panel and is accessible when the pas senger door is open see under the heading below Activating deactivating Check that the switch is in the required posi tion Volvo recommends that the remote
138. ages 76 78 and 146 A Red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and or driveability of the car At the same time an explanatory text is displayed in the information display D Yellow information symbol illuminates in combination with text in the information dis play when a deviation in any of the car s sys tems has occurred The yellow symbol infor mation can also illuminate in combination with other symbols Indicator and warning symbols in the combined instrument panel 78 Low oil pres sure Parking brake Airbags SRS Seatbelt reminder Alternator not charging Fault in the brake system Warning safety mode 78 136 138 21 78 18 78 78 78 133 Al VS hei FS 124 09 Specifications Symbols in the display Symbols in the display 09 Indicator and information symbols in the combined instrument panel 112 lt i o el Q RR SPORT oO NM Meaning Page Fault in the ABL system Emissions sys tem Fault in the ABS system Rear fog lamp on Stability sys tem DSTC Hill descent con trol Trailer sta bility assist Stability sys tem sport mode Engine pre heater diesel Low level in fuel tank 7s EN 76 76 133 76 93 76 134 173 306 76 173 76 16 167 gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 40
139. ain markets 04 Comfort and driving pleasure D i A i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 A O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 172 DSTC Stability and traction control system NOTE General information on DSTC The stability and traction control system DSTC Dynamic Stability amp Traction Control helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car s traction The activation of the system during braking may be noticed as a throbbing sound The car may accelerate slower than expected when the accelerator pedal is depressed Active Yaw Control The function limits the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car Spin Control The function prevents the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during accel eration Traction control system The function is active at low speed and trans fers power from the driving wheel that is spin ning to the one that is not Trailer Stability Assist TSA The function serves to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake see page 306 The function is deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode Operation Selection of level Sport mode The DSTC system is always activated it can not be deactivated However the driver can select the Sport mode which allows for a more active driving experi ence In Sport mode the system detects whether the
140. al information on menu navigation and menu structures see page 279 Audio volume and automatic volume control The audio system compensates for disrupting noises in the passenger compartment by increasing the volume in relation to the speed of the car The compensation level can be set to low medium high or off Select the level under Audio settings gt Volume compensation For general information on menu navigation and menu structures see page 279 External audio source audio volume If an external audio source e g an MP3 player or iPod is connected to the AUX input then the audio source that is connected can have a different volume than the audio system s inter nal volume e g radio Correct this by adjust ing the volume of the input 1 Press the MEDIA button and turn TUNE to AUX and wait a few seconds or press OK MENU 05 Infotainment system General infotainment functions 2 Press OK MENU and then turn TUNE to able to adapt the sound reproduction accord AUX input volume Confirm with OK ing to personal taste MENU 3 Turn TUNE to adjust the volume for the AUX input If the external audio source s volume is too high or too low the quality of the sound may deteriorate The audio quality may also be impaired if the player is charged while the infotainment system is in AUX mode In which case avoid charging the player via the 12 V socket 05 Optimum sound reproduction The audio syst
141. also include different programme categories After selecting a programme type navigation only takes place within the channels that are broadcasting that type Programme type is selected in DAB mode under DAB menu gt PTY filtering Exit this mode as follows Press EXIT gt An indicator is shown in the TV screen when PTY is activated In certain cases DAB radio will exit PTY mode when DAB to DAB linking see below is imple mented Preset 10 station presets can be stored per wave length DAB has 2 memories for presets DAB1 and DAB2 Storing of presets is per formed in the usual way for more information see page 237 The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons 4 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 05 Infotainment system A preset contains one channel but no sub channels If a subchannel is being played and a preset is saved then only the main channel is registered This is because subchannels are temporary At the next attempt to retrieve the preset the channel which contained the sub channel will be played The preset is not dependent on the channel list A list of pre selected channels can be shown in the TV screen The function is activated deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu gt Show presets The audio system s DAB system does not support all functions available in the DAB standard Radio text Some radio stations transmit information o
142. alue in force Red lamp Disap proved test Wait 1 minute Engine starting not possible measured alcohol content is above the limit value in force A Limits vary between countries so find out what limits apply See also the section entitled General information on the Alcolock on page 111 After a completed period of driving the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test 1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended To bear in mind Before the breath test In order to obtain correct function and as accu rate a measurement result as possible e Avoid eating or drinking approx 5 minutes before the breath test e Avoid excess windscreen washing the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result Change of driver In order to ensure that a new breath test is car ried out in the event of a change of driver depress the switch 2 and the send button 3 simultaneously for approx 3 seconds At which point the car returns to start inhibition mode and a new approved breath test is required before starting the engine Calibration and service The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated at a workshop every 12 months 30 days before recalibration is necessary the display shows Alcoguard Calibr required If calibration is not carried out within these 30 days then normal engine starting will be blocked only starting with the Bypass func i a O
143. ame direction in the same lane Modification of the radar sensor could result in it being illegal to use The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis tance The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic weather and road conditions Read the whole of this section for informa tion on the limitations of the adaptive cruise control The driver must be familiar with this information before using the adaptive cruise control The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed even when the adaptive cruise control is being used Accessories or other objects such as auxil iary lamps must not be installed in front of the grille Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system The driver must inter vene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles Nor for oncoming slow or stationary vehi cles and objects Do not use the adaptive cruise control for example in city traffic in dense traffic at junctions on slippery surfaces with a lot of water or slush on the road in heavy rain snow in poor visibility on winding roads or on slip roads The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi cles in front is re
144. amplifier High Performance e 5 TV screen TFT e Steering wheel keypad with thumbwheel e AM FM radio e CD e AUX and USB input for e g iPod e Bluetooth handsfree streaming audio e 8 speakers e 4x40W amplifier High Performance Multimedia e 7 TV screen TFT e Steering wheel keypad with thumbwheel 1 Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia e AM FM radio CD DVD e AUX and USB input for e g iPod e Bluetooth handsfree streaming audio e 8 speakers e 4x40W amplifier Premium Sound Multimedia e 7 TV screen TFT Steering wheel keypad with thumbwheel AM FM radio CD DVD AUX and USB input for e g iPod Bluetooth handsfree streaming audio 12 speakers e 5x130W amplifier Dolby Pro Logic DO DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC II G044178 e Option accessory for more information see Introduction Made under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby Pro Logic and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Audyssey MultEQ NIOT SOC G044129 The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used in the development and tuning of the sound to ensure a world class sound experience Other If the Infotainment System is active when the engine is switched off then it is automatically activated the next time the key is inserted into key position I or higher and it continues with the same source e g radio as before the engine was switched off the driver s door must be closed on c
145. an 0 mue ls STO preven en 10m e Adoor s knob control only blocks that 02 opening a rear door from the inside particular door not both rear doors 2 Press the button in the driver s door control simultaneously panel Cars with an electric child safety lock do gt The information display shows the mes not have a manual child lock sage Rear child locks Activated and the button s lamp illuminates the locks are active Electrical locking of the rear doors When the electric child safety lock is active and power windows then the rear e windows can only be opened with the driv er s door control panel G021077 e doors cannot be opened from inside The current setting is stored when the engine is switched off if the child safety locks are activated at engine shutdown the function will remain activated the next time the engine is started The child safety locks are located on the trailing edge of the rear doors and are only accessible when the doors are open To activate deactivate the child safety locks Go44094 5 q Use the remote control key s detachable key blade to turn the knob see page 51 i l Control panel driver s door The door is blocked against opening from SOUE PATE VE SAO the inside The child safety locks can be activated deac tivated in all key positions higher than 0 see page 82 Activation deactivation can be per formed up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine provided tha
146. and number of files there may be some delay before loading is finished OK The system supports most iPod models produced in 2005 or later To prevent damage to the USB connection this is shut off if the USB connection is short circuited or if a connected USB unit is taking too much power this may happen if the unit connected does not meet the USB standard The USB connection is reactiva ted automatically the next time the ignition is turned on unless the fault persists Menus The menus in MEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key pad For general information on menu naviga tion and menu structures see page 279 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system 05 gt gt 247 CS 05 Infotainment system 05 248 External audio source via AUX USB input Playback and navigation Turn TUNE to access the playlist folder struc ture and navigate in the list structure Use OK MENU to either confirm selection of subfolder or start of playback of the selected audio video file Press EXIT to either stop and exit the play list or go up back in the folder structure A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist s root level Audio video files can also be changed by pressing Kea Y gt gt on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad Audio files have the symbol a video files4 have the symbol MN and folders have the sy
147. and then release it The power supply to the sunroof is switched off by removing the remote control key from the ignition switch WARNING If there are children in the car Remember to always switch off the power supply to the sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car Vertical opening Vertical opening raised at the rear edge ED Open by pressing the rear edge of the con trol upward Ed Close by pulling the rear edge of the con trol down i i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment ee Power sunroof 03 gt gt 109 D 03 Your driving environment Power sunroof 03 110 Closing using the remote control key or central locking button 19 3 A o o One long press on the lock button closes the sunroof and all the windows see pages 49 and 60 The doors and the tailgate are locked To interrupt closing press the lock button again WARNING If the sunroof is closed using the remote control key check that no one is in danger of becoming trapped in any way Sunscreen The sunroof features a manual sliding interior sunscreen The sunscreen slides back auto matically when the sunroof is opened Grip the handle and slide the screen forward to close it Pinch protection The sunroof s pinch protection function is trig gered if it is blocked by an object during auto matic closing If b
148. apes into the car This is completely nor mal The entire process including inflation and deflation of the airbag occurs within tenths of a second Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious per sonal injury 01 Safety 9 01 21 S 01 Safety 01 an The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts on the driver and passen ger side are used It is therefore possible that only one or none of the airbags may inflate in a colli sion The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accord ingly so that one or more airbags are deployed The capacity of the airbags is also adapted to the collision force to which the vehicle is subjected i o A L Location of the front passenger airbag in a left hand drive car Location of the front passenger airbag in a right hand drive car The car has an airbag to supplement the pro tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver s side It is folded up into the centre of the steer ing wheel The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG The seatbelts and airbags interact If a seat belt is not used or is used incorrectly this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision The car has an airbag to supplement the pro tection
149. argo retaining hooks in the rail Removing a cargo retaining hook G018134 The cargo retaining hooks can be easily removed from the rail e g for cleaning the bot tom of the rail 13 Fold the cargo retaining hook down in the direction to which its opening points E gt Press the hook down lightly and at the same time slide it to the cut out opening E Lift the hook straight up Securing the hook takes place in reverse order A removed hook must be pressed down lightly at the same time in order to enable its reinsertion into the rail Cargo retaining hook correctly fitted incorrectly fitted ite o o o Fit the cargo retaining hooks correctly It is important that the cargo retaining hooks are fitted correctly The hooks openings must point away from each other WARNING Fit the cargo retaining hooks correctly Oth erwise the cargo retaining strap will move the cargo retaining hook down so that it loosens and the strap slides off 06 During your journey Loading Bag holder 12 V electrical socket Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and Lower the cover to access the electrical prevents them from overturning and spreading socket their contents across the cargo area e The socket also provides voltage when the 1 Fold up the holder which is part of the floor dla control key is not in the ignition hatch 2
150. arnings and brake inter ventions at vehicle speeds up to 50 km h For stationary or slow moving vehicles warnings and brake interventions are effec tive at vehicle speeds up to 70 km h Warnings for stationary or slow moving vehicles could be disengaged due to dark ness or poor visibility The collision warning system uses the same radar sensors as adaptive cruise control For more information on the radar sensor and its limitations see page 185 If warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning distance can be reduced This would lead to the system warn ing at a later stage which reduces the total number of warnings When the car is reversing Collision Warning with Auto Brake cannot be activated Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti vated at low speeds under 4 km h which is why the system does not intervene in situations where the car is approaching a vehicle in front very slowly e g when parking Driver commands are always prioritised which is why Collision Warning with Auto Brake does not intervene in situations where the driver is steering braking or accelerating in a clear manner even if a collision is unavoidable When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta tionary for a maximum of 1 5 seconds If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicl
151. ars with Keyless systems The infotainment system can be used for 15 minutes at a time without the remote control 05 Infotainment system General information on infotainment key being in the ignition switch by pressing the On Off button When the car is being started the infotainment system is switched off temporarily and contin ues when the engine has started Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch if the infotainment system is used when the engine is switched off This is to avoid discharging the battery unnec essarily 05 05 Infotainment system 05 228 Quick start Overview Infotainment AUX and USB inputs for external audio sources e g iPod Steering wheel keypad Centre console control panel O TV screen The TV screen is available in two sizes 5 applies to Performance and High Performance and 7 applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia The manual shows the 7 TV screen O Rear control panel with headphones socket AV AUX input Operating the system im 1 A Short press starts the system and long press switches off Briefly press to mute the sound MUTE or restore the sound if it had been switched off 2 Select a source by pressing one of the but tons e g RADIO MEDIA etc Press repeatedly in order to scroll down among the options on the TV screen e g FM1 release and wait a secon
152. as an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing Eight different directions are shown with English abbreviations N north NE north east E east SE South east S South SW south west W west and NW north west The compass is activated automatically when the car is started or in key position Il see page 82 To deactivate activate the compass press in the button on the rear side of the mirror using a paper clip for example correctly C is shown in the mirror s display if the compass needs calibrating 1 Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high voltage power lines 2 Start the car For optimum calibration switch off all elec trical equipment climate control system wipers etc and make sure that all doors are closed 3 Press and hold the button on the rear of the rearview mirror use a paper clip or similar until C is shown again approx 6 seconds 4 Drive off as usual C disappears from the display when calibration is complete Alternative calibration method Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 8 km h until C disappears from the display when calibration is complete a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Magnetic zones The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones The correct zone must be selected for the com pass to work correctly 1 The remote control k
153. ashers Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release The direction indicators flash three times The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Light settings Triple turn signal For a description of the menu sys tem see page 149 03 Your driving environment EN Lighting 03 gt gt es D 03 Your driving environment 03 Lighting Continuous flash sequence 23 Move the stalk switch up or down to the outer position The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually or automatically by the steering wheel movement Direction indicator symbols For direction indicator symbols see page 76 Interior lighting G021149 Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting Reading lamp left hand side Reading lamp right hand side Interior lighting All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes from when e the engine has been switched off and the remote control key is in position O e the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started Front roof lighting The front reading lamps are switched on or off by pressing the relevant button in the roof con sole Rear roof lighting ie y Hi i G021150 Rear roof lighting The lamps are switched on or off by pressing each r
154. ater e Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo e Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces e Dry the car using a clean soft chamois or a water scraper WARNING Always have the engine cleaned by a work shop There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot IMPORTANT Dirty headlamps have impaired functional ity Clean them regularly when refuelling for example Outside lighting such as headlamps fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens This is normal all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time Cleaning the wiper blades Asphalt dust and salt residue on wiper blades as well as insects ice etc on the windscreen impair the service life of wiper blades For cleaning Set the wiper blades in service position see page 342 Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo Do not use any strong solvents Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car but it cannot reach everywhere Handwashing the car is recom mended for achieving optimum results During the first few months a new car must only be handwashed This is because the paintwork is more sensitive when it is new High pressure washing When using h
155. ates important systems such as the power steering and brake servo Driving in water The car can be driven through water at a maxi mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of 10 km h Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water During driving in water maintain a low speed and do not stop the car When the water has been passed depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function e Clean the electric contacts of the electric engine block heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud e Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time this could cause electrical malfunctions IMPORTANT Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter In depths greater than 25 cm water could enter the transmission This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of these systems In the event of the engine stalling in water do not try restart tow the car from the water to a workshop an authorised Volvo work shop is recommended Risk of engine breakdown Engine gearbox and cooling system Under special conditions for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat in particular with a heavy load For information about overheating whe
156. atically after a certain time The rear window is demisted defrosted auto matically if the car is started in an outside tem perature lower than 9 C Automatic defrost ing can be selected in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Climate settings gt Automatic rear defroster Select between On or Off For a description of the menu sys tem see page 149 Interior rearview mirror o 52 ite o 0 Control for dimming Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver Use Windows rearview and door mirrors dimming with the dimming control when lights from behind are distracting 1 Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment 2 Return to normal position by moving the control towards the windscreen Automatic dimming Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror The control is not available in mirrors with automatic dim ming The compass can only be specified for rear view mirrors with automatic dimming see page 108 03 Your driving environment D j f Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 107 D 03 Your driving environment 03 108 Compass Operation Calibration a The compass may need calibrating to work N 5 10 t o 0 Rearview mirror with compass The upper right hand corner of the rearview mirror h
157. ation Collision warning system switched off Shown when the engine is started The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button The collision warning system cannot be activated Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button Auto Brake has been active The message clears after one press of the READ button F i 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 201 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian detection Wind screen Sensors blocked Radar blocked See man 04 ual Collision warn Service required Specification The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged Shown in the event of snow ice or dirt on the windscreen for example e Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor Read about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 199 Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles For example in the event that heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 185 Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authori
158. ations cccccccccscssccssssccesssssssssessessesssessesssessessessensess 376 Blade VS Olle eee ooo A E 378 0 il 2 0 A Smo e 381 DORP A o 383 Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure occcocccoccoconcconncncnonaninanos 387 00 2 il EleciAcal SM a as A 392 TYPOS VAD prov mo a eai A 393 Symbols in the GIG BAY aaa tras Pra e a a 405 366 01 10 SPECIFICATIONS ol 09 Specifications 00 11 09 Type designations Label location VOLVO CAR CORPORATION R525345 1234567 31301652 SAINI A a US ele A Po VOLVO AVES N A O O E 1D MADE IN JAPAN G044975 010 11 Type designations 09 09 Specifications Knowing the car s type designation vehicle identification and engine numbers can facili tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer The labels shown in the owner s manual are f not provided as exact reproductions of regarding the car and when ordering spare Hell Ot E epi EEN parts and accessories their approximate appearance and location Type designation vehicle identification in the car The information that applies to your Car in particular is available on the label number maximum permissible weights oe in question in your car codes for colour and upholstery and type approval number The label is visible when the right rear door is opened Label for parking heater Engine code component and serial num bers Label for engine o
159. ay shows the message Windscreen Sensors blocked then this means that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect pedestrians vehicles or road markings in front of the car In turn this means that the Collision Warning with Auto Brake Lane Departure Warning and Driver Alert Control functions are not operating with full functionality The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action The windscreen sur Clean the wind face in front of the screen surface in camera is dirty or front of the camera covered with ice or from dirt ice and snow snow No action At times the camera does not work during heavy rain or snowfall Thick fog heavy rain or snow means that the camera does not work sufficiently well if Option accessory for more information see Introduction Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian detection The windscreen sur face in front of the camera has been Wait It may take cleaned but the the camera to meas Dirt has appeared Visit a workshop to several minutes for message remains ure the visibility between the inside have the windscreen of the windscreen inside the camera and the camera cover cleaned an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended Symbols and messages in the display A A EE Collis n warning OFF Collision warn Unavaila ble Auto brak ing was activated Symbol Specific
160. bar unit beside the SI unit pascal 1 bar 100 kPa 01 10 010 111 09 392 09 Specifications Electrical system Electrical system The car has a voltage regulated AC alternator The electrical system is single pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor The battery capacity is dependent upon the equipment level in the vehicle IMPORTANT If the battery is replaced replace it with a battery of the same cold start capacity and reserve capacity as the original see the decal on the battery Cold start capacity Reserve capacity Battery Voltage V Petrol Ethanol 12 Diesel 12 Petrol Diesel with Start Stop function 12 A Battery type AGM Absorbed Glass Mat must be used in cars with the Start Stop function e The battery s container size should be consistent with the original battery s dimensions e The battery s height is different depend ing on size Eco Start Stop DRIVe For information on batteries in cars with Eco Start Stop DRIVe see page 347 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction CCA Cold Cranking Amperes A minutes 520 800 100 160 700 800 135 160 7604 135 Type approval Remote control system CT A B CY CZ D DK E ESL E FIN GB GR HI IRE CET LV M NL P PES SK SLO IS LI N CH HR ROK C E Delphi hereby certifies that this remote control key system conforms to the essential charact
161. be heard during the auto matic function checking of the parking brake If the car is stationary when the parking brake is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels If it is applied when the car is moving then the normal foot brake is used i e the brake acts on all four wheels Brake function changes over to the rear wheels when the car is almost sta tionary Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can neither be released nor applied Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low see page 119 Applying the parking brake on PUSH LOCK o o ite o O Parking brake control apply Press the foot brake pedal down firmly N Press the control gt The combined instrument panel symbol OJH starts flashing once there is a constant glow it is applied 3 Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position e When parking the vehicle always engage 1st gear for manual gearbox or put the gear selector in position P for automatic gearbox In an emergency the parking brake can be applied when the vehicle is moving by depress ing the control When the control is released or the accelerator pedal is depressed the braking is interrupted In the event of emergency braking at speeds above 10 km h a signal sounds during the braking procedure Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill e Turn the
162. c iairiiionaan an caos 266 MY CAR PPP Pron 148 Oil see also Engine Oll oooccnncccnnnnncnco 378 Oil level SW torocoris tocada 329 Over Cati iio dns 301 Owner s manual environmental labelling 14 PACO ies 24 PACOS SWITON incurra 24 Paintwork COMO COD S ir cecteccindpindentuaitoiananieneanpanhoad 364 damage and touCh uP ccceeeeeneees 363 10 Alphabetical Index E Panel ION e mail 90 phone book Shortcut cccceeeeeees 262 R Panie fonii espantada 49 receiving a Calle eee eseeteteeetetee testes 260 10 Park aseiet 949 register phON ooccccconcnncccononccnnnnancnnnns 259 Radar SENSO accionados 179 e E sseohna ras pin He voice CONTO dnconicras iria 266 o A res nr cererers fer crore etre 185 Parang SS ISIaneS tet mae Pinch protection SUNFOOT ccseceeeeee 110 PG CIO asar rana E 236 parking assistance sensors 211 AM EM 036 POMS IMIG no O AAA ee Parking DK ccososaiinimasaccianeccisene 136 o DI A A AN 240 Parking heater ccccccononccooooocncnnnnnnccnnnnnas 166 ERA A pinta oe Menu Structure ooocccccccnnnnccccncconononanons 279 battery and fUel cccccecessecesesseseseeseeees 166 POWEC Seal ansias laos 85 eS a ce eet se 100 parking on a ML consranosisds 166 Powershift gearDoX ccccesseeeeees 123 307 Rear bulbs A nares ctvcactne Ene POWEer SUNIOOT sssceeesetereteteeeeseeeseseeees 109 o PA 339 Passenger compartment see 219 Power W
163. c TUNGUONS asas ctato 229 source buttons Instrument lighting see Lighting Instrument overview left hand drive right hand drive Instruments and controls Interior lighting see Lighting Interior rearview mirror automatic dimming Intermittent wiping iPod connection o a 51 Keyless AO ctcrinciciaaiiioantis 57115 Keyless start keyless drive 57 115 Keypad in the steering WHEE l cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 89 149 175 230 Key DOSIS soso 82 L ia AAN T 368 Laminated Olas usscsc ri 103 Lamps see LightiNo o cccoocccconioonmc 335 Lane Departure Control cooccccccnccon o 206 Ec OM aiccectcetsancadanccnscacedsateenesncrenneuss 11 Leather upholstery washing instructions 362 335 Active Xenon headlamps c0000 91 approach light duration 49 95 automatic lighting passenger compart Mes clas 94 bulbs specifications cccconcoooo o 340 COMO esmsdos iria fal 94 display MOTO surta 90 front fog AIM DS cri eosicisensienaste 92 headlamp levelling occooocmmo 90 home Safe lighting cooocococno 95 in passenger compartment 0008 94 instrument lightinNg ccoooccioncnicno 90 main dipped Dea ccsccssceseeeeeees 90 position parking laMpS coocccccocncnoo 92 rear fog laAMP acescncte cecdcehactennhctsatcteewnitstes 93 Lighting bulb replacement
164. carried out as follows 1 Access the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Reduced guard for a detailed description of the menu system see page 148 2 Select Activate once gt The instrument panel display shows the message Reduced guard See manual and the deadlocks function is switched off when the car is locked or Select Ask on exit gt Each time the engine is switched off the centre console display screen shows the message Activate Reduced Guard until engine has started again fol lowed by the alternatives Confirm with OK and Cancel with EXIT If the deadlocks function shall be switched off Press OK MENU and lock the car Note that the alarm s movement and tilt detec tors are switched off at the same time see page 67 gt The next time the engine is started the system is reset to zero and the instru ment panel display shows the message Full guard at which the deadlocks z Option accessory for more information see Introduction function and the alarm s movement and tilt detectors are re engaged If the locking system shall not be changed Press EXIT and lock the car Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered 02 Locks and alarm Child safety locks 1 Start the engine or choose a key position Manual blocking of the rear doors i i higher th
165. cccceeeeeeeeees 156 GUEL c 103 Sunscreen SUNTOOf oococccccccncncnnnananano conos 110 Temperature Control 163 Trip COMPU Famoooconononcnnnnononencnrannrenennnnnno 170 o AA 226 234 Testing the alarm SySteM oococcccnccnonccnnnns 67 Trip Met cocococnononnononnnrnnnnnrananenenenenennnrnoss 19 o ean eee ee mene ee re ee 173 i a e SC Ep CO 164 TSA trailer stability assist 172 306 INGICALON S MDOIS sinse 76 DO 317 Tio don 293 meen te de Total airing function oocmommmoo 61 157 Type approval remote control key sys warning SVIMDONS x cssicaseewiedenceessvwscencanence 76 tem 393 esas Towbar MM oir ve Pae detachable attachment c cccscscscsesesee 304 Type designation cccccceeeeeeeeee 368 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 195 201 detachable removal ooooonnnnncccnncccnns 305 Tyres Distance Alert c ccccccsssceeeeseeeeeeees 190 Towbar see Towing equipment 302 polilla Oe Driver Alert Control ccccssesceesseeees 204 WOW IAG ura dire rea 307 e a ote ios eee 310 Lane Departure Warning9 207 TOWINO EYO orincia iaa riada 308 sde AER 312 Symbols and messages in the Adaptive Towing CAD ACILY asicaranicinnoaia ri 372 nad E 319 387 Cruise COMO acaccnonnnnonnonnonnenninninren renos 187 Towing equipment 302 puncture FPAil ee eeeeeeseeeseeseseeeeeees 321 SPECIFICATIONS cccccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 303 SPECIFICATIONS 0scceeeeeeeeeeeees 3
166. ccononnnannss 307 IP oI AEAEE A A VA A T EA 302 Automatic lock Naciones 61 Automatic relocCkiN9 cccooonccconcnononononcos 60 Auxiliary Ned i cacnvcssecd casteatccdoantecleaseedsns 169 AUX WUT essa 228 247 AWD All wheel drive 131 Backrest erens a a n 84 front Seat lowering conccccconnnccononoc 84 Backrest rear Seat lowerin9 87 Bad NOME sedoso lied 297 Bate ansiada 344 392 NEAGDONONESS itescissesecirstdevendverecduesveeaeies 272 MAINTENANCE a veer sicitsintnadnn rats 344 Remote control sicsiieisssnndsseseiceisinseevaces 257 remote control key PCC ccccesceees 55 start assistant 119 symbols on the battery 345 warning SMDO Sussssicicaasirosiacica s 345 Bioethanol ESD oocccocccccoccccconcconccanocanononos 291 Blind spot BUS sicario cian 215 Blind Spot Information System BLIS 215 Bluetooth hr gra lc sacitwitntecitastanadiviceddavistitersentdde 258 io A cauetusee eeawivecuaesnce 250 microphone off assistance 260 streaming audio ooccccononccononenononononanos 250 transfer call to mobile 260 Bonnet OPenNiNQ coocccoccnccncnncnnnninnnononanons 328 Brake and Clutch fluid oo 333 gia op MA o A 92 nn 132 anti lock braking system ABS 132 brake WOM 92 brake SS cocinada 132 electric parking brake 136 Emergency Brake Assistance EBA 132 emergency brake lights 9
167. ced as pulses in the brake pedal Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about sudden braking The function means that the brake light flashes instead of as in normal braking shining with a constant glow Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds above 50 km h if the ABS system is working and or in the event of sudden braking After the car s speed has been slowed below 10 km h the brake light returns from flashing to the normal constant glow while at the same time the hazard warning flashers are activated and they flash until the driver changes engine speed with the accelerator pedal or they are deactivated with their button see page 93 Cleaning the brake discs Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs may result in delayed brake function This delay is minimised by cleaning the brake linings Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road sur faces prior to long stay parking and after the car has been washed Carry this out by braking gently during a short period while en route Emergency Brake Assistance Emergency Brake Assistance EBA Emergency Brake Assist helps to increase brake force and so reduce braking distance EBA detects the driver s braking style and increases brake force as necessary The brake force can be rein forced up to the level when the ABS system is engaged The EBA function is interrupted when the pressur
168. changes will not be saved to the phone From the car this will now look like you have double records with different icons Note also that when a shortcut num ber is saved or a change to a contact is made this will result in a new record in the car s phone book All use of the phone book requires that the F symbol appears at the top of the TV screen and that the handsfree function is in phone mode The audio system stores a copy of the phone book from each paired mobile phone The phone book can be copied automatically to the audio system during each connection Activate deactivate the function in phone mode under Phone menu gt Phone settings Phonebook download If the phone book contains a ringing caller s contact information then this is shown in the TV screen i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Quick search for contacts In normal view turn TUNE to the right to obtain a list of contacts Turn TUNE to select and press OK MENU to call Under the name of the contact is the phone number that is selected by default If the sym bol appears to the right of the contact then there are several phone numbers stored for the contact Change and dial a different number than the one that is selected by default by pressing the button so on the control panel in the centre console Then turn TUNE to select and press OK MENU to call Search in the list of contacts by using the cen t
169. cial characters with OK MENU OK Save and go back to Add con tact with OK MENU alA Change between uppercase and lowercase letters with OK MENU lt gt ie OK MENU the cursor moves to the input field 2 at the top of the TV screen The cursor can now be moved with TUNE to the appropriate place to e g insert new letters or delete with EXIT To be able to insert new letters first go back to the input mode by pressing OK MENU Speed dial numbers Use phone mode to add speed dial numbers under Phone menu gt Phone book gt Speed dial Dialling with speed dial numbers can be per formed in phone mode using the number keys on the keypad in the centre console by press ing a number key and then pressing OK MENU If there is no contact stored on the speed dial number then an option is shown to save a contact to the selected speed dial num ber Receiving a vCard It is possible to receive a vCard to the car s phone book from other mobile phones other than the one currently connected to the car In order to allow this the car is set to visible mode for Bluetooth The function is activated in phone mode under Phone menu gt Phone book gt Receive vCard Memory status Memory status of the car s phone book and the connected mobile phone s phone book can be seen in phone mode under Phone menu gt Phone book Memory status Delete phone book The car s phone book can be deleted this is carried ou
170. cient heating in the passenger compartment Fuel driven additional heater A fuel driven additional heater is fitted in cars with diesel engines The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off When the additional heater is active there may be smoke from the right hand wheel housing which is perfectly normal Auto mode or shutdown The additional heater s automatic start sequence can be switched off if required 000km to empty tank G044582 ik READ button 2 Thumbwheel RESET button 1 Before starting the engine Select key posi tion l see page 82 2 Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional heat auto 3 Press RESET to select between ON and OFF The menu options are only visible in key position any adjustments must therefore be made before starting the engine 1 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned 2 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned Passenger compartment heater If the additional heater is supplemented with timer function then it can be used as a fuel driven passenger compartment heater see page 166 Electric additional heater Cars with certain petrol engines have an elec tric additional heater integrated into the car s climate con
171. ck the driver s door with the detacha ble key blade 4 Open the driver s door gt A siren should sound and all direction indicators should flash 02 5 Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key Testing the alarm sensors for the bonnet 1 Sitin the car and deactivate the movement detector see the previous section Reduced alarm level 2 Remain sitting in the car and engage the alarm function with the remote control key s lock button Wait 15 seconds Open the bonnet with the handle under the dashboard gt A siren should sound and all direction indicators should flash 5 Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key 68 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm PC Instruments and CONTIOIS ccccccececcececccecccecccecccecceacsceaeeceneeneceeneaeass 12 VOWO Oe SUS neos 81 e A rs PUC et 82 Uno tinweswiatorsentdunehescnteatdieredancetataeeda 84 Steering Wh8l oooccconncccccccncococnnnononocononnnconnnnnnnanonononnnnonannnrnannrnnnnnanenanans 89 Eso A APP e an 90 Wipers and WAS ING mssisasiiaisn teen arcordinco biien oddo 100 Windows rearview and door MITTOFS ccoconccconcncnnoncnnoncnnoncnnoncncnnononnnnos 108 COMPASS sata ir opened 108 E e eo E An 109 Alcoguar dinos arsr E e 144 Mesta the ie 115 Kiting the eones SUE accionada cod LET Starting the engine external battery
172. ck will take place with this setting DO DIGITAL then appears in the TV screen When Off is selected 3 channel stereo is available eo Bass Bass level e Treble Treble level e Fader Balance between the front and rear speakers e Balance Balance between the left and right hand speakers e Subwoofer Bass speaker level e DPL II center level3 channel center level Volume for centre speaker e DPL II surround level Level for sur round 1 Only Premium Sound Multimedia 2 Only when Surround is activated 3 Not Performance Advanced audio settings Equalizer The volume level can be adjusted separately for different wavelengths 1 Press OK MENU to access Audio settings and select Equalizer 2 Select wavelength by turning TUNE and confirm with OK MENU 3 Adjust the volume level by turning TUNE and confirm with OK MENU Continue in the same way with other wavelengths 4 When you are finished with the settings turn TUNE OK and confirm by pressing OK MENU or EXIT For general information on menu navigation and menu structures see page 279 Sound stage The sound experience can be optimised for the driver s seat both front seats or the rear seat If there are passengers in both the front and rear seats then the option recommended is both front seats The options can be selected under Audio settings Sound stage Option accessory for more information see Introduction For gener
173. coloured fields in order to illustrate the distance to detected obstacles see page 209 The camera is active approx 5 seconds after reverse gear has been disengaged or until the car s speed exceeds 10 km h Camera location next to the opening hanale Park assist camera Light conditions The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions Because of this the image may vary slightly in brightness and quality Poor light conditions can result in a slightly reduced image quality Keep camera lenses clear of dirt snow and ice to ensure the best possible function This is particularly important in poor light Park assist lines G041224 Examples of how the park assist lines can be dis played for the driver The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and are directly related to steering wheel movement which shows the driver the path the car will take even when turning When reversing with a trailer which is not connected electrically to the car the lines on the display show the route the car will take not the trailer The screen shows no lines when a trailer is connected electrically to the car s electrical system The parking camera is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo genuine trailer cable is used IMPORTANT Bear in mind that the screen only shows the area behind the car pay atte
174. commended No automatic system can guarantee 100 correct function in all situations Therefore never try out the Auto brake sys tem by driving towards people this may Cause serious injuries or risk death The collision warning system does not engage in all driving situations or traffic weather or road conditions The collision warning system does not react to vehicles driving in another direction to the car or to animals Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision The Function section and the section after advise about limitations of which the driver should be aware before using Collision Warning with Auto Brake Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians are switched off at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km h Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians do not work in darkness and tunnels not even when streetlights are lit The auto brake function can prevent a col lision or reduce collision speed To ensure full brake performance the driver should always depress the brake pedal even when the car auto brakes Never wait for a collision warning The driver is always responsible that the correct dis tance and speed are maintained even when the collision warning system with auto brake is used 196 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Function G017382 Function overview Visual warning signal in the event of a col lision risk Ra
175. connected and properly tight ened WARNING e The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas which is highly explosive A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con nected incorrectly and this can be enough for the battery to explode e The battery contains sulphuric acid which can cause serious burns e f sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes skin or clothing flush with large quantities of water If acid splashes into the eyes seek medical attention immediately The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly The life of the battery is affected by several factors including driving conditions and cli mate Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances Extreme cold further limits star ting capacity To maintain the battery in good condition at least 15 minutes of driving week is recom mended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life IMPORTANT Never use a quick charger to charge the battery IMPORTANT If the following instruction is not observed then the energy saving function for infotain ment may be temporarily disengaged and or the message in the information display about the main battery s state of charge may be temporarily
176. controls for basic functions monly used function in AM FM etc For r c o Y t o 0 SOUND leads to the audio settings menu more information see page 233 05 bass treble etc For more information see page 233 VOL turn to raise or lower the volume 0 short press starts the systemand General information about views in the long press switches off Briefly press to TY screen yee conta JP yP The system contains four different types of _ Speed dial mute the sound MUTE or restore the i z A ol views A top level menu so called Parent view Pi Receive vCard l l common to all sources see page 230 For Memory status Preset buttons input of numbers and let each source there are three different basic A types of views en 5 He bd to leal ae e Normal view normal mode for the source racks folders radio an stations l phone contacts ornavgatetough t die ads rad TE options on the TV screen pia ea ging Example of menu view Bluetooth handsfree e Menu view for menu navigation Option accessory for more information see Introduction 229 05 Infotainment system Quick start Parent view 044043 OS00OS Example of parent view Radio Sources e g RADIO MEDIA etc see table Source menu e g FM1 DISC etc A long press on EXIT on the steering wheel keypad leads to the highest menu level called parent view see illustration above The fu
177. cted an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended AUTO STOP Auto Start Stop serv required The engine Auto Stop is ready to ped auto start 03 waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed Engine Symbol Message Info Symbol Message Info Action Action RIVO Eco Start Stop DRIVe is not opera tional A workshop should be contacted in which case an authorised Volvo work shop Is rec ommended The engine will not auto start start the engine normally with the START STOP ENGINE button Press the START but ton A Occurs if e g the seatbelt is taken off after the engine has auto stopped If a message does not go out following com pletion of the action then a workshop should 130 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction All wheel drive AWD All Wheel Drive is always available G039678 All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving all four wheels at the same time The power is automatically distributed between the front and rear wheels An elec tronically controlled clutch system distributes the power to the wheels that have the best grip on the current road surface This provides the best traction and prevents wheel spin Under normal driving conditions the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain snow and icy conditions 03 Your driving environment E
178. cy puncture repair cccccc 321 Emissions of carbon dioxide 293 Engine OV SIMS a cinc ads 301 o E E AET E 118 Engine block heater oococooocccononccconnniononocos 117 nn 166 Engine braking automaltiC ccccocccco 134 Engine compartment COGAN E orure a 332 E PEPPE AONE PE senal 329 OVEN Wienen 329 power steering fluid cm omomm 334 ENGINE Olle isnsteasctteiawec enecedensersectennse 329 378 adverse driving CONditiONS 378 CAapacitiesS ocoonnocnccconcconnoconocononancnnnnos 378 L i A A T E con 329 nn 378 Engine specificatiOnS ccconnnncconnnonom 3 6 Environmental labelling FSC owner s o ecere toca seine atteticcaeceacenatesinereneeuwteresenecse 14 Error messages Driver Alert Control cccccsceeseeeeees 204 Lane Departure Warning 200008 207 see Messages and symbols 138 187 Error messages in BLIS ccccseseeeeees 217 Error messages in Distance Alert 190 Error messages in the Adaptive cruise con IYO POP ee o E E EA 187 ETC electronic temperature control 160 Expectant mothers seatbelt 19 External diMEnNSiONS occocccoccconcconccccnnnnns 370 Fault tracing for the camera sensor 194 200 First aid equipMeNt occcoccccnncccccnncnannnnannns 320 FISE ad Kaori ddr caricia 320 no E E E E 117 adaptalo scrisa s 118 Fluids CADACHICS accordance 381 Fluids
179. d and the selec tion is accepted automatically Alterna tively it is possible to turn TUNE and con firm with OK MENU TUNE turn to fast scroll among disc tracks folders radio and TV stations phone contacts or navigate through options on the TV screen e g FM1 Disc 1 USB only applies to High Performance High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia i rr a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Source buttons i nen Control panel with buttons for source selection RADIO Select for example AM FM1 FM2 DAB1 DAB2 MEDIA Select for example Disc USB iPod AUX Bluetooth TV 6 TEL Bluetooth handsfree MY CAR See page 148 05 Infotainment system Quick start OK MENU accepts selections in menus The views have different appearances depend Lead to submenus in selected source e g ing on the source in car equipment settings RADIO or MEDIA etc lj AER rupts the current function rejects calls and Se So ya EXIT leads up in the menu system inter aun Sy ae deletes input characters One long press Sa lea Ea leads to the highest menu level parent ha view see page 230 INFO press the button to see more infor mation about a function song etc For more information see page 233 G045304 FAV shortcut to a favourite setting The button can be programmed for a com Centre console with
180. d automatically Acti vate deactivate in phone mode under Phone 3 Not supported by all mobile phones menu Phone settings Sounds and volume gt Mute radio media Ring volume In phone mode go to Phone menu gt Phone settings Sounds and volume gt Ring volume and adjust by turning VOL Press EXIT to save Ring signals The handsfree function has integrated ring sig nals that can be selected in phone mode under Phone menu Phone settings Sounds and volume Ring signals gt Ring signal 1 etc For some mobile phones the ringtone on the phone connected will not be switched off when one of the inbuilt signals for the handsfree system is used In order to select the connected phone s ring signal go in phone mode to Phone menu gt Phone settings Sounds and volume gt Ring signals Mobile phone ring signal More on pairing and connecting A maximum of ten mobile phones can be paired registered Pairing is performed once per phone After pairing the phone no longer needs to be visible detectable A maximum of one mobile phone can be connected at a time Automatic connection When the handsfree function is active and the last mobile phone connected is in range it is connected automatically If the last connected mobile phone is not available then the system will try to connect a mobile phone that was paired earlier When the audio system searches for the last phone connected its name is shown
181. d daz zle oncoming motorists Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden 1 Allow the engine to run or have the remote control key in position I 2 Roll the thumbwheel up down to raise lower beam alignment Cars with Xenon headlamps have automatic headlamp levelling and therefore do not have the thumbwheel Main dipped beam gt E Headlamp control and stalk switch ER Position for main beam flash gt Position for main beam 1 The thumbwheel also adjusts brightness for auxiliary lighting in handles storage compartment in the door analogue clock cup holder in the tunnel console and front floor lighting 2 Not available for cars equipped with Xenon headlamps i a r Option accessory for more information see Introduction Lighting ee Specification Automatic dipped beam Main beam and main beam flash work in this position Deacti vated dipped beam 0 0Z Position parking lamps D Dipped beam Main beam and main beam flash work in this position YM A Applies to certain markets Main beam flash Move the stalk switch gently towards the steer ing wheel to the position for main beam flash Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released Dipped beam When the engine is started dipped beam is activated automatically if the headlamp con trol is in position 0 If necessary auto matic dipped beam for this position can be
182. d media source by pressing OK MENU Q Fast forward reverse and change disc track or chapter The media player supports and can play the following main types of discs and files e Pre recorded CD discs CD Audio e Burned CD discs with audio and or video files e Pre recorded DVD video discs e Burned DVD discs with audio and or video files For more information about the supported for mats see page 246 If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console For a description of the buttons in the steering wheel see page 230 For a description of the remote control see page 256 Menus The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key pad For general information on menu naviga tion and menu structures see page 279 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 2 Only applies to DVD discs Starting playback of a disc Repeatedly press on the MEDIA button until Disc is shown release and wait a second or press OK MENU If there is a disc in the media player then the disc starts playing back auto matically otherwise Insert disc is shown in the TV screen Then insert a disc with text side up The disc starts to play back automatically If a disc with audio video files is inserted into the player then the disc s folder structure
183. d press OK MENU 3 Turn TUNE to Select country and press OK MENU gt If one or more countries have previously been selected then they are shown in a list 4 Turn TUNE to either Other countries or one of the previously selected countries Press OK MENU gt Alist of all available countries is shown 5 Turn TUNE to the desired country e g Sweden and press OK MENU gt An automatic scan for available TV channels starts this scan takes a little while During this time the figure for each channel found and added as a pre set is shown When the scan is com plete a message is shown and the pic ture is shown A preset list max 30 pre sets has now been created and is avail able To change channel see page 253 The scan and preset storage can be cancelled with EXIT Option accessory for more information see Introduction One If the country of residence has changed a new scan of TV channels must be run Channel management The preset list can be edited You can change the order of the channels that are shown in the preset list A TV channel can have more than one place in the preset list The TV channel positions can also vary in the preset list To change the order in the preset list go in TV mode to TV menu Reorganize presets 1 Turn TUNE to the channel you want to move in the list and confirm with OK MENU gt The selected channel is highlighted 2 Turn TUNE to the new locat
184. d reg ularly To avoid the onset of rust damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips scratches and marks on the edges of wings and doors Materials e primer in a can e spray can or touch up pen e masking tape 08 Maintenance and service Car care 08 gt gt 08 Maintenance and service Car care Colour code Before work is begun the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 C 1 Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint VOLVO CAR CORPORATION 2 Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush or a matchstick Apply paint using a brush once the primer is dry 3 For scratches proceed as above but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork o o Y Y O 0 4 After a few days polish the touched up Car colour code areas Use a soft rag and a small amount It is important that the correct colour is used of lapping paste For product decal location see page 368 Repairing stone chips p 9 p If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare metal and there is an undamaged col our coat you can paint straight after clean ing the damaged surface 08 A oO EA A o o 364 08 Maintenance and service h VDC designations a 368 SiS ABE weights eee MMe ias 370 Engine SpeCific
185. d with ice from dirt ice and or snow snow Remove the block ing object The laser sensor field of vision is blocked IMPORTANT If there are cracks scratches or stone chips in the windscreen in front of either of the laser sensor s windows and they cover a surface of approx 0 5 x 3 0 mm or larger then a workshop must be contacted for repair or replacement of the windscreen see the illustration for sensor location page 192 an authorised Volvo workshop is rec ommended Failure to take action may result in reduced performance for City Safety To avoid the risk of reducing City Safety performance the following also applies e The same type or a Volvo approved windscreen must be fitted during replacement e The same type or Volvo approved windscreen wipers must be fitted during replacement Fault tracing and action If the message Windscreen Sensors blocked is shown on the instrument panel dis play it indicates that the laser sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of the car This means that City Safety is not operational Laser sensor The City Safety function includes a sensor which transmits laser light Contact a qualified workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser sensor needs servicing an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 04 Comfort and driving pleasure City Safety WARNING For more information on the laser sensor see A text message can b
186. dar sensor Camera sensor Collision warning Together with a camera sensor the radar sen sor detects pedestrians stationary vehicles as well as vehicles driving in the same direction in front of the car In the event of there being a risk of collision with a pedestrian or such a vehicle your attention is drawn with a red flashing warning signal and a warning sound Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian detection Brake support If the risk of collision still increases after the collision warning then the brake support is acti vated The brake support prepares the brake system for rapid braking and the brakes are applied gently which may be noticed as a slight jerk If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently quickly then full brake function is implemented Brake support also reinforces the driver s brak ing if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision Auto Brake If the driver has not yet started an evasive manoeuvre in this situation and the risk of a collision is imminent then the Auto Brake func tion comes into effect without the driver need ing to touch the brake pedal Braking then takes place with full brake force in order to reduce collision speed or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid collision 1 NOTE The picture is schematic details may vary depending on car model Operation Settings are made from MY CAR via the centre console d
187. destrians Pedestrian detection G043978 Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body contours Optimal performance of the system requires that the system function that detects pedes trians receives as unambiguous information as possible about the contours of the body this implies the opportunity to identify the head arms shoulders legs upper and lower body combined with a normal human pattern of movement If large parts of the body are not visible to the camera then the system cannot detect a pedestrian e In order for a pedestrian to be detected he she must appear full length and have a height of at least 80 cm e The system cannot detect a pedestrian carrying larger items e The camera sensor s ability to see pedes trians at dusk and dawn is limited just like the human eye e The camera sensor s capacity to detect pedestrians is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels even when street lights are lit WARNING Collision warning with Auto brake amp Pedestrian detection is an assistance tool It cannot detect all pedestrians in all situa tions and it cannot see e g partially obscured pedestrians shorter people or children below 80 cm or people in clothing that hides the contours of the body e The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed Fault tracing and action If the displ
188. disa bling but select the On option Limitations The sensor in City Safety is designed to detect cars and other large vehicles in front of the car irrespective of whether it is day or night However the sensor has limitations and has poorer functionality in e g heavy snowfall or rain dense fog dust storms or snow flurries Mist dirt ice or snow on the windscreen may disrupt the function Low hanging objects e g a flag pennant for projecting load or accessories such as auxili ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function The infrared light from the sensor in City Safety measures how the light is reflected The sensor cannot detect objects with low reflection capacity The rear sections of the vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently thanks to the number plate and rear light reflec tors On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended which may reduce the capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision In such sit uations the ABS and DSTC systems will pro vide best possible braking force with main tained stability When the car is reversing City Safety cannot be activated City Safety is not activated at low speeds under 4 km h which is why the system does not intervene in situations where a vehicle in front is being approached very slowly e g when parking Driver commands are always prioritised which is why City Safety does not intervene
189. disen Service gaged Visit required a workshop if the mes sage remains Volvo rec ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo work shop The function is only active in twilight or dark ness and only when the car is moving The function can be deactivated activated in the menu system MY CAR under My V70 gt Active bending lights or under Settings gt Car settings Light settings gt Active bending lights For a description of the menu system see page 149 4 Activated on delivery from the factory 5 Activated on delivery from the factory The function can be deactivated activated in the menu system MY CAR under My XC70 gt Active bending lights or under Settings Car settings Light settings Active bending lights For a description of the menu system see page 149 For headlamp pattern adjustment see page 95 Go21144 a e mae Headlamp control in position for position parking lamps Turn the headlamp control to the centre posi tion number plate lighting comes on at the same time i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Rear position lamps also come on when the tailgate is opened in order to alert anybody behind The brake light automatically comes on during braking For information on the Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers see page 132 Button for front fog lamps The front fog lamps can be switched
190. driving environment Starting the engine e Press START STOP ENGINE the engine stops e Ifthe carhas an automatic gearbox and the gear selector is not in a position P or if the car is moving Press twice or hold the START STOP ENGINE button depressed 03 until the engine stops Steering lock A mechanical noise can be perceived when the steering lock unlocks or locks e The steering lock unlocks up when the START STOP ENGINE button is depressed e The steering lock locks when the driver s door is opened after the engine has been switched off Key positions For information on the remote control key s dif ferent key positions see page 82 General information about starting with Flexifuel The engine is started in the same way as ina petrol engined car In the event of starting difficulties If the engine does not start at the first start attempt e Make further attempts to start with the START STOP ENGINE button If the engine still does not start The outside temperature is lower than 5 C 1 Connect the engine block heater for at least 1 hour 2 Make further attempts to start with the START STOP ENGINE button IMPORTANT If the engine does not start despite repeated start attempts you are recommended to contact an authorised Volvo workshop Engine block heater G045199 Electrical input to the engine block heater When the temperature is expected to be lower than 10 C and th
191. duced significantly e if the radar sensor becomes blocked and cannot detect other vehicles e g in heavy rain or slush or if other objects have col lected in front of the radar sensor OR Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor clean e if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi cantly different from your own speed i i 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 185 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive cruise control 04 186 Examples where the cruise control does not work optimally The radar sensor has a limited field of vision In some situations another vehicle is not detected or the detection is made later than expected G044032 ACC field of vision a Sometimes the radar sensor is late at detecting vehicles at close distances e g a vehicle that drives in between the car and vehicles in front 2 Small vehicles such as motorcycles or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected E In bends the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Radar blocked See manual this means that the radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked and that vehicles in front of the car could not be detected In turn this means that the Adaptive Cruise Control Distance Warning and Collis
192. dust created when the airbags are accident and or safety systems deployed can cause skin and eye irritation rear end collision e Always contact a doctor injury after intensive exposure In case of irritation wash with cold water The rapid Seatbelt tensioner In a frontal collision deployment sequence and airbag fabric rear seat may cause friction and skin burns l The SRS SIPS IC and belt tensioner sys Airbags SRS In a frontal collision tems are deployed only once during a colli sion Side airbags SIPS In a side impact accident WARNING The airbag control module is located in the centre console If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid discon nect the battery cables Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a col Recovering the car Volvo recommends that lision without airbag deployment A number of factors such you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo as the rigidity and weight of the object hit the speed of the workshop car the angle of the collision etc affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated Inflatable Curtain IC In a side impact accident Whiplash protection In a rear end colli WHIPS sion If the airbags have deployed the following is recommended e Recovering the car Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised es 9 01 Safety Safety mode
193. e L for left and R for right Wear and maintenance The correct tyre pressure results in more even wear see page 319 Driving style tyre pres sure Climate and road condition affect how quickly your tyres age and wear To avoid dif ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns arising the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other A suitable dis tance for the first change is approx 5000 km and then at 10 000 km intervals Volvo recom mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth If significant differences in wear gt 1 mm difference in tread depth between tyres have already occurred the least worn tyres must always be placed on the rear Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer and leads to the car continuing for wards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side resulting in pos sible complete loss of control over the car This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging up and not standing up WARNING A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control of the car Tyres with tread wear indicators Tread wear indicators Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless bands across the width of the tread On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI Tread Wear Indicator When the tyre s tread depth is down to 1 6
194. e beneath the outside handle The tailgate s movement is interrupted and it stops Manual tailgate operation The system is disengaged if the opening clos ing sequence is interrupted in accordance with the preceding section e The tailgate can then be operated man ually Deadlocks Deadlocks means that all lock buttons and door handles are mechanically disengaged which prevents doors being opened from the inside The deadlocks are activated with the remote control key and are set after an approximately 10 second delay after the doors have been locked Ifa door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock state with the remote control key The driver s door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm gt gt 63 02 Locks and alarm 02 64 Locking unlocking WARNING Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in rary deactivation Tempo Active menu options are indicated with a cross ap MY CAR OK MENU TUNE knob control EXIT If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside then the deadlocks function can be temporarily switched off This is
195. e control brakes Do not rest your foot under the brake pedal as it could become trapped The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver If the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the cruise control s set speed This also happens if the speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the cruise control s set speed The cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way In situations that demand sud den braking the driver must brake himself her self This applies with large differences in speed or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily Due to limitations in the radar sensor braking may come unexpectedly or not at all see page 185 The adaptive cruise control can be activated to follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km h up to 200 km h If the speed falls below 30 km h or if the engine speed becomes too low the cruise control is set in standby mode at which automatic braking ceases the driver must then take over himself herself to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead Warning lamp braking by driver required Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity that is equivalent to more than 40 ofthe car s braking capacity 2 Queue Assistant in cars with automatic gearbox can operate in the range of 0 200 km h see page 183 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction If the car needs t
196. e MY CAR sscucorosiinntani id radiata 148 Al E OE E 156 Fuel driven engine block heater and passenger Compartment heater ccccseccesecsecceeeceeeseeeeeeeaeeeees 166 Additional NGAUS sirope e aT REER i 169 dle COMPUTO arrire aaaeeeaa EEO OE EEEE 170 DSTC Stability and traction control SYStEM ccccssceeseeeeseeeeeseees 172 Adapting driving CHAVACICMSUCS vocciinncesentaxtccsacnossenietenescameanmcduvervneceermeceds 174 ROSS CONT ON rite caren andes e E ON POCO a A 175 no Speed limiten mo le Windaptive cruise coo a 179 E A VV Al BING eme a e aaia aan annain annaia aana naaa 189 TT o A A 192 L Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian detection 196 Driver Alert SyStemi DAC ccccccsseseesssnescccsseseccsneeeesssneneoneeeresconees 203 Driver Alert System LDW1 cccccsscscesssseeesessereceseeeesessesenaeserensaers 206 X PU SS SVGA e a cS ca cs do entcecaseseceseccbeee ce setecdacececeres 209 Pak ASSIST CAMS snan o T a 212 BEIS Blind Spot INO MALTON Syste iaeei nt rica 215 Comfort inside the passenger COMpartMenNt cccseecseeeeseeeeeeeeees 219 144 Option accessory for more information see Introduction COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE wv O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 146 Menus and messages Combined instrument panel w Varo RESET e Per l KELA y HITA A a Ria eo 4 i Ff I0OOkm to empty tank e ve i
197. e acknowledged by i page 11 briefly pressing the READ button on the direc Never look into the laser sensor which ewes bee tion indicator stalk emits spreading invisible laser radiation at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magni Symbols and messages in the display fying optics such as a magnifying glass In conjunction with automatic braking by the microscope lens or similar optical instru City Safety system one or more symbols ments this would involve a risk of eye injury i the illustration on page 192 shows sensor may illuminate on the instrument panel and a location message may appear on its display 04 Ril Auto braking by City Safety City Safety is braking or has automatically braked A Ta Windscreen Sensors The laser sensor is temporarily non operational because something is blocking it blocked e Remove the object blocking the sensor and or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor Read about the limitations of the laser sensor see page 193 City Safety Service City Safety is not operational required e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian detection General Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Pedes trian Detection Collision Warning with Full Auto Brake and Pedestrian Detection is designed to assist the driver when there is
198. e bulb by pulling it straight out If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recom mend that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop lens right hand side Position lamps brake light LED Y Side position lights LED Direction indicators Reflector rear Rear fog lamp one side Reversing lamp ya Brake light LED Brake light LED 08 Maintenance and service 1 Remove the screws with a screwdriver 2 Carefully detach the whole lamp housing and withdraw it Replace the bulb Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it into place 08 08 Maintenance and service Lighting cargo area a y o E o o 0 1 Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so that the lamp housing comes loose Replace the bulb Check that the bulb illuminates and press back the lamp housing 08 Vanity mirror lighting Removing the mirror glass 4 D wo N pa A o 0 Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower edge in the centre Carefully prize up the lug on the edge Insertthe screwdriver underneath the edge on the left and right hand sides by the black rubber sections and prize carefully so that the mirror glass comes loose in the lower edge Carefully detach and lift aside the entire mirror glass and cover Replace the bulb Securing the mirror glass 1 Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir ror glass back into position po
199. e car has been refuelled with bioethanol E85 an engine block heater should be used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quick starting of the engine The lower the temperature the longer the time required with the engine block heater At 20 C the heater should be used for approx 3 hours Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine block heater Starting and driving with a pre heated engine involves significantly lower emissions and reduced fuel consumption For this reason you should aim to use the engine block heater throughout the winter months WARNING The engine block heater is powered by high voltage Fault tracing and repair of an elec tric engine block heater and its electrical connections must only be carried out by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Points to remember for carrying reserve fuel e Inthe event of stalling due to an empty fuel tank bioethanol E85 from a reserve fuel can may make the engine difficult to start in extreme cold This is avoided by filling the reserve fuel can with 95 octane petrol For more information on Flexifuel s bioethanol E 85 fuel see page 291 and 383 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment ue Starting the engine Flexifuel 03 D 03 Your driving environment Starting the engine Flexifuel Fuel adaptation Flexifuel engines can be driven on both 95 octane unleaded petrol and b
200. e due to speed being lower than 65 km h 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Driver Alert System DAC Driver Alert Unavailable The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged Read about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 199 Driver Alert The function analyses the driver s driving style The number of bars can vary in the range 1 5 where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent driving ability A high number of bars indicates stable driving Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven inconsistently the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal text break 04 Windscreen Sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged blocked Shown in the event of snow ice or dirt on the windscreen for example e Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor Read about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 199 Driver Alert Sys Service The system is disengaged required A E a Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 205 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 206 Driver Alert System LDW General information on Lane Departure Warning LDW The function is intended to reduce the risk for single vehicle accidents accidents where in certain situations the vehicle leaves the car r
201. e file formats via the USB connection Audio and video files in the following table are supported by the system for playback via the USB connection Audio format mp3 wma aac m4a Video format divx avi asf A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 05 gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 249 05 Infotainment system 05 250 Media Bluetooth Streaming audio General The car s media player is equipped with Bluetooth and can wirelessly play streaming audio files from external devices with Bluetooth such as mobile phones and PDAs Navigation and control of the sound can be carried out via the centre console buttons or via the steering wheel keypad In some external devices it is also possible to change tracks from the device To play back the audio the car s media player must first be set in Bluetooth mode The Bluetooth media player must support the Audio Video Remote Control Profile AVRCP and Advanced Audio Distribution Profile A2DP The player should use AVRCP version 1 3 A2DP 1 2 Otherwise some functions may not work Not all mobile phones and external media players available in the market are fully com patible with the Bluetooth function in the car s media player Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www volvocars com for information on compatible phones and external media players
202. e in front On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand Camera sensor limitations The car s camera sensor is used by the three functions Collision Warning with Auto Brake Driver Alert Control see page 203 and Lane Departure Warning see page 206 Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor clean from ice snow mist and dirt Do not attach or fit anything to the wind screen in front of the camera sensor as this could reduce or prevent the function of one or more camera dependent systems The camera sensors have limitations similar to the human eye i e they see worse in dark ness heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for example Under such conditions the functions of camera dependent systems could be sig nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged Strong oncoming light reflections in the car riageway snow or ice on the road surface dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings could also significantly reduce camera sensor func tion when it is used to scan the carriageway and detect pedestrians and other vehicles During very high temperatures the camera is temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started in order to protect camera functionality i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 199 04 200 Detection of pe
203. e is an increase in A Option accessory for more information see Introduction Introduction 13 Introduction Volvo and the environment the level of certain unhealthy gases such as e Avoid letting the engine idle switch off the Recycling carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed engine when stationary for longer periods As a part of Volvo s environmental work it is Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic Pay attention to local regulations important that the car is recycled in an envi queues and tunnels for example e Drive economically think ahead ronmentally sound manner Almost all of the The entry of nitrous oxides ground levelozone e Perform service and maintenance in car can be recycled The last owner of the car and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon accordance with the owner s manual s is therefore requested to contact a dealer for filter instructions follow the Service and War referral to a certified approved recycling ranty Booklet s recommended intervals facility Interior e fthe car is equipped with an engine block The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea heater use it before starting from cold it The owner s manual and the sant and comfortable even for people with improves starting capacity and reduces environment contact allergies and for asthma sufferers wear in cold weather and the engine rea The FSC symbol shows that the paper pulp in S treme Atenton nas geer given 10
204. e lever towards you to release the steering wheel 2 Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you 3 Push back the lever to fix the steering wheel in place If the lever is stiff press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever back Adjust and secure the steering wheel before driving With speed related power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted see page 174 Keypads in the steering wheel Cruise control see page 175 Adaptive cruise control see page 179 Audio and phone control see page 228 ds Option accessory for more information see Introduction Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal 03 Your driving environment ED Steering wheel 03 89 D 03 Your driving environment 03 90 Lighting Light switches G021141 Overview light switches Thumbwheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting Rear fog lamp Front fog lamps Light switches Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling Instrument lighting Different display and instrument lighting is switched on depending on key position see page 82 The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness the sensitivity is set with the thumbwheel The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumbwheel Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical align ment of the headlamp beam which coul
205. e lock sequence can be acti vated the driver s door must be closed if any of the other doors or the tailgate is open then it they is are locked and the alarm is activated only when it they are closed With the Key less system all the doors and tailgate must be closed OLE Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car If it is not possible to lock unlock with the remote control key the battery may be dis charged lock or unlock the driver s door with the detachable key blade see page 51 Remember that the alarm is triggered when the door is opened after being unlocked with the key blade the alarm is switched off when the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch Be aware of the risk of being locked in the car when it is locked from the outside using the remote control key it is then not pos sible to open any of the doors from the inside with the door controls Read more about this in the section Deadlocks later on Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking all are locked again automatically This function reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally For cars with alarm see page 66 ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction Central locking Central locking All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked or unlocked simultaneously using the central locking bu
206. e mobile phone For some mobile phones the connection is interrup ted This is normal The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect e Dial number option to call a third party using the number keys current call set in standby Call lists The call lists are copied to the handsfree func tion at each new connection and are then updated during the connection In normal view turn to the left with TUNE to see the call register for All calls In phone mode it is possible to see all the call lists under Phone menu All calls All calls Missed calls Answered calls Dialled calls Call duration Bluetooth handsfree NOTE Certain mobile phones show a list of the last dialled numbers in reverse order Voice mailbox In normal view a speed dial number for the voice mailbox can be programmed in and then accessed later via a long press on 1 Voice mailbox number is changed in phone mode under Phone menu Call options gt Voicemail number gt Change number If there is no number stored then this menu can be reached with one long press on 1 Audio settings Phone call volume The phone call volume can only be changed during a call Use the steering wheel keypad or turn the VOL control Audio system volume Providing there is no ongoing call taking place the audio system volume is controlled as usual by turning VOL If an audio source is active during an incoming call then it can be mute
207. e of a USB memory stick only store music files on it It takes a lot longer for the system to load storage media that con tains anything other than compatible music files The system supports mobile media compli ant with USB 2 0 and the FAT32 file system and can handle 1000 folders with a maxi mum of 254 subfolders files in every folder The top level which can handle up to 1000 subfolders files is an exception to this When using a longer model USB memory stick the use of a USB adapter cable is rec ommended This is to avoid mechanical wear to the USB input and the connected USB memory stick USB hub It is possible to connect a USB hub to the USB connection and thereby connect multiple USB devices simultaneously Selection of USB 05 Infotainment system External audio source via AUX USB input device is made in USB mode under USB menu gt Select USB device MP3 player Many MP3 players have their own file systems that are not supported by the audio system For use in the system an MP3 player must be set in USB Removable device Mass Storage Device mode iPod An iPod is charged and supplied with power by the USB connection via the player s con nection cable ORC The system only supports the playback of audio files from iPod When an iPod is used as audio source the car s infotainment system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player s own menu structure Compatibl
208. e on the brake pedal is reduced When EBA is activated the brake pedal low ers slightly more than usual depress hold the brake pedal as long as necessary If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases 03 Your driving environment dE Foot brake Symbols in the combined instrument panel KOJ Constant glow Check the brake fluid level If the level is low fill with brake fluid and 03 check for the cause of the brake fluid loss Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started There was a fault in the brake system s ABS function when the engine was last running WARNING If and illuminate at the same time there may be a fault in the brake sys tem If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor mal at this stage drive carefully to the near est workshop and have the brake system checked an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated Q 03 Your driving environment 03 134 HDC Hill Descent Control General HDC can be compared to an automatic engine brake When you release the accelerator on downhill gradients the car is normally braked by means of the engine striving for low engine idling speeds so called engine braking But the steeper the road and the more load
209. e phone Using voice commands The driver initiates a dialogue with the voice commands by pressing the button for voice recognition see illustration on page 266 Once a dialogue has been started commonly used commands will be shown in the TV screen Greyed out text or text within brackets is not included in the spoken command When the driver becomes accustomed to the system he she can speed up the command dialogue and skip the prompts from the sys tem by briefly pressing the button for voice recognition 05 Commands can be given in several ways The command Phone call contact can be pronounced as e g e Phone gt Call contact Say Phone wait for the system s reply and then continue by saying Call contact or e Phone call contact Say the whole com mand in one sequence Quick commands Quick commands for the phone can be found in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Voice settings gt Voice command list gt Phone commands and General commands For a description of the menu system see page 148 Dial a number The system understands the numbers 0 zero to 9 nine These numbers can be pronounced individually in groups of several numbers at a time or the whole number all at once Numbers greater than 9 nine cannot be handled by the system e g 10 ten or 11 eleven are not pos sible The following is an example of a dialogue with voice commands The system s reply will vary
210. e text image on black message field Used to indicate the presence of danger which if the i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Introduction Important information warning is ignored may result in serious per sonal injury or fatality Risk of property damage Q A D ire lt co o Oo White ISO symbols and white text image on black or blue warning field and message field Used to indicate the presence of danger which if the warning is ignored may result in damage to property Information N o ire co o Oo White ISO symbols and white text image on black message field AE AN 1 DA l oe The labels shown in the owner s manual are not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car The purpose is to show their approximate appearance and location in the car The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner s manual EN When there is a series of illustrations for step by step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corres ponding illustration There are numbered lists with letters adja cent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant E Arrows appear numbered and unnum bered and are used to illustrate a move
211. e two stage booster cushion Lowering can take place from both the upper and lower stage to fully lowered position in the cushion However it is not possible to adjust G017694 G017784 01 Safety 9 Press down with your hand in the centre of the cushion in order to lock it WARNING If the instructions regarding the two stage booster cushion are not followed then this could cause serious injury to a child in the event of an accident D IMPORTANT Check that there are no loose objects e g toys left behind in the space under the cushion before lowering The booster cushion must be lowered first when lowering the backrest Child safety locks rear doors The controls for operating the rear door power windows and the rear door opening handles can be blocked from opening from the inside For more information see page 65 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are concealed behind the lower section of the rear seat backrest in the outer seats The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery See pre ceding illustration Press the seat cushion down to access the mounting points Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points Size classes Child seats are in different sizes cars are in different sizes This means that not all chi
212. e vehicles is greater than 15 km h then City Safety may not prevent the collision on its own To obtain full brake force the driver must depress the brake pedal This could then make it possible to prevent a collision even at speed differen ces above 15 km h When the function is activated and brakes the instrument panel display shows a message to the effect that the function is has been active ORC The brake lights come on when City Safety brakes the car Operation The City Safety function is always ena bled after the engine has been started via key position I and Il see page 82 on key positions On and Off In certain situations it may advisable to disable City Safety e g where leafy branches could sweep over the bonnet and or windscreen After starting the engine City Safety can be deactivated as follows Using MY CAR on the centre console display screen with its menu system search and locate Settings gt Car settings gt Driving support systems gt City Safety Select the Off option For more information on the menu system MY CAR see page 148 However the function will be enabled the next time the engine is started regardless of whether the system was enabled or disabled when the engine was switched off WARNING The laser sensor also transmits laser light when City Safety is disabled manually To enable City Safety again e Follow the same procedure as for
213. ears 335 Wiper blades and washer fluid 342 SG pape ee 344 rc AAA 349 Cs EA AA 360 Table of contents i 011 10 00 111 09 Specifications 10 Alphabetical Index Type designations cta ade tee 368 Alphabetical Index ccoo 408 Dimensions and weights cccceeeee 370 EN inesSs PECiiiCavlONS acee sate saree 376 A o ae 378 fiers ANC lubricants 381 A PA 383 Wheel and tyres dimensions and pres SUS MN ee lt lt 387 Souter so a 392 Be approdi PMA ccssccsseccnenesseeesses 393 Symbols in i ldisplayE ommmooo 405 Introduction Important information Introduction A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner s manual ideally before your first journey This will give you the opportunity to familiarise yourself with new functions to see how best to handle the car in different sit uations and to make the best use of all the car s features Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the manual The specifications design features and illus trations in this owner s manual are not binding We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice Volvo Car Corporation Option All types of option accessory are marked with an asterisk In addition to standard equipment this manual also describes options factory fitted equip ment and certain accessories retrofitted extra equipment T
214. ease the tyre pressure to the recom mended pressure for a full load For tyre pressure label location see page 319 e The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer e Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km e The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed e For safety reasons the maximum permit ted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer should not be exceeded Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights e Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long steep ascents e Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12 Trailer cable An adapter is required if the car s towing bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin electrics Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground Direction indicators and brake lights on the trailer If any of the trailer s lamps for direction indica tors are broken then the combined instrument panel s symbol for direction indicators flashes faster than normal and the display shows the text Bulb fail Ind signal trailer If any of the trailer s lamps for the brake light are broken then the Bulb fail Stop lamp trailer text is shown Level control The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant height irrespective
215. easure 04 gt gt O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Depress the accelerator pedal fully Press the steering wheel button l gt The display shows the stored maximum gt The display s symbol for the speed lim speed in brackets 5 and the driver can iter and the set speed 5 are cleared temporarily exceed the set maximum The selected and stored speed are thus speed deleted from the memory and cannot be The speed limiter is automatically re resumed with the O button activated after the release of the accel erator pedal and the car s speed is slowed down to below the selected stored maximum speed the display s 04 brackets disappear and the car s maxi mum speed is again limited The driver can then use the accelerator pedal to choose a speed without limita tion Alarm for speed exceeded On steep roads the engine braking effect may be inadequate and the selected maximum speed exceeded The driver is alerted about this with an acoustic signal The signal is active until the driver has slowed to below the selected maximum speed The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km h provided that none of the buttons or 9 has been depressed during the last half minute Deactivate To deactivate the speed limiter 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive cruise control General information on ACC WARNING Function
216. ecssereceesceeensonees 342 Baten a a a cra eee 344 TURCE e a A 349 GAN CANS occ N a reer a A 360 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE F i RSS e m a E ke 2 amp T n A ae 23 oS y e oa By Oo EF ADS R A is l L AM hm Ad go n i 08 Maintenance and service 08 Engine compartment General Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi ble follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work Volvo workshops have the personnel special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service IMPORTANT For the Volvo warranty to apply check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet Check regularly Check the following oils and fluids at regular intervals e g when refuelling e Coolant e Engine oil e Power steering fluid e Washer fluid WARNING Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start automatically some time after the engine has been switched off Always have the engine cleaned by a work shop There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot Raising the car Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question If a jack is selected other than the one recom mended by Volvo follow the instructions for use supplied with the equipment
217. ed When the indicator lamp on HomeLink starts to flash after approx 20 seconds position the original remote control 5 30 cm from HomeLink Monitor the indi cator lamp The particular distance that is required between the original remote control and HomeLink depends on the programming of the device in question Perhaps several attempts will be required at different dis tances Maintain each position for approx 15 seconds before trying a new one Depress the button on the original remote control The indicator lamp will start to flash When the flashing has changed over from a slow to a rapid flashing release both buttons The rapid flashing indicates successful programming Test the programming by depressing the programmed button on HomeLink and watching the indicator lamp F i 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment ae 03 gt gt 141 D 03 Your driving environment 03 142 e Constant glow The indicator lamp illu minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed this indicates that the programming is complete The garage door gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed e Glow not constant The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx 3 seconds This proc ess is repeated for approx 20 seconds and indicates that
218. ed activated after starting the engine with one press on the BLIS button Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console in which case the function is handled by the car s menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt BLIS For a description of the menu system see page 148 When BLIS is deactivated the lamp in the but ton goes out and a message is shown in the instrument panel display When BLIS is activated the light in the button illuminates a new text message is shown on the display and the indicator lamps in the door panels flash 3 times Press the READ button to delete the text message For a description of messages see page 146 When BLIS operates The system operates when the car is driven at a speed above 10 km h Overtaking The system is designed to react if e you overtake another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km h faster than the other vehicle e you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km h faster than you are travelling BLIS does not work in sharp bends BLIS does not work when the car is revers ing A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes It can pre vent the vehicle in the screened area from being detected by BLIS Daylight and darkness In daylight the system reacts to the shape of the surrounding vehicles The system is designed to detect motor vehicles such as cars tr
219. ed and is dis engaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old e The air quality system IAQS is a fully auto matic system that cleans the air in the pas senger compartment from contaminants such as particles hydrocarbons nitrous oxides and ground level ozone To keep the CZIP standard in cars with CZIP the IAQS filter must be changed after 15 000 km or once per year depending on whichever occurs first However up to 75 000 km over 5 years In cars without CZIP and where the customer does not want to keep the CZIP standard the IAQS filter must be changed at a regular service Use of tested materials in the interior equipment The materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and they contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean The carpets in both the passenger com partment and the cargo area are removable Climate control and easy to remove and clean Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo see page 362 Menu settings It is possible to activate deactivate or change the default settings for four of the climate con trol system s functions via the centre console For general information about menu naviga tion see page 149 e Fan speed in automatic mode see page
220. ed entry However if someone breaks into the car opens the door and finds the PCC it can be reactivated It is therefore important to handle all PCCs with great care IMPORTANT Never leave a PCC behind in the car Interference to PCC function Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter fere with the keyless drive system For this rea son do not place the PCC near mobile phones or metallic objects If interference is experienced nonetheless use the PCC and the key blade as a remote control key see page 49 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm Keyless drive 02 gt gt oye 02 Locks and alarm 02 58 Keyless drive Locking G042792 Cars with the keyless system have a button on the outside door handles Lock the doors and the tailgate by pressing the lock button on one of the door handles on the outside All doors and the tailgate must be closed before the car can be locked otherwise the car is not locked On cars with automatic transmission the gear selector must be set in the P position otherwise the car cannot be locked or the alarm armed 2 Only in combination with power driver s seat and power mirrors Unlocking Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a door handle or the tailgate s rubberised pres sure plate is actuated open the door or tail gate as normal Unlocking with the key blade G042793
221. ed positive cable Detach the ventilation hose from the bat tery Loosen the screw holding the battery clamp q o o o t o o 08 Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover Move the battery to the side and lift it up y o o t o Lower the battery into the battery box 4 2 Move the battery inward and to the side until it reaches the rear edge of the box EN Tighten the clamp that holds the battery Connect the ventilation hose gt Check that it is correctly connected to both battery and outlet in the body Connect the red positive cable Connect the black negative cable Press in the rear cover See Removal Fit the rubber moulding See Removal 2 SY p Align the front cover and secure it with the clips See removal For more information on the car s main battery see page 392 08 Maintenance and service Eco Start Stop DRIVe Cars with the Start Stop function are equipped with two 12 V batteries one extra powerful battery for starting and one standby battery that helps during the Eco Start Stop DRIVe function s starting sequence The higher the current take off in the car extra cooling heating etc the more the batteries must be charged increased fuel consumption When the capacity of the battery has For more information on Start Stop see fallen below the lowest permissible level page 126 then the Start Stop function is disen
222. efroster is selected recircula tion is always deactivated Air quality system I AQS The air quality system separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and pollution in the passenger compartment If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated Activate deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Climate settings Interior air quality system For a description of the menu system see page 149 The air quality sensor should always be engaged in order to obtain the best air in the passenger compartment Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting If the insides of the windows start misting up disengage the air quality sensor and the defroster functions for the windscreen the side and the rear windows should also be used to demist the windows Cars with Eco Start Stop DRIVe With an auto stopped engine certain equip ment has its function temporarily reduced e g climate control fan speed For more informa tion see page 127 164 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate control Air to windows Some air flows from the air vents The air is not recirculated Air conditioning is always engaged Air to windscreen via defroster vent and side windows Some air flows from the air vents Airflow to windows and from dashboard a
223. el movements Operation If snaking has started it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress This makes the car trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could for example end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway TSA system continually monitors car move ments particularly lateral movements If snak ing is detected the front wheels are individually braked This serves to stabilise the car trailer combination This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car If snaking is not eliminated the first time the TSA system comes into action the car trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car trailer combination is once again stable the TSA sys tem stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of the car Miscellaneous The TSA system can engage within the speed interval 60 to 160 km h a Option accessory for more information see Introduction OKT TSA function is switched off if the driver selects Sport mode see page 172 TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severe steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in such a situation the TSA system cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking The DSTC symbol in the combined instrument panel flashes when the TSA is working Towing and
224. em is pre calibrated for opti mum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing This calibration takes into account loudspeak ers amplifiers passenger compartment acoustics listener position etc for each com bination of car model and audio system There is a alSo a dynamic calibration that takes into account the position of the volume control radio reception and vehicle speed The controls explained in these operating instructions e g Bass Treble and Equalizer are only intended for the user to be 4 05 Infotainment system Station list The radio automatically compiles a list of the strongest FM stations whose signals it is cur rently receiving This enables you to find a sta the buttons in the centre console For a tion when you drive into an area where you do description of the buttons in the steering not know the radio stations and their frequen wheel see page 230 For a description of cies the remote control see page 256 Radio functions general If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of To go to the list and select a station 1 Select the desired wavelength FM1 or Menus The menus inRADIO are controlled from the FM2 centre console and the steering wheel key 2 Turn TUNE one step in either direction o kre a J pad For general information on menu naviga This displays the list of all stations
225. emove dirt and dust with a soft pre mois tened sponge and neutral soap e Leather needs to breathe Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plas tic e Use natural oils Volvo s leather care agents are recommended for best results If the steering wheel has stains Group 1 ink wine coffee milk sweat and blood Use a soft cloth or sponge Mix a 5 ammonia solution For blood stains use a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt Group 2 fats oils sauces and chocolate 1 Same procedure as group I 2 Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth Group 3 dry dirt dust 1 Use a soft brush to remove the dirt 2 Same procedure as group Treating stains on interior plastic metal and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth lightly moistened with water available from Volvo dealers is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces Do not scrape or rub stains Never use strong stain removers A special cleaning agent avail able from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning Cleaning seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent A special textile cleaning agent is available from your 1 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch up pen Volvo dealer Make sure the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract Touching up minor paintwork damage Paint is an important part of the car s rust proofing and should therefore be checke
226. ency puncture repair TMK General Emergency puncture repair TMK Temporary Mobility Kit is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust tyre pressure It consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid The kit works as a temporary repair The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced before its expira tion date and after use The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc tured in the tread The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread The emergency puncture repair kit has limited Capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the wall Do not seal tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit if they have larger slits cracks or similar damage For connecting the compressor there are 12 V sockets in the centre console and by the rear seat as well as a 12 V socket in the cargo area Choose the electrical socket that is near est the punctured tyre Location of the emergency puncture repair kit Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location The emergency puncture repair kit is located under the floor in the cargo area see page 320 You should not drive faster than 80 km h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre maximum driving distance is 200 km The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repai
227. engine starts automatically after the gear lever has been set in neutral position Prior to this the information display showed the text Set the gear lever in neutral Text message In combination with this indicator lamp the Eco Start Stop DRIVe func tion may display text messages on the infor mation display for certain situations For some of them there is a recommended action that should be performed The following table shows some examples Symbol ERv Eco DRIVe On Eco DRIVe Off Disengage to start Illuminates for about 5 seconds after Eco Start Stop DRIVe has been acti vated Illuminates for about 5 seconds after Eco Start Stop DRIVe has been switched off The engine is ready to auto start waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed DRI V2 Depress the foot brake to start Press the clutch or brake to start Set the gear lever in neutral The engine is ready to auto start waiting for the brake pedal to be depressed The engine is ready to auto start waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed Gear is engaged without declutching disengage and set the gear lever in neutral posi tion F i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment O Message Info Symbol Message Info Action Action 03 gt gt 129 D 03 Your driving environment Eco DRIVe be conta
228. engine or when the car is parked The brake pedal must be depressed to disengage the gear selector from the P position The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged Activate the electric parking brake by pressing the button see page 136 Gearboxes IMPORTANT The car must be stationary when position P is selected Reverse R The car must be stationary when position R is selected Neutral position N No gear is engaged and the engine can be started Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in position N Drive D D is the normal driving position Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed The car must be stationary when the gear selector is moved to position D from position R Geartronic Manual gear positions The driver can also change gear manually using the Geartronic automatic gearbox The car engine brakes when the accelerator pedal is released Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving the lever to the side from position D to the end position at The information display shifts the indication from D to one of the figures 1 1 Only models D5 and T6 6 which is equivalent to the gear that is engaged just then see page 75 e Move the lever forwards towards plus to change up a gear and release the lever which returns to its rest position between and or e Pull the l
229. enu gt Advanced settings Y DAB band Subchannel Secondary components are usually named subchannels These are temporary and can contain e g translations of the main pro gramme into other languages If one or more subchannels are broadcast then the gt symbol is shown to the left of the channel name in the TV screen A subchannel is indi cated by the symbol appearing to the left of the channel name in the TV screen Subchannels can only be accessed on the selected main channel and not on any other Channel without selecting it Display of subchannels can be deactivated activated in DAB mode under DAB menu gt Advanced settings Sub channels Programme type text Some radio stations broadcast information about programme type and programme cate gory This information is shown on the TV screen The function is activated deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings Show PTY text Resetting the DAB settings All DAB settings can be reset to the original factory settings The reset is carried out in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings gt Reset all DAB settings Media player CD DVD functions ce rut loot jai Centre console control panel Disc insert and eject slot 2 MEDIA key 6 Disc eject O Input of numbers and letters O Select the disc tracks folders or navigate through menu options by turning TUNE Confirm your selection or go to the menu for the selecte
230. eptar interferencias perjudiciales incluyendo equipos de la misma clase y puede no causar interferencias a sistemas operando a titulo primario Bluetooth module installation information This module board is to be installed only by the professional line operator and used only for car audio produced by ALPINE ELEC TRONICS INC When this Bluetooth Module Board is installed in the Car Audio we shall consider the following points 1 Since IAM2 1 BT PWB US owns its FCC ID IC Number we shall affix an exterior label on the outside of the product if the FCC ID is not visible The exterior label shall use wording such as either Contains Transmitter Module Board FCC ID A269ZUA130 IC 700B IAM2101 or Contains FCC ID A269ZUA130 IC 7O0B IAM2101 2 IAM2 1 BT PWB US complies with requirements of subsections 15 19 a 3 in FCC Rules Part 15 Subpart C The manual statement 15 19 a 3 is included in User Guide of the product COFETEL No RCPALIA10 0353 09 Specifications 09 County f Bot swana BTA REGISTERED No BTA TA 2010 220 Croatia Fis MABINI G044550 General There are a variety of different symbols in the display in the car The symbols are divided into warning indicator and information symbols Shown below are the most common symbols with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can be found For more information on symbols and text messages see p
231. erator pedal is released Adaptive cruise control NOTE Automatic standby mode Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems e g stability and traction control DSTC If any of these systems stop working then cruise control is automatically deacti vated In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and the message Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the display The driver must then intervene and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead An automatic deactivation can be due to e engine speed is too low high e speed falls below 30 km h e wheels lose traction e brake temperature is high e the radar sensor is covered e g by wet snow or heavy rain radar waves blocked Resume set speed Cruise control in standby mode is re activated with one press on the steering wheel button the speed is then set to the last stored speed A significant increase in speed may arise after the speed has been resumed with D Deactivate The cruise control is switched off with the steering wheel button f The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the O button Keypad without Speed limiter The cruise control is switched off with the steering wheel button f in standby mode or with one long press in active mode The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the D button Queue Assistant In cars with au
232. eristic requirements and other rele vant regulations of directive 1999 5 EC Delphi 2003 07 15 Germany R LPD1 03 0151 BR RC CT oDanares OA a 011770044760 n 62 CCABO6LP1940T4 09 Specifications Radar system coun O O Singapore Brazil Complies with IDA standards DA105753 IDA Infocomm Development Authority of Singapore d ANATEL 01 10 00 11 09 gt gt 01 10 010 111 09 Type approval Bluetooth 09 Specifications Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity Countries in the EU q Exporting country Japan Manufacturer Alpine Electronics Inc Type of equipment Bluetooth device For further information visit http ec europa eu enterprise rtte faq htm informing 09 Specifications Type approval 09 CAI ALPINE ELECTRONICS INC M7 ALPINE 20 1 Yoshima Kogyodanchi Iwaki City Fukushima 970 1192 Japan Phone 81 246 36 4111 Fax 81 246 36 6090 a e u u a u e r DECLARATION of CONFORMITY We Alpine Electronics Inc of the above address hereby declare at our sole responsibility that the following product conforms to the Essential Requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999 5 EC in accordance with the tests conducted to the appropriate requirements of the relevant standards as listed herewith Product Bluetooth Module Model Type Number IAM 2 1 BT PWB EU Directive and Standards used
233. es this is in order to facilitate starting the engine as well as approx 50 km driving Heater not work ing Contact a workshop for repair Volvo rec ommends that you contact an author ised Volvo work shop ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure O gt gt 167 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 168 Fuel driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater A display text clears automatically after a time or after one press on the indicator stalk READ button Direct start and immediate stop 1 Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start Park heat 2 Press RESET to select between ON and OFF ON Parking heater switched on manually or with programmed timer OFF Parking heater switched off Following the direct start of the heater it will be activated for 50 minutes Heating of the passenger compartment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached the correct temperature OKT The car can be started and driven while the parking heater is running Setting the timer The time when the car shall be used and heated is specified with the timer Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2 The timer can only be programmed when the remote control key is in key position l see page 82 programming must therefore be carried out before starting the engine 1 Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heat timer 1 2
234. espective button Courtesy lighting Courtesy lighting and passenger compart ment lighting is switched on and off respec tively when a side door is opened or closed see page 90 Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed Vanity mirror The lighting for the vanity mirror see page 221 is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed Lighting cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and off respectively when the tailgate is opened or closed Automatic lighting The switch for passenger compartment light ing has three positions for the lighting in the passenger compartment e Off right hand side pressed in automatic lighting deactivated e Neutral position automatic lighting acti vated e On left hand side pressed in passenger compartment lighting switched on a IO 03 Your driving environment EN Lighting Neutral position When the button is in neutral position the pas senger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically in accordance with the following The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if e the caris unlocked with the remote control key or key blade see pages 49 or 52 e the engine has been switched off and the remote control key is in position 0 Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when e the engine is star
235. ever back towards minus to change down a gear and release it The manual gearshift mode can be selected at any time while driving Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than a level suitable for the selected gear in order to avoid jerking and stalling To return to automatic driving mode e Move the lever to the side to the end posi tion at D f the gearbox has a Sport programme then the gearbox will only become manual after the lever has been moved forwards or back wards in its position The information display then shifts the indication from S to show which of the gears 1 6 is engaged Geartronic Sport mode S The Sport programme provides sportier cha racteristics and allows higher engine speed for the gears At the same time it responds more quickly to acceleration During active driving the use of a lower gear is prioritised leading to a delayed upshift Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever to the side from D position to the end position at The information display shifts the indica tion from D to S Sport mode can be selected at any time while driving Geartronic Winter mode It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if 3rd gear is engaged manually 1 Depress the brake pedal and move the gear lever from the D position to the end position at the instrument panel dis play shifts the indication from D to the fi
236. except that some equipment may have its function temporarily reduced e g the climate control system s fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system Auto stopping the engine In order that the engine will auto stop the car must be stationary e Set the gear lever in neutral position and release the clutch pedal the engine is switched off As verification and reminder that the engine is auto stop ped this symbol in the display 3 illuminates AUTO START Auto starting the engine With the gear lever in neutral position e Depress the clutch pedal the engine starts or e Depress the accelerator pedal the engine starts If the car is on a downhill slope e Release the foot brake pedal and let the car roll faster than normal walking pace the engine starts After starting the engine e Engage a suitable gear and continue the journey lO00km to empty tank j gt R 3 8 F 5 G042724 tei z An essential detail in connection with environ mental driving is to drive in the right gear and change gear in time Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment Eco DRIVe 03 gt gt 127 D 03 Your driving environment 03 128 Eco DRIVe The driver is assisted by an indicator which notifies the driver when it is most advanta geous to engage the next higher or lower gear GSI Gear Shift Indicator I
237. ey should be in posi tion Il see page 82 2 Press and hold the button on the rear of the rearview mirror use a paper clip or similar for at least 3 seconds The number for the current area is shown 3 Press the button repeatedly until the num ber for the required geographic area 1 15 is shown 4 The display will revert to showing the com pass direction after a few seconds General The sunroof controls are located in the roof panel The sunroof can be opened vertically at the rear edge and horizontally Key position I or Il is required for the sunroof to be opened Horizontal opening Horizontal opening backward forward E gt Opening automatic Opening manual E Closing manual EX Closing automatic Opening For maximum sunroof opening move the con trol back to the position for automatic opening and release Open manually by pulling the control back wards to the point of resistance for manual opening The sunroof moves to maximum open position as long as the button is kept depressed Closing Close manually by pushing the control for wards to the point of resistance for manual closing The sunroof moves to closed position as long as the button is kept depressed WARNING Risk of crushing when sunroof is closed The sunroof s pinch protection function only operates during automatic closing not manual Close automatically by pressing the control to the position for automatic closing
238. g ure 1 2 Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever forward towards plus twice the display shifts the indication from 1 to 3 3 Release the brake and accelerate carefully 03 Your driving environment EN 03 gt gt D 03 Your driving environment 03 122 Gearboxes The gearbox winter mode means that the car moves off with a lower engine speed and reduced engine power on the drive wheels Kick down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration a lower gear is immediately engaged This is known as kick down If the accelerator is released from the kick down position the gearbox automatically changes up Kick down is used when maximum accelera tion is needed such as for overtaking Safety function To prevent overrevving the engine the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor which prevents the kick down func tion Geartronic does not permit downshifting kick down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged When kick down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed The car changes up when the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine Mechanical gear se
239. g on what is being played back or displayed Day Night mode The TV screen can be set in three different modes for different light conditions Choose between Auto Day and Night Press K onthe remote control and change the mode under Day Night mode on the TV screen For general information on menu navi gation and menu structures see page 276 Picture settings You can adjust the settings for brightness con trast shade and colour Press ww onthe remote control and change the mode under Image settings on the TV screen For general information on menu navi gation and menu structures see page 276 Display format It is possible to choose between display for mats Normal Zoom 1 and Zoom 2 e Option accessory for more information see Introduction Normal The image is shown in its normal mode normally 4 3 or 16 9 format Zoom 1 Full screen used but parts of the image are cut off Zoom 2 Full screen used but image propor tions may be slightly distorted Unless otherwise stated the image is displayed in the screen format Normal Press MJ onthe remote control and change the mode under Display format on the TV screen For general information on menu navi gation and menu structures see page 276 Source menu What is shown in the pop up menu for the source menu depends on what is being played back or displayed it can be e g Disc menu or USB menu For general information on menu navigation and menu struct
240. g servicing and main tenance is stored and handled in a secure manner and that the handling complies with 10 ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction applicable legal requirements For further infor mation contact a Volvo dealer Accessories and extra equipment The incorrect connection and installation of accessories can negatively affect the car s electrical system Certain accessories only function when their associated software is installed in the car s computer system Volvo therefore recommends that you always con tact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing accessories which are connected to or affect the electrical system Change of ownership for cars with Volvo On Call Volvo On Call is a supplemental service that consists of safety security and comfort serv ices If the car has Volvo On Call and there is a change of owner it is very important that these services are discontinued so that the former owner cannot access the services in the car Contact the call centre by pressing the ON CALL button in the car or contact an author ised Volvo workshop See also Changing the security code in the owner s manual for Volvo On Call Important information If any of these instructions are not followed then there is a risk of eye injury Laser sensor This vehicle is equipped with a sensor which transmits laser light It is absolutely essential to follow the prescribed instructions
241. g wheel force p 174 Activate once ame oi ROSEC Low Ask on exit Oe Medium Side mirror settings p 105 90 sec Hi Fold mirrors l l p 93 Reset car settings Tilt left mirror Tipe sae All menus in Car settings are Tilt right mirror On given original factory settings Off Driving support systems us Light settings p 48 Lock confirmation light Temporary LH traffic gee Collision Warning p 196 On On Collision Warning Off Off On Unlock confirmation light or Off On Temporary RH traffic IS Off O Long we Off Normal Approach light duration and 95 Short Off Active bending lights p e Warning sound 30 sec On On 60 sec Off Off 90 sec gt gt O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 Menu source MY CAR Lane Departure Warning p 206 Lane Departure Warning On Off On at start up On Off Increased sensitivity On Off DSTC p 172 On Off City Safety p ii on Es Off BLIS oe AS On Off Distance Alert p 189 On Off Driver Alert p 203 On Off System options Time p 80 The instrument panel clock is set here Time format p 80 12h 24h Screen saver p 148 On Off The TV screen s current content fades out after a period of inac tivity and is replaced by a blank screen if this option is selected The current screen content returns if any of the TV screen s buttons or controls are actuated Language Selects language for menu texts Show help text On Off Explanatory text for the display screen s current con
242. ght TV screen remote control Then aim the remote control at E aos 05 the IR receiver for the TV screen to be oper NAV 9 9 ated see page 270 RADIO Change to radio source AM FM1 etc Keep loose objects such as mobile phones MEDIA Change to media source Disc cameras remote controls for accessories TV etc etc in the glove compartment or other com partments Otherwise they may injure peo TEL Change to Bluetooth hands ple in the car in the event of sudden braking ae free or a collision Scroll fast rewind change track song Play pause E a Scroll wheel corresponds to TUNE in the centre console 200 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system Remote control e Stop INFO Information about the current i programme song etc Also used Pa Scroll fast forward change when there is more information track song available than can be shown in the TV screen DVD Menu MENU ER Selection of language for sound track EXIT To previous cancels function g E deletes input characters Subtitles selection of language 3 A Navigate up down fomtext y Teletext On Off 1 Push down the catch on the battery cover E Hoa and slide the battery cover in the direction p Navigate right left of the infrared lens 05 Replacing the battery in the remote 2 Remove the used batteries turn the new OK Confirm selection or go to the control batteries in acco
243. gs gt PTY settings Select PTY 2 Goto FM menu Advanced settings PTY settings Seek PTY To finish searching press EXIT To continue searching for another broad cast of the selected programme types press on or Ca Display of programme type The programme type of the current station can be shown on the TV screen Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu Advanced settings gt PTY settings Show PTY text 05 Infotainment system 05 gt gt CS 05 Infotainment system 05 240 Radio text Some RDS stations transmit information on programme content artists etc This informa tion can be shown on the TV screen Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu Show radio text Automatic frequency update AF The function selects the strongest transmitter for the set station In order to find a strong transmitter the function may in exceptional cases need to search the entire FM wave length Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu Advanced settings gt Alternative frequency Regional radio programmes REG This function causes the radio to continue with a regional transmitter even if its signal strength is low The symbol REG shows that the func tion is active Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu Advanced settings gt REG Resetting RDS functions All radio settings can be reset to the original factory settings The reset is carried
244. h as driving in mountains or tropical climates with high humidity WARNING If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid Volvo rec ommends that the reason for the loss of brake fluid is investigated by an authorised Volvo workshop 08 Maintenance and service 08 gt gt 08 Maintenance and service Engine compartment Filling Power steering fluid The fluid reservoir is located on the driver s side IMPORTANT Keep the area around the power steering fluid reservoir clean when checking The cover must not be opened The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover over the cold zone in the engine compartment The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be reached 1 Turn and open the cover located on the covering Check the level frequently The fluid does not 2 Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid require changing The fluid level must be The level must be between the MIN and between the MIN and MAX marks For capaci MAX marks which are located on the ties and recommended fluid grade see inside of the reservoir page 381 IMPORTANT 08 Do not forget to refit the cap If a fault should arise in the power steering system or if the engine is switched off and the car must be towed it can still be steered General IMPORTANT All bulbs are specified see page 340
245. h on the wireless headphones select CH A for left hand screen or CH B for right hand screen 2 Aim the remote control at the IR receiver on the TV screen press repeatedly on MEDIA to the desired source Disc USB AUX etc release and wait a few seconds and the selection is accepted 3 Insert a CD disc in the car s media player or connect an external audio source via the car s USB port AUX input or via Blue tooth Playback and navigation in playlists Rotate the scroll wheel on the remote control to access the playlist folder structure K either gives confirmation of subfolder selection or starts playing back the selected disc track audio file It is also possible to play back the disc track audio file using gt on the remote control and change the disc tracks audio file using 44 gt gt Stop playback using e For more information see page 243 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system 05 gt gt 215 CS 05 Infotainment system 05 276 RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system Watching video It is possible to watch video from disc tracks video files via the car s media player or USB port For more information about media players and USB see the pages 243 and 247 1 Switch on the wireless headphones select CH A for left hand screen or CH B for right hand screen 2 Aim the remote control at the IR receiver on the TV screen pre
246. h with large quantities of water If acid splashes into the eyes seek medical attention immediately For more information on the car s battery see page 344 03 Your driving environment ae Starting the engine external battery D 03 Your driving environment Gearboxes 03 Gearshift pattern 6 speed gearbox The 6 speed box is available in two versions reverse gear position differs between them i i i Ai B r zr N ie a 0 o 0 Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted on the gear lever e Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change e Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes Reverse gear inhibitor The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel e Start from neutral position N and only engage reverse gear R when the car is sta tionary With the upper variant of the shifting pattern for 6 speed gearbox see previous illustra tion first press down the gear lever in the N position in order to engage reverse gear 120 Option accessory for more information see Introduction D Automatic gear positions M Manual gear positions The information display shows the position of the gear selector using the following indica tions P R N D S 1 2 3 45 or 6 see page 75 Gear positions Parking position P Select P when starting the
247. hand audio cable to the white socket and the right hand one to the red socket 3 Connect the power cable to the electrical socket if your equipment is designed for 12 V Always follow the instructions for the external equipment when connecting There is a recess in the right hand rear edge of the tunnel console where cables can be routed so that the hatch can be closed without cables being pinched RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system For electrical socket location see page 221 Playing back audio video via the A V AUX input 1 Switch on the rear TV screen by means pressing the On Off button on the TV screen 2 Aim the remote control at the IR receiver on the TV screen and press repeatedly on MEDIA to the source A V AUX release and wait a few seconds and the selection is accepted 3 Switch on the connected device and press PLAY or equivalent on the connected device Input volume The input volume is adjusted in the menu under A V AUX input volume To activate the system The RSE system can be activated from either the front or rear TV screen From the front TV screen press MEDIA and select RSE From the rear TV screen by means of pressing the On Off button on the rear TV screen and then pressing MEDIA or RADIO on the remote control and selecting a source e g Disc Settings from the front TV screen TUNE OK MENU EXIT Selection of source in the rear TV screens From the fro
248. has arisen in the from the lenses transmission system 04 between the BLIS In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the system s camera display shows the text Blind spot syst Messages on the display and the car s electri Service required Pe E l t t t nonna The following illustrations show examples of O E racine system is Blind spot info The BLIS system is situations where the BLIS indicator lamp may system activated system OFF denied illuminate even if there is no other vehicle within Blind spot syst Blind spot syst dis A Service required engaged contact a O IMPORTANT NU workshop Repair of the BLIS system components Blind spot syst The BLIS camera is must only be performed by a workshop an WN Camera blocked blocked by dirt authorised Volvo workshop is recom el snow or ice clean mended the lenses G021430 7 As Reflection from shiny wet road surface gt gt i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 217 04 Comfort and driving pleasure BLIS Blind Spot Information System Own shadow on large light smooth surface e g noise barrier or concrete road surface Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera E Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure O Comfort inside the passenger compartment Storage spaces 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Comfort inside the passenger compartment D Storage compartment i
249. he blown bulb and fit a new one 3 It can only be installed in one way 5 Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press 4 until a clicking sound is heard 6 Refit the cover It must be fitted and 5 pressed in until a clicking sound is heard Reinstall the parts in reverse order 6 08 210 N A o 0 Before starting to replace a bulb see page 335 Detach the headlamp Remove the small round cover Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulb holder Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one It can only be installed in one way Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press until a clicking sound is heard Refit the cover It must be fitted and pressed in until a clicking sound is heard Reinstall the parts in reverse order G026015 Remove the cover by pressing in the 4 clips with a thin blade and pulling straight out Unscrew the lamp housing screw and pull it out Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it Fit a new bulb by turning clockwise Refit the bulb The profile of the bulb holder corresponds to the profile of the foot of the bulb Refit the bulb holder The TOP mark on the bulb holder must always be upward G017456 The direction indictor bulb in the rear lamp cluster is replaced from inside the cargo area 1 Open the panel 2 Remove the insulation by pulling it straight out 3 Loosen the whole of the bulb by turning its handle anticlockwise 4 Detach th
250. he equipment described in the owner s man ual is not available in all cars they have dif ferent equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations In the event of uncertainty over what is stand ard or an option accessory contact a Volvo dealer Special texts Warning texts advise of a risk of personal injury Important texts advise of a risk of material damage NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam ple Footnote There is footnote information in the owner s manual that is located at the bottom of the page This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral Message texts There are displays in the car that show text messages These text messages are high lighted in the owner s manual by means of the text being slightly larger and printed in grey Examples of this are in menu texts and mes sage texts on the information display e g Audio settings Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner The decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning information Warning for personal injury A G031590 Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field whit
251. he inlaid carpets Use a vacuum Cleaner to remove dust and dirt Each inlay mat is secured with pins Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lift the mat straight up Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming Floor mats should be cleaned with agents recom mended by your Volvo dealer Stains on fabric upholstery and roof upholstery A special fabric cleaning agent available from authorised Volvo dealers is recommended to avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of the upholstery IMPORTANT Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery Treating stains on leather upholstery Volvo s leather upholstery is chromium free and is treated to preserve its original appear ance Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau tiful patina over time The leather is refined and processed so that it retains its natural charac teristics It is given a protective coating but regular cleaning is required in order to maintain both characteristics and appearance Volvo offers a comprehensive product for the clean ing and treatment of leather upholstery which when used in accordance with the instructions preserves the leather s protecti
252. he vehicle does not follow the carriageway evenly The camera sensor has certain limitations see page 199 The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete riorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads The function is not intended for city traffic In some cases driving ability is not affected despite driver fatigue In which case there may not be any warning issued for the driver For this reason it is always important to stop and take a break in the event of any signs of driver fatigue irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a warning The function must not be used to extend a driving stint Always plan breaks at regular intervals and ensure that you are fully rested Limitation In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating for example e if the driver tests the LDW function e in strong side winds e onrutted road surfaces Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 203 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 204 Driver Alert System DAC Some settings are made from the centre con sole display screen and its menu system For information on how the menu system is used see page 148 The current status can be checked on the trip computer display with the left hand stalk switch INFO RESET Ts a fr 4 Thumbwheel Turn until
253. he venti lation system consists of fans in the seats and backrests that draw air through the seat upholstery The cooling effect increases the cooler the passenger compart ment air becomes The ventilation is regulated from the climate control and takes seat temperature solar radi ation and outside temperature into considera tion The ventilation can be used at the same time as seat heating For example the function can be used to dry damp from clothing The ventilation system can be activated when the engine is running There are three comfort levels that produce different cooling and dehu midification outputs e Comfort Level lll press the button once for the highest output three blue lamps illu minate in the centre console TV screen see illustration above e Comfort level Il press the button twice for lower output two blue lamps illuminate in the TV screen e Comfort level I press the button three times for the lowest output one blue lamp illuminates in the TV screen Press the button four times to switch off the function no lamps illuminate The seat ventilation should be used carefully by people sensitive to draughts Comfort level I is recommended for long term use IMPORTANT The seat ventilation cannot be started when passenger compartment temperature is below 5 C This is to avoid chilling anyone sitting in the seat Fan If the fan is fully switched off then
254. heck tyre pressures on cold tyres Cold tyres means the tyres are the same tempera ture as the ambient temperature After several kilometres of driving the tyres warm up and the pressure increases Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con sumption shortens tyre lifespan and impairs the car s roadholding Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being damaged Tyre pres sure affects travelling comfort road noise and steering characteristics Tyre pressure decreases over time this is a natural phenomenon Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature 07 07 320 EN Lift the floor hatch and take out the warning triangle Take the warning triangle from the case fold out and assemble the two loose sides Fold out the warning triangle s support legs Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle Position the warning triangle in a suit able place with regard to traffic G017956 Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use If the car has been locked with privacy lock ing then the boot lid tailgate and floor hatch cannot be opened see page 53 G015352 G015353 iy Option accessory for more information see Introduction First aid kit G018253 A case with first aid equipment is located under the floor in the cargo area 07 Wheels and tyres Emerg
255. heel for High Performance so TUNE cannot be used there to input characters only the digit and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can be used for this 4 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia Option accessory for more information see Introduction 1 When the Name row is selected press OK MENU to reach the input mode illus tration above 2 Turn TUNE to the desired letter press OK MENU to confirm The number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can also be used 3 Continue with the next letter and so on The name entered is shown in the input field 2 in the TV screen 4 Tochange the input mode to numbers special characters change between uppercase lowercase letters etc turn TUNE to one of the options see explana tion in the table below in the list 1 and then press OK MENU When the name has been fully entered select OK in the list on the TV screen 1 and press OK MENU Now continue with the telephone number in the same way as above When the telephone number has been entered press OK MENU and select a telephone num ber type Mobile Home Work or General Press OK MENU to confirm When all details have been filled in select Save contact in the menu to save the contact 05 Infotainment system Bluetooth handsfree 123 Change between letters and ABC numbers with OK MENU More Change to spe
256. here are more rows in the list than can be displayed simultaneously saying Down allows you to scroll down in the list and saying Up allows you to scroll up in the list Calling voice mailbox The following dialogue allows you to call your voice mailbox to check if you have received any messages The phone number for your voice mailbox must be registered in the Bluetooth function see page 261 The user starts the dialogue by saying Phone gt call voice mailbox or Phone call voice mailbox Continue by responding to the system s prompts Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system Voice recognition mobile phone 05 269 05 Infotainment system 05 270 RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system TV screen yy Headphones socket On Off button A V AUX input Remote control Headphones IR receiver transmitter The RSE system is a system for rear seat entertainment that makes it possible to e g watch video play music listen to the radio watch TV or connect other external devices e g a games console The RSE system is fully integrated with the car s infotainment system and can be used simultaneously with other functions of the info tainment system When the rear seat passengers are using e g A V AUX or watching TV while listening with headphones the driver and front seat passen ger can still use the car s radio or media player if Option
257. i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Limitations The collision warning system is active from and including approx 4 km h The visual warning signal may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight reflec tions when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead The warn ing sound should therefore always be acti vated On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended which may reduce the capacity to avoid a collision In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability The visual warning signal can be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example If this occurs then the warning sound is activated even if it is deactivated in the menu system e Warnings may not appear if the dis tance to the vehicle in front is small or if steering wheel and pedal movements are large e g a very active driving style 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Collision Warning with Auto Brake Pedestrian detection Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic situation or external influences mean that the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a pedestrian or a vehicle in front correctly The sensor system has a limited range for pedestrians and the system therefore pro vides effective w
258. iINdOWS ssssssessessesssessesseeseeneee 103 Rear control panel Passenger compartment filter 157 Privacy lOCkiIND ooccoonnnnococcconancncnnnananananas 53 audio SyYSteM oocccccccnonanananonononnnnnnnnnos 231 Passenger compartment heater Puncture see TylBS oooonnicnnccccnoncnnaninnnnass 317 Rear seat entertainment arica 270 o Coe sanicsicsvncancrnmnencasnadenseavetncenaxe 166 a 270 PCC Personal Car Communicator Rearview and door mirrors UNCION S erpen e 49 0 COMPASS ee eee ee eee 108 ANOS A acnre ances 50 51 door 105 Pedestrian Getection cccccccccccuccccccececs 196 Queue ASSISt ccccceeceeceeeeceeceeeeseeeeeaeees 183 electrically retractable 105 Petrol grade misioneras ice 900 Queue ASSIST Lccinnicin rate 183 o Re ae re ae 106 Phone LTE EPEE A E An 106 CONE anno 261 Rear window defrosting ooccoooom o 106 ANOS O cocancncncnonononononononononenannrnnnnnoss 258 RecirculatiON ocoocnonnnnconcccnnonononnnannnnos 164 cerning CANIS asociacion 260 Recommendations during driving 286 making Call S ccrssrsemtecsextcesacnsuatbeseosneenasis 260 phone DO onda 262 Recommended child seats table 35 10 Alphabetical Index ss rondingen aa 308 Renger a Poo 156 REIS serca 289 TIC CAD A E E E E A 289 fuel filler flap electrical opening 289 fuel filler flap manual opening 289 Uli vatios talles 289 Relay fuse box see FUSES occcccooocccnononnno
259. iageway and is in danger of driving either into a ditch or into oncoming traffic LDW consists of a camera that detects the side markings painted on the carriageway The driver is alerted by an acoustic signal if the vehicle crosses a side marking Operation and function The function is switched on or off by means of a switch on the centre console An indicator lamp in the button illuminates when the func tion is switched on The trip computer display shows Lane Depart Warn Standby lt 65 km h when the function is in standby mode due to speed being below 65 km h The LDW function is activated automatically from standby mode after the camera has scan ned in the carriageway s side markings and speed exceeds 65 km h The trip computer display then shows Lane Depart Warn Available Y A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected see page 208 E Option accessory for more information see Introduction If the camera can no longer detect the carria geway s side markings the display shows Lane Depart Warn Unavailable If speed decreases to below 60 km h then the function resumes standby mode and the dis play shows Lane Depart Warn Standby lt 65 km h If the vehicle crosses the left or right hand side marking of the carriageway without due cause then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal No warning is given in the following situations e Direction indicators activated e The driver has
260. ial For a descrip tion of the menu system see page 148 The instructions are divided into 3 lessons which take around 5 minutes in total to com plete The system starts with the first lesson To skip a lesson and go to the next one press the button for voice recognition and say Next Go back to the previous lesson by say ing Previous Exit the instructions by means of a long press on the button for voice recognition Voice training The system displays up to fifteen phrases for you to say Voice training can be started in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Voice settings gt Voice training Choose between User 1 or User 2 For a description of the menu system see page 148 After voice training has been completed remember to set your user profile under Voice user setting Additional settings in MY CAR e User setting Two user profiles can be set the function is activated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Voice settings Voice user setting Choose between User 1 or User 2 For a descrip tion of the menu system see page 148 e Voice volume Can be changed in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Voice settings Voice output volume For a description of the menu sys tem see page 148 ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system Voice recognition mobile phone 05 gt gt 267 05 Infotainment system Voice recognition mobil
261. ial number can be read on the engine see page 368 B Manual gearbox C Automatic gearbox O A O a O 82 0 81 0 81 0 81 0 81 0 09 Specifications Engine specifications 93 2 TI 9315 93 2 93 2 Swept volume litres 2 953 1 984 2 400 2 400 2 400 Com pression ratio gl 1651 ES 16 5 1 16351 01 10 00 11 09 01 10 00 111 09 Specifications Adverse driving conditions Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor mally high oil temperature or oil consumption Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions Check the oil level more frequently for long journeys e towing a caravan or trailer e in mountainous regions e at high speeds in temperatures colder than 30 C or hot ter than 40 C The above also apply to shorter driving dis tances at low temperatures Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions It provides extra protection for the engine Volvo recommends Castrol oil products IMPORTANT In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine s service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life starting characteristics fuel consumption and environmental impact An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter vals can be applied Only use a prescribed grade
262. ics yourself if the car has been in safety mode This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See manual has been displayed Never under any circumstances attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See manual message is dis played Leave the car at once If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed It must be transported from its loca tion Volvo recommends that it is transpor ted to an authorised Volvo workshop 01 Safety 9 Child safety 01 Children should sit comfortably and safely Volvo recommends that children travel in rear facing child seats until as late an age as pos sible at least until 3 4 years of age and then front facing booster cushions child seats until up to 10 years of age The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child s weight and size for more information see page 35 Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun try Check what does apply Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger Volvo has child safety equipment child seats booster cushions amp attachment devices which is designed for your particular car Using Vol vo s child
263. id short circuits with other components in the engine compartment 10 11 Open the clips on the front cover of the battery in your car and remove the cover see page 345 Connect the red jump lead s other clamp onto the car s positive terminal 2 Connect one of the black jump lead s clamps to the donor battery s negative ter minal 3 Connect the other clamp to a grounding point e g right hand engine mounting at the top the outer screw head 4 Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting procedure Start the engine of the donor car and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx 1500 rpm Start the engine in the car with the dis charged battery IMPORTANT Do not touch the crocodile clips during the start procedure There is a risk of sparks forming 12 Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red gt Make sure that none of the black jump lead s clamps comes into contact with the battery s positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas which is highly explosive A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con nected incorrectly and this can be enough for the battery to explode The battery contains sulphuric acid which can cause serious burns If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes skin or clothing flus
264. if there are several devices in the car However the device must first have been paired see Pair and connect external device above To change to another device 1 Repeatedly press on MEDIA until Bluetooth is shown release and wait a second or press OK MENU 2 Check that the external device is searcha ble visible via Bluetooth see the manual for the external device Press OK MENU Turn TUNE to Change device and con firm with OK MENU gt After a while the external device s name is shown in the TV screen If several external devices have been paired then these are also shown 5 Select the device to be connected by turn ing TUNE and confirm with OK MENU gt Connection of the external device takes place Change audio file by pressing Xx 55 on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 251 05 Infotainment system Media Bluetooth 05 252 Remove the connected device 1 Press Bluetooth mode on OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Remove Bluetooth device and confirm with OK MENU 3 Select the device to be removed by turning TUNE and confirm with OK MENU gt A prompt asking whether or not you want to remove the connection is shown in the TV screen 4 Press OK MENU to confirm EXIT cancels Disconnecting the device Automatic disconnection takes place if the external device moves out of the infotainment sy
265. igh pressure washing use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car the distance applies to all exterior parts Do not spray directly onto the locks Testing the brakes WARNING Always test the brakes after washing the car including the parking brake to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per formance Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush The heat from the friction causes the brake lin ings to warm up and dry Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather Exterior plastic rubber and trim components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts rubber and trim components such as glossy trim mouldings When using such a cleaning agent the instruc tions must be followed carefully IMPORTANT Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber When using degreasant on plastic and rub ber only rub with light pressure if it is nec essary Use a soft washing sponge Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used Rims Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome plated a
266. il O Gearbox type designation and serial num ber Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox Car s identification number VIN Vehicle Identification Number Further information on the car is presented in the registration document 09 Specifications 01 10 OO 111 09 Dimensions and weights Dimensions V70 Wheelbase 2816 B Length 4823 C Load length floor 1878 folded seat D Load length floor 1089 Height 1547 F Load height 724 G Front track 1588 15785 H Rear track 15864 15708 I Load width floor 1153 J Width 1861 1876 G045048 K Width including door 2106 mirrors L Width including folded 1907 in door mirrors A with 16 50 and 17 50 wheel B with 17 55 and 18 55 wheel C with Keyless drive 00 1 Dimensions and weights 09 09 Specifications 2 Y fo 9 Y fo o XC70 A Wheelbase 2815 G Front track 16144 K Width including door 2119 mirrors B Length 4838 16048 n L Width including folded 1925 C Load length floor 1878 H Rear track 1580 indoor mirrors folded seat B 1570 A with 16 50 wheel B with 17 55 wheel a ROO mee Load width floor A ciin koyesoawe E Height Hous J Width 1870 1876 F Load height 724 gt gt 01 10 00 111 09 372 09 Specifications Dimensions and weights Weights WARNING Towing capacity and towball load Kerb weight includes the driver the fuel tank The car s driving characteristics change 90 ful
267. iller flap shows the correct alternative fuel The use of components not designed for bioethanol engines could cause fire injury or engine damage Reserve fuel can The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol see the NOTE box page 117 IMPORTANT Make sure the reserve fuel can is securely fastened and that its cap is sealed Ethanol is sensitive to sparks and explosive gases could form in the reserve fuel can if it is refuelled with ethanol Diesel Only use diesel fuel from well known produc ers Never use diesel of dubious quality Diesel should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 stand ards Diesel engines are sensitive to contami nants in the fuel such as excessively high vol umes of sulphur particles for example At low temperatures 6 C to 40 C a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel which may lead to ignition problems Special diesel fuel designed for low temperatures around freezing point is available from the major oil companies This fuel is less viscous at low tem peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre cipitate The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled When 1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME but further amounts must not be added refuelling check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork Wash off any spillage with deter gent and water IMPORTANT Onl
268. ilm is being played back then it is paused Press OK MENU to select the chapter this also leads back to the original position if the film was being played back then it is restarted Press EXIT to access the title list Titles are selected in the title list by turning TUNE and the selection is confirmed with OK MENU this also leads back to the chapter list y Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system 05 gt gt 245 CS 05 Infotainment system 05 246 Media player Press OK MENU to activate the selection and return to the start position Use EXIT to cancel the selection and this leads back to the original position without any selection being made The chapter can also be changed by pressing on rl SI on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad Advanced settings Angle If the DVD video disc supports it the function can be used to choose from which camera position a particular scene should be shown Go in disc mode to Disc menu Advanced settings Angle DivX Video On Demand The media player can be registered in order to play DivX VOD type files from burned discs or USB The code for registration can be found in the menu system MY CAR Settings gt Information DivX VOD code For general information on menus see under MY CAR see page 148 For more information visit www divx com vod Picture settings You can adjust the setting
269. in the TV screen Manual connection If you want to change the connected mobile phone go in phone mode to Phone menu gt Change phone Remove the device A connected mobile phone can be deregis tered and removed This is performed in phone mode under Phone menu Remove Bluetooth device Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system 05 gt gt 261 05 Infotainment system 05 262 Bluetooth handsfree Version information Bluetooth The car s current Bluetooth version can be seen in phone mode under Phone menu gt Phone settings gt Bluetooth software version in car Phone book There are two phone books These are merged into one in the car and are displayed as a single phone book in the car e The car downloads the mobile phone s phone book and only displays this phone book when the mobile phone from which this phone book was downloaded is con nected e Thecar also has a built in phone book This contains all the contacts stored in the car irrespective of which phone was con nected when saving them These contacts are visible for all users regardless of the mobile phone that is connected to the car If a contact is saved in the car then the symbol PJ is shown in front of the con tact in the phone book Changes made from the car to a record in the mobile phone s telephone book will result in a new record in the car s telephone book e
270. inapplicable following the connection of an external battery or bat tery charger e The negative battery terminal on the car s main battery must never be used for connecting an external battery or battery charger only the car chassis may be used as the grounding point See the section Start assistance fora description of how the cable clamps must be attached Symbols on the battery Use protective goggles Further information in the AB 2 owner s manual Store the battery out of the reach of children The battery contains cor A rosive acid Battery Avoid sparks and naked Replacing the main battery flames Removal First of all Take the remote control key from the ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes before any electrical connections are touched this is because the car s electrical system Risk of explosion needs to store the necessary information to control modules Must be taken for recy cling G044513 An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally responsible manner it contains lead G040861 08 Maintenance and service 08 08 Maintenance and service Battery A Release the rubber moulding so that the rear cover is free Remove the rear cover by screwing one quarter turn and lifting it away G040862 Connect and remove the positive and neg ative cables in the correct order Detach the black negative cable Detach the r
271. information on how the child seat should be tensioned in the upper mounting points see the seat manufacturer s instruc tions WARNING The child seat s straps must always be drawn through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the attach ment point Remote control key Key DIAde 2 ccccececeesceosecccnsecceeeecsereceereceeeeres 48 PY IVER E a AUN INNO AM SE oo ss oo cc aseece direc dussnccausss dueiercusaeencneencovreeccevendeevendecnee 53 Battery replacement remote control Key PCC cccccssceesseeeeseeeeeees 55 Keyes S Chaar AEN a a eaa e A Mime aba cS oss Se iiaa aia anadai ananin aaia a aaa 57 POGKING UNIOGKINGsts es A 60 Childisafety IGGKS e ret tree a A 65 AO O A 66 46 Option accessory for more information see Introduction LOCKS AND ALARM 02 Locks and alarm 02 Remote control key key blade General The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys or PCCs Personal Car Communicator They are used to start the car and for locking and unlocking More remote control keys can be ordered up to 6 can be programmed and used for the same Car The PCC has increased functionality com pared with the remote control key The contin uation of this chapter describes the functions available in both the PCC and the remote con trol key WARNING If there are children in the car Always remember to switch off the power supply
272. ing 1 When the car is moving at the desired high est possible speed Press the steering wheel button fn to switch on the speed limiter gt The symbol for the speed limiter is illu minated on the instrument panel dis play 2 Press one of the steering wheel buttons or until the instrument panel display shows the desired maximum speed gt The speed limiter is then active and the display 5 shows the maximum speed selected and the maximum speed stored in the memory When stationary 1 Press the steering wheel button to switch on the speed limiter 2 Scroll with the button until the instru ment panel display shows the desired maximum speed gt The speed limiter is then active and the display 5 shows the maximum speed selected and the maximum speed stored in the memory Temporary deactivation standby mode To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode Press 0 gt The display shows the stored maximum speed in brackets 5 and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum speed The speed limiter is re activated by one press on fe at which the display s brackets disappear and the car s maxi mum speed is again limited Temporary deactivation with the accelerator pedal The speed limiter can also be set in standby mode with the accelerator pedal e g for rap idly accelerating the car out of a situation 04 Comfort and driving pl
273. ing Audio settings Remove Bluetooth device played back or TV is being shown in order to Sa access the pop up menu Bluetooth software version in car Image settings 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 5 For submenus see Main menu AM 4 Does not apply to Performance 6 Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 281 05 Infotainment system Menu navigation Infotainment Source menu Change phone DVD root menu Remove Bluetooth device DVD disc TOP menu Phone settings Discoverable Menus TEL Sounds and volume Main menu Bluetooth handsfree PAONEOOOK GOWNOAU PRONE MENU Bluetooth software version in All calls All calls Call options Missed calls Auto answer Voicemail number 05 Answered calls i h Dialled calls Disconnect phone Call duration Phone book Search New contact Speed dials Receive vCard Memory status Clear phone book T What is shown in the pop up menu for the source menu depends on what is being played back or displayed it can be e g Disc menu or USB menu 8 Only applies to DVD video discs 4 Does not apply to Performance 05 Infotainment system CT 284 Recommendations during Criving c cccccccssssssceceeecessssseeeeeeeesseseeees 286 A SE cco ccceccdeccdasedcaenschdenccusecoaresoadencuaendoescoereecdaeessaees 289 FUG greta inc
274. ing height 2 Take out the jack wheel wrench and removal tool for wheel covers located under the cargo floor in the cargo area If another jack is selected see page 328 3 Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones for example 4 Cars with steel rims have removable wheel covers Use the removal tool to hook in and pull off any full wheel wheel covers Alter natively the wheel covers can be pulled away by hand G044978 5 Screw together the towing eye with the wheel wrench until the stop position as illustrated below i 1 f A Option accessory for more information see Introduction o O Y Y o IMPORTANT The towing eye must be screwed into all threads in the wheel bolt wrench 6 Loosen the wheel bolts 12 1 turn anticlock wise with the wheel wrench WARNING Never position anything between the ground and the jack nor between the jack and the car s jacking point 7 There are two jacking points on each side of the car There is a recess in the plastic cover at each point Crank the foot of the Changing wheels jack down so it is pressed squarely on the ground G034967 IMPORTANT The ground must be firm smooth and level 8 Lift the car so that the wheel is free Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel Installation 1 Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and
275. ing used up them selves Lambda sond oxygen sensor The Lambda sond is part of a control system intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel economy An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine This value is fed into an electronic system that con tinuously controls the injectors The ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is continuously adjusted These adjustments create optimal conditions for efficient combustion and together with the three way catalytic converter reduce harmful emissions hydrocarbons car bon monoxide and nitrous oxides Petrol Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard Most engines can be run with octane ratings of 95 and 98 RON 91 RON should only be used in exceptional cases e 95 RON can be used for normal driving e 98 RON is recommended for optimum per formance and minimum fuel consumption When driving in temperatures above 38 C fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy 06 During your journey Ss IMPORTANT e Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as not to damage the catalytic converter e Do not use additives not recommended by Volvo Bioethanol E85 Do not modify the fuel system or its compo nents and do not replace components with parts that are not specifically designed for use with bioethanol Methanol must not be used A decal on the inside of the fuel f
276. ings are deployed Select one of the options from Long Normal or Short in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings gt Driving support systems Collision Warning Warning distance The warning distance determines the system s sensitivity Warning distance Long provides an earlier warning First test with Long and if this setting produces too many warnings which could be perceived as irritating in certain sit uations then change to warning distance Normal Only use warning distance Short in excep tional cases e g for dynamic driving When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be used by the cruise control even if the colli sion warning system is switched off The collision warning system warns the driver in the event of a risk of a collision but the function cannot shorten driver reaction time In order for the collision warning system to be effective always drive with the Distance Alert set at time interval 4 5 see page 189 Even if the warning distance has been set to Long warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations e g when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles in front brake heavily Checking settings The settings required can be controlled on the centre console display screen Search with the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Driving support systems gt Collision Warning see page 148
277. instrument panel illuminates and the message Soot filter full See manual is shown on the instrument panel display Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating tem perature preferably on a main road or motor way The car should then be driven for approx imately 20 minutes more A smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily during regeneration When regeneration is complete the warning text is cleared automatically Use the parking heater in cold weather so that the engine reaches normal operating tempera ture more quickly IMPORTANT If the filter fills up with particles then it can be difficult to start the engine and the filter will be incapable of functioning Then there is a risk that the filter will have to be replaced 06 During your journey Fuel consumption and emissions of carbon dioxide Fuel consumption figures may change if the car is equipped with extra equipment that affects the car s weight See information on weights page 372 and table page 383 The manner in which the car is driven and other non technical factors can also affect fuel consumption Consumption is higher and power output lower for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON Extreme weather conditions driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car s performance 06 06 During y
278. ioethanol E85 Both fuels are filled in the common fuel tank so that any variations of mixing ratios between these two fuels is possible ue If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car has been driven on bioethanol E85 or vice versa then the engine may run slightly unevenly for a time For this reason it is impor tant to allow the engine to accustom itself adapt to the new fuel mixture Adaptation takes place automatically when the car is driven for a short period at an even speed IMPORTANT After the fuel mixture in the tank has been changed an adaptation should be made by driving at an even speed for about 15 minutes If the battery has been discharged or discon nected then a slightly longer period of driving is required for the adaptation as the memory for the electronics has been cleared If the battery is flat then the car can be started with current from another battery When jump starting the car the following steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage N Insert the remote control key in key posi tion 0 see page 82 Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V If the donor battery is installed in another car switch off the donor car s engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other 4 Connect one of the red jump lead s clamps to the donor battery s positive terminal 1 IMPORTANT Connect the start cable carefully to avo
279. ion see Introduction 03 Your driving environment O 03 gt gt 85 Q 03 Your driving environment door is opened the driver s seat and also the door mirrors automatically adopt the positions stored in the key memory oR The seat and the door mirrors do not move 03 if they are already set the relevant position It is also possible to use the key memory by pressing the unlock button on the remote con trol key when the driver s door is open The key memory can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Car key memory gt Position of door mirrors and driver s seat in key For a description of the menu system see page 148 The key memory in the two remote control keys and the seat s three memories are completely independent of each other Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move press one of the buttons to stop the seat Restarting to reach the seat position stored in the key memory is performed by pressing the unlock button on the remote control key The driver s door must then be open Risk of crushing Make sure that children do not play with the controls Check that there are no objects in front of behind or under the seat during adjustment Ensure that none of the backseat passengers will be trapped Heated ventilated seats For heated ventilated seats see page 161 Head restraint centre seat rear F N r h z
280. ion Warn ing with Auto Brake functions are not operating either The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive cruise control CA E The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt ice and snow Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals No action Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig No action Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy nals road surface The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains Wait It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer blocked 04 Symbols and messages in the display Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed Time interval activated during adjustment AN Time interval activated after adjustment DSTC aeea il ei Cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability and Traction Control system DSTC has been eile set in Normal mode see page 172 Cruise control Cancelled The cruise control has been deactivated the driver has to regulate the speed gt gt gt Option accessory for more information see
281. ion in the list and confirm with OK MENU gt The channels change places with each other After the preset channels max 30 come all the other channels available in the area It is pos sible to move a channel up to a place in the preset list Save the available TV channels as presets If the car has been moved within the country for example from one city to another it is not certain that the presets are available at the new location as the frequency range may have changed In which case carry out another scan and save a new preset list 1 Press TV mode on OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK MENU 3 Turn TUNE to Autostore and press OK MENU gt An automatic scan for available TV channels starts this scan takes a little while During this time the figure for each channel found and added as a pre set is shown When the scan is com plete a message is shown and the pic ture is shown A preset list max 30 pre sets has now been created and is avail able To change channel see page 253 Scanning the TV channels This function automatically scans through the frequency range for all channels available in the area where you are When a channel is found it is shown for approx 10 seconds before scanning is resumed Scanning is stopped with EXIT then the channel that you just watched continues to be shown Scanning does not affect the preset list Activate scanning in TV mode under TV menu
282. ir vents Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents to remove ice and misting quickly to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate not at too low fan speed to enable this to ensure good comfort in warm dry weather to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather Air to the floor and win dows Some air flows from the dashboard air vents Air to floor and from dashboard air vents Air to floor Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows Airflow to windows from dashboard air vents and to the floor to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold or humid weather in sunny weather with cool outside tempera tures to direct heat or cold to the floor to provide cooler air along the floor or warmer air higher up in cold weather or hot dry weather O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 166 Fuel driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater Fuel driven heater General information about the parking heater The parking heater heats the engine and pas senger compartment and can be started directly or with the timer Two different times can be selected using the timer Here time refers to the time when the car is heated and ready The car s electronic sys tem calculates when heating should be started based on the outside temperature The heater cannot start if the outside tempera ture exceeds 15 C At
283. isplay see page 121 HDC cannot be activated in an automatic gearbox with the gear selector in position D Operation HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of 10 km h forwards with engine braking and 7 km h backwards However any speed within the gear s speed register can be selected using the accelerator pedal When the accelerator pedal is released the car is braked quickly to 10 or 7 km h respectively irrespective of the hill s gradient and without the need for the foot brake The brake lights come on automatically when the function is operating The driver can brake or stop the car at any time by using the foot brake HDC is deactivated 03 Your driving environment D HDC Hill Descent Control e with the on off button on the centre con sole e ifa gear higher than 1 is selected on a manual gearbox e if agear higher than 1 is selected on an automatic gearbox or if the gear selector is moved to position D The function can be disengaged at any time If it takes place on a steep downhill gradient then the braking effect will not release directly but slowly instead 03 With HDC activated you may experience a delay between acceleration pedal activation and engine response D 03 Your driving environment Parking brake 03 Parking brake Service required Function A faint electric motor noise can be heard when the electrical parking brake is being applied The noise can also
284. isplay screen and menu system For information on how the menu system is used see page 148 The Brake Support and Auto Brake func tions are always enabled they cannot be deactivated On and Off To select whether the collision warning system should be switched on or off Search with the menu system MY CAR via the centre console display screen and locate Settings gt Car settings Driving support systems gt Collision Warning For information on the menu system see page 148 An activated function is tested at each engine start by briefly illuminating the warning lamp s separate points of light When starting the engine the setting that was selected when the engine was switched off is obtained automatically F i 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 197 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 198 Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian detection Activating deactivating warning signals The warning lamp is activated automatically when the engine is started if the system is switched on The warning sound can be activated deacti vated separately using the options for On or Off in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Driving support systems gt Warning sound if risk of collision Set warning distance The warning distance regulates the distance at which the visual and acoustic warn
285. it a second or press OK MENU gt A search starts and after a short while the most recently used channel is shown Changing channel It is possible to change channel as follows 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system 05 gt gt 253 CS 05 Infotainment system 05 254 TV Turn TUNE a list of all available channels in the area is shown If any of these chan nels is already saved as a preset then its preset number is shown to the right of the channel name Continue turning TUNE to reach the desired channel and press OK MENU By pressing the preset buttons 0 9 Via a short press on the buttons the next available channel in the area is shown If the car has been moved within the coun try for example from one city to another it is not certain that the presets are available at the new location as the frequency range may have changed In which case carry out a new search and save a new preset list see the function Save the available TV channels as presets page 255 If no reception is available on the preset buttons it may be because the car is at a location other than where the scan of TV channels was run for example if the car was driven from Germany to France A new selection of country and a new search may then need to be carried out Searching TV channels Preset list 1 Press TV mode on OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to TV menu an
286. ith PCC Personal Car Communicator 3 Information Function buttons Locking Locks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is activated Press and hold at least 2 seconds to close all the windows and sunroof simultaneously WARNING If the sunroof and windows are closed using the remote control key check that no one is in danger of getting hands caught Unlocking Unlocks the doors and tail gate while the alarm is deactivated gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 49 02 Locks and alarm 02 50 Remote control key key blade Unique PCC functions Press and hold at least 4 seconds to open all windows simultaneously The function can be changed from unlocking all doors simultaneously to unlocking the driv er s door only with one press of the button and after a further press of the button within 10 seconds unlocking the remaining doors The function can be changed in the menu sys tem MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Lock settings gt Doors unlock with both the alternatives All doors and Enter current PIN For a description of the menu system see page 148 Approach light duration Used to switch on the car s lighting at a distance For more information see page 95 la Tailgate Unlocks and disarms the alarm for the tailgate only On cars with power tail gate the tailgate is opened after the button is kept depressed For more information
287. ive function in the PCC allows the car to be unlocked driven and locked with out the need for a key You simply have to have the PCC with you The system makes it easier and more convenient to open the car e g when your hands are full Both of the car s PCCs incorporate the Keyless function Additional PCCs can be ordered see page 48 PCC range In order to open a door or the tailgate a PCC must be no more than approx 1 5 metres from 1 Personal Car Communicator see page 50 the car door handle or tailgate This means that the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door must have the PCC with him or her It is not possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is on the opposite side of the car The red rings in the preceding illustration indi cate the range covered by the system s anten nas If all PCCs are removed from the car when the engine is running or key position Il is active see page 82 and if all doors are closed then a warning message is shown in the information display and an audio reminder signal sounds at the same time The warning message clears and the audio reminder signal stops when the PCC is brought back to the car after e adoor has been opened and closed e the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch e the READ button has been pressed Handling the PCC safely If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in the car it is deactivated temporarily when the car is locked This prevents unauthoris
288. iven about 30 km before the oil level display is correct Do not fill more oil if filling level 3 or 4 appears as shown in the illustration below The level must never be above MAX or below MIN as this could lead to engine damage Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire Measuring the oil level If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the sequence below 1 Activate key position Il see page 82 2 Rotate the thumbwheel on the left hand 08 stalk switch to position Engine oil level Wait gt You will then see information displayed about the engine oil level and topping up aad Checking the level aa AWN Tp SH T SJ 120 140 a o x XI000 R MIN _ ge i G044551 The figures 1 4 represent filling level Do not fill more oil if filling level 3 or 4 is shown Recom mended filling level is 4 When topping up the coolant follow the instructions on the packaging It is important that the mixture of coolant concentrate and water is correct for the prevailing weather con ditions Never top up with water only The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate Coolant can be very hot If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature unscrew the expan sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure Engine compartment For capacitie
289. iven if all locks have been activated once the doors have been closed Selecting the function Different options for indicating locking unlock ing with light can be set in the car s menu sys tem see page 148 Search in the menu system MY CAR for Settings gt Car settings Light settings and select Lock confirmation light and or Unlock confirmation light Immobiliser Each remote control key has a unique code The car can only be driven with the correct remote control key with the correct code The following error messages in the combined instrument panel s information display are rela ted to the electronic immobiliser 02 Locks and alarm Remote control key key blade Key error Reinsert Error reading the key remote control key during starting Remove the key re insert it and try to start again Error reading the PCC during starting Try to start again Car key not found Only applies to Key less drive with PCC If the error persists Insert the remote key into the ignition switch and try to start again Error in immobiliser system during star ting If the fault per sists the recommen dation is to contact an authorised Volvo workshop Immobiliser Try start again For starting the car see page 115 Functions G021078 Remote control key standard version Locking Unlocking Approach light duration lt 3 Tailgate Panic function 02 Remote control key w
290. k through the speakers cannot be controlled from the rear control panel In order that an audio source can be selected with MODE and listened to it is 1 VOLUME Volume left and right required that the audio source is available and connected in the car Scroll search forward and backward MODE Select between AM FM1 FM2 DAB1 DAB2 Disc USB iPod Bluetooth AUX TV and On Off For connection via USB or AUX see page 247 or via Bluetooth see page 251 Headphones sockets 3 5 mm Activate deactivate The control panel is activated with MODE Deactivation is possible via a long press on MODE or when the engine is switched off Scroll search forward and backward Pressing 2 scrolls between disc tracks audio files or seeks the next available radio station i A Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system General infotainment functions INFO shows additional information FAV store a preset e Bluetooth ho p e AUX eo TV The FAV button can be used to store functions that are used frequently so that the function can be started simply by pressing FAV You can select a favourite e g Equalizer for each function as follows In RADIO mode e AM o FM1 FM2 e DAB1 DAB2 In MEDIA mode e DISC e USB e iPod It is also possible to select and store a favourite for TEL MY CAR CAM and NAV Favour ites can
291. ke manifold 6 cyl without turbo Mass air flow sensor 4 cyl 2 0 petrol Oil level sensor 5 cyl diesel Coolant pump D4162T Lambda sonds 4 cyl petrol 10 Lambda sond diesel Control module radiator roller cover manual 5 cyl 2 0 diesel EVAP valve 5 6 cyl petrol 15 Lambda sonds 5 6 cyl petrol 08 Maintenance and service A Coolant pump 1 6 petrol Start 10 Stop Vacuum pump 5 cyl petrol 20 Crankcase ventilation heater 5 cyl petrol Diesel filter heater m Crankcase ventilation heater 5 10 cyl diesel _ Glow plugs diesel 70 AE Cooling fan 4 cyl 5 cyl petrol 60 Cooling fan 6 cyl petrol 5 cyl 80 diesel Electro hydraulic power steer 100 ing A For cars with the Start Stop function this fuse location is empty see instead page 358 08 gt gt 08 Maintenance and service Under the glovebox ok MK slslajs co WOO Jad 1 1 EOS IIS 10S en es 0000 900 0089 14890 8099 4999 NENE al J o O i gt G044518 Sm eon A Function A ora rancios a On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses in fuse box A 10 Control panel rear passen 20 ger door right Box Al Function a ED Primary fuse for audio con 40 trol module Primary fuse for fuses 16 20 Control panel rear passen 20 ger door left 12 V socket cargo area 15 Keyless 20 Co
292. key in the ignition switch gt The alarm is deactivated and the alarm indicator goes out 3 Start the engine Alarm signals When the alarm is triggered the following hap pens e A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off The siren has its own battery and works independently of the car battery e The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off 02 Locks and alarm Reduced alarm level To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm e g if a dog is left in a locked car or during 02 transport on a Car train or car ferry the move ment and tilt detectors should be temporarily deactivated The procedure is the same as with the tempo rary disengaging of deadlocks see page 63 Testing the alarm system Testing the movement detector in the passenger compartment 1 2 Close all windows Remain in the car Engage the alarm function with the remote control key s lock button Wait 15 seconds Trigger the alarm by moving your arms for ward and back at backrest height gt A siren should sound and all direction indicators should flash Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key Test of alarm for doors 1 Engage the alarm function with the remote control key s lock button 2 Wait 15 seconds gt gt ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 67 02 Locks and alarm 3 Unlo
293. l and all fluids depending on how heavily it is loaded and The weight of passengers and accessories how the load is distributed The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing and towball load when a trailer is hitched see bracket is recommended for trailers heavier table page 372 influences the payload and is than 1800 kg not included in the kerb weight Permitted max load Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version i e a car with out extra equipment or accessories This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced cor respondingly by the weight of the acces sory For information on decal location see page 368 Examples of accessories that reduce load Max gross vehicle weight ing Capacity are the Kinetic Momentum E Summum equipment levels as well as other O Max train weight car trailer accessories such as Towbar Load carriers mere Max front axle load Space box Audio system Auxiliary lamps GPS Fuel driven heater Safety grille Car Max rear axle load pets Cargo cover Power seats etc G044979 Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer O Equipment level taining the kerb weight of your own partic l l ular car Max load See registration document Max roof load 100 kg All 2 5TA 2 5TA T4B T4B T4F T4F T5 T5 3 2 3 2 AWD T6 AWD DRIVe D3 D3 D5 Gearbo
294. layer occcoonccconnniononocccnnnonanocnnncnnnns 243 Memory function in seats 85 Menu navigation Infotainment 279 Menu navigation RSE ccscscecseseeeneees 276 MGNUS FUNCUOINS c iscsitwsiccivetaciiatseieasdedises 150 Menus and MESSAQQEG ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 146 Menu structure Infotainment 279 Menu structures RSE ccccccsssceeeeeeeeees 277 Menu system MY CAR 0cccseseeeeeeeeees 148 Messages and symbols Collision Warning with Auto BAK Ciinesucesuvsinesoresuninaianaaneasinaanme 195 201 Distance Alert ccccsccesseeseeeeseeseees 190 Driver Alert Control ccccscceeeeeeees 204 Lane Departure Warning 08 207 Messages and symbols in the Adaptive CUSE COMM Ohevcsecadeviesreeainasentcaenatinancsadevars 187 Messages in BLIS cccccsscceeeseeeeeneeees 217 Messages in the combined instrument Ee o An A 146 Messages in the information display 173 Meters in the combined instrument panel An 76 SPDECCOMETEN cccsccccsseeeceeeeeseeeeseaeees 76 LACNOMIELCD ccinindeaaicmosactercdovstenindeucecinavins 76 DU SUNN espiar A A 163 attending to the WINdOWG 000 156 condensation in headlamps 360 remove with the air vents 165 timer FUNCTION ccccececececeeeeeeeeeeeees 164 Mobile phone ON asst d oo eee 261 PANG SUS PA REE o 258 register DNONC scada 259 VOICE CONTFO le
295. ld seats are suitable for all seats in all car models Child safety 01 Consequently there is a size classification for child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in order to assist users in choosing the correct child seat See the following table EN Full size front facing child seat B Reduced size alt 1 front facing child seat B1 Reduced size alt 2 front facing child seat C Full size rear facing child seat D Reduced size rear facing child seat E Rear facing infant seat F Transverse infant seat left hand G Transverse infant seat right hand O S 01 Safety 01 Child safety Never place a child in the passenger seat if Volvo recommends that you contact an the car is equipped with an activated airbag authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi cation then the car model must be included on the child seat s vehicle list Types of ISOFIX child seat Type of child seat Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats ee Outer rear seat Infant seat transverse max 10 kg E X X G X X Infant seat rear facing max 10 kg E X OK 01 Safety 9 Child safety 01 Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats Front eat TIT x OK A heal Infant seat rear facing max 13 kg E IL D X OK IL C X OK IL Child seat rear facing 9
296. ld seats which are universally approved approved approved U U U 8 01 Safety 9 Child safety 01 Group 2 15 25 kg Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 04192 L Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible Child Seat front facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt Type approval E5 04191 L bag Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 04192 L Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible Child Seat front facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt Type approval E5 04191 L Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 04192 L 9 01 Safety 01 bag Group 2 3 Volvo booster seat with backrest Volvo booster seat with backrest Volvo booster seat with backrest 15 36 kg Volvo Booster Seat with backrest Volvo Booster Seat with backrest Volvo Booster Seat with backrest Type approval E1 04301169 Type approval E1 04301169 Type approval E1 04301169 UF UF UF Booster cushion with and without Booster cushion with and without Booster cushion with and without backrest Boo
297. lector inhibitor The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P R N and D Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gearbox has special safety sys tems Parking position P Stationary car with engine running Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov ing the gear selector to another position Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking position P To be able to move the gear selector from P to other gear positions the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in position Il see page 82 Shiftlock Neutral N If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds irrespective of whether the engine is running then the gear selector is locked To be able to move the gear selector from N to other gear positions the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in position Il see page 82 Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor E N N 5 Tt o o If the car cannot be driven e g due to a flat battery the gear selector must be moved from the P position so that the car can be moved ED Lift the rubber mat in the compartment behind the centre console and open the hatch
298. ll must be cleaned and greased regularly If a towball hitch with vibration damper is used it is not necessary to grease the tow ball 06 During your journey Driving with a trailer Storing the detachable towba Specifications a Y G017971 G021485 Towbar storage space Dimensions mounting points mm IMPORTANT A V70 1129 Always remove the towbar after use and A XC70 1113 store it in the appointed location in the car firmly fastened with its strap B V70 93 B XC70 i ae C 855 D 428 l E 112 F 346 G Side member H Ball centre gt gt 06 During your journey Driving with a trailer Attaching the towbar e a A A o o 0 o Remove the protective cover by first press ing in the catch D gt and then pulling the cover straight back E el G021489 G000000 06 Ed Insert the towbar until you hear a click EJ Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi tion Remove the key from the lock vt A o 0 Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clock wise 06 During your journey Driving with a trailer G021494 G021495 G021497 Check that the towbar is secure by pulling 8 Safety cable Push in the locking wheel El and turn it it up down and back anticlockwise B until you hear a click WARNING 0 WARNING If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it the correct place
299. locked the sunroof will stop and automatically open to the previous posi tion Wind deflector The sunroof has a wind deflector that is folded up when the sunroof is in the open position i i 1 Option accessory for more information see Introduction General information on the Alcolock The function of the Alcolock is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he she is not under the influence of alcohol Alcolock calibration takes place in accordance with each market s limit value in force for driving legally WARNING The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely Functions G043024 Nozzle for breath test Switch Transmission button 4 2 3 4 Lamp for battery status 5 Lamp for result of breath test 6 Lamp indicates ready for breath test Operation Battery Alcolock indicator lamp 4 shows battery sta tus Indicator lamp Battery status 4 Green flashing Charging in pro gress Green Fully charged Yellow Semi charged Red Discharged fit the charger in the holder or connect the power supply cable from the glovebox Store the Alcolock in its holder This will keep the built in battery fully charged and the Alcolock is ac
300. lping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues amongst other things when changes in the traffic ahead combined with a lapse in atten tion could lead to an incident The function is active at speeds below 30 km h and it helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of imminent risk of collision with vehicles in front should the driver not react in time by braking and or steering away City Safety is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation City Safety is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention City Safety must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his her driving style If the driver solely relies on City Safety to do the braking there will be a collision sooner or later The driver or passengers normally only notice City Safety if a situation arises where the car is extremely close to being in a collision If the car is also equipped with a Collision Warning function with Auto Brake these two systems complement each other For more information on Collision Warning function with Auto Brake see page 196 D IMPORTANT Maintenance and replacement of City Safety components must only be per formed by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended City Safety does not engage in all driving situations
301. lt on 2 Start the engine 3 Press the foot brake pedal down firmly 4 Move the gear selector to position D or R and depress the accelerator gt The parking brake releases and the combined instrument panel symbol goes out For safety reasons the parking brake is only released automatically if the engine is run ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt The parking brake is released immediately on cars with automatic gearbox when the accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear selector is in position D or R Heavy load uphill A heavy load such as a trailer can cause the car to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline Avoid this by depressing the control while driv ing off Release the control when the engine achieves traction 03 Your driving environment ED 03 D 03 Your driving environment 03 Parking brake Replacing the brake linings parking brake an authorised Volvo workshop The rear brake linings must be replaced at a is recommended workshop due to the design of the electric Symbols and messages in the display P Message Read the message on the information display Ron A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen Read the message on the information display Park brake not fully A fault is preventing the parking brake fro
302. luminium rims Polishing and waxing Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old However the car can be waxed during this time Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq uid or solid wax Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully Many preparations con tain both polish and wax IMPORTANT Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used Other treatment such as preserving sealing protection lustre sealing or similar could damage the paint work Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo war ranty Water repellent coating ey Never use products such as car wax degreaser or similar on glass surfa ces as this could ruin their water repellent properties Take care when cleaning so as not to damage the glass surface To avoid damaging glass surfaces when removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers There is natural wear of the water repellent coating Treatment with a special finishing agent avail able from Volvo dealers is recommended in order to maintain
303. m 05 gt gt 211 05 Infotainment system RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system Day Night mode RSE AUX menu Display off Display off AUX menu Reset Bluetooth settings Reset settings for disc oa ho RSE TV menu ay Night mode RSE DVD Video menu ia mene Disc menu Display off Select country DVD disc menu Reset AUX settings Autostore Subtitles RSE A V AUX menu Scan Audio tracks A V AUX menu Day Night mode Advanced settings AN AUX input volume Display off Day Night mode Day Night mode Reset TV settings Display off Display off 05 Reset settings for disc Reset AUX settings RSE USB menu RSE iPod menu USB menu Pod menu Random Random Repeat folder Day Night mode Divx VOD code Display off Select USB device Reset iPod settings Day Night mode RSE Bluetooth menu Display off Bluetooth menu Reset USB settings Random Day Night mode 278 Option accessory for more information see Introduction To navigate in the menus The infotainment system s functions are con trolled via the system s menus Each source in the infotainment system e g RADIO MEDIA has its own separate menus In order to access the menus and activate a function a source must first have been selected e g RADIO FM1 Then press OK MENU for access into the menu for the selected source The menu options are selected by means of the buttons in the centre console or via the steering wheel keypad The functions are described under their respective
304. m Accelerator pedal PTC ele ment air preheater Dim ming interior rearview mir ror Seat heating rear 1s 15 10 20 18 10 ES Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 355 08 Maintenance and service COC PY E e 22 Brake light 5 PE Sunroof 20 2 Immobiliser 5 l Option accessory for more information see Introduction Cargo area G042345 The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left hand side a NC E GH Power operated tailgate Electric parking brake left 30 O Z L Electric parking brake right 30 Trailer socket 1 40 6 Rear window defroster 30 O o Trailer socket 2 1 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Maintenance and service Q 08 357 08 Maintenance and service Engine compartment cold zone Start Stop G044748 Location of fuses for the Start Stop function e Fuses A1 and A are of the MEGA Fuse Positions opa o mustonyperepacedbyaworc EE shop Main fuse for central electronic 175 e Fuses 1 11 are of the Midi Fuse type and O Main fuse for central electrical 175 module CEM with fuse box B must only be replaced by a workshop unit in the engine compartment under the glovebox central Nini electrical unit in passenger O Fuse He is of me Mini Fuse type Bo A For mo
305. m being released Try to apply and release the brake released If the fault persists after a few attempts Visit a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended NOTE A warning signal sounds if you pull away with this error message 03 Your driving environment ae Parking brake Parking brake not applied A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied Try to release and apply the brake If the fault persists after a few attempts Visit a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed 03 with the door open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged Parking brake Service A fault has arisen Try to apply and release the brake required If the fault persists after a few attempts Visit a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended e lf the car has to be parked before the fault has been rectified then the wheels must be turned as if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged manual gearbox or the gear selector must be in position P automatic gearbox Q 03 Your driving environment 03 140 General HomeLink is a programmable remote control which can control up to three different devices e g garage door alarm system outdoor light ing and indoor lighting etc and in doing so replace their remote controls HomeLi
306. mation display s symbol reminds which side of the car the fuel filler cap is located e Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until a Click confirms that it is closed Opening the fuel filler flap manually o 52 o y A o O The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when electric opening from the passenger compartment is not possible 1 Open remove the side hatch in the cargo area same side as fuel filler flap and locate the green cord with handle 2 Pull the cord gently straight back until the fuel filler flap folds out with a click IMPORTANT Pull the wire gently minimal force is required to disengage the hatch lock Opening closing the fuel cap AP tt gS D VOLVO 31301658 A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in the event of high outside temperatures Open the cap slowly e After refuelling refit the cap and turn it until one or more clicking sounds are heard 06 Filling up with fuel e Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out ORC Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather 06 During your journey 06 General information on fuel Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo must not be used as engine power and fuel consumption is negatively affected Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get ting fuel splashes in the eyes In the event of fuel in the eyes remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes i
307. may be used as the grounding point See the section Start assistance fora description of how the cable clamps must be attached If the battery has become so discharged that everything is black and in principle the car does not have all the normal electri cal functions and the engine is subsequently started using an external battery or battery charger then the Start Stop function will be activated It will then be possible for the engine to be auto stopped but in the event of an auto stop the Start Stop function may fail to auto start the engine due to inade quate capacity in the battery The battery must first be charged in order to ensure a successful auto start after an auto stop At an outside temperature of 15 C the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour At a lower outside temperature a charging time of 3 4 hours is recom mended The recommendation is that the battery is charged using an external battery charger If this is not possible then the recommen dation is to temporarily deactivate the Start Stop function until the battery has been adequately recharged For more information about recharging the battery see the section Battery in the chapter Maintenance and service 08 Maintenance and service General Location fuse boxes All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to pro tect the car s electrical system from damage by short circui
308. mbol MY When playback of a file is complete the play back of the other files of the same type in that particular folder continues Change of folder takes place automatically when all the files in the current folder have been played back The system automatically detects and changes setting when a device containing only audio files or only video files is connected to the USB port and then it plays back these files How ever the system does not change setting if a device containing a mixture of audio and video files is connected to the USB port but instead 3 Only applies to USB and iPod the player continues to play back the previous file type Fast forward reverse See page 244 Scan See page 245 Random See page 245 Search function The keypad on the control panel in the centre console can be used to find a filename in the current folder The search function is accessed either by turn ing TUNE to access the folder structure or by pressing one of the letter keys As a letter or character in a search string is entered you get closer to your search target Start playback of a file by pressing OK MENU Repeat folder See page 245 4 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 5 it Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place 6 Only applies to USB Option accessory for more information see Introduction Audio sources USB memory To facilitate the us
309. me interval Increase decrease Activate and adjust the speed Selected speed in brackets Standby mode Time interval On during adjustment Time interval On after adjustment 4 Cars without Speed limiter A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market Activating and setting the speed Switch on cruise control with one press on the steering wheel button sf the symbol is illuminated in the display The brackets 6 at mean that cruise control is set in standby mode The cruise control is then activated with or after which the current speed is stored in the memory the display text changes to show the selected speed e g 100 without brackets When the symbol A changes EGEJ to i the radar sensor has Ti IFA detected a vehicle al 00E Only when the symbol with car is illuminated is the distance to the vehicle in front regulated by the cruise control Changing the speed In active mode the speed is adjusted 5 km h with each press on f or In active mode the button D has the same function as but results in a lower increase in speed The last press is stored in the memory g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 181 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 182 Adaptive crui
310. ment If there is no series of illustrations for step by step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers Position lists 1 Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different com ponents are pointed out The number recurs in the position list featured in con nection with the illustration that describes the item Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner s manual Example Introduction Important information e Coolant e Engine oil To be continued gt gt This symbol is located furthest down to the right when a section continues on the following page Recording data Your vehicle contains a number of computers whose function is to continuously check and monitor the vehicle s operation and function ality Some of the computers can record infor mation during normal driving if they detect an error In addition information is recorded in the event of a crash or incident Parts of the recor ded information are required so that techni cians can diagnose and rectify faults in the vehicle during servicing and maintenance and so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and other regulations In addition to this the infor mation is used for research purposes by Volvo in order to continually develop quality and safety as the information can contribute to a better understanding of the factors that cause accidents and
311. mfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 153 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Menu source MY CAR Voice training User 1 User 2 With Voice training the voice recognition system is taught to recognise the driver s voice and pronunciation A number of phra ses are presented on the screen for the driver to read aloud When 04 the system has learnt how the driver talks the presentation of the phrases stops Following which e g User 1 can be selected in Voice user setting in order that the system shall listen to the right user Voice output volume e A volume control appears on the screen at which point proceed as follows 1 Adjust the volume with the thumbwheel 2 Test listen using OK 3 Use EXIT to store the setting and the menu is switched off Voice POI list Edit list The number of facilities is exten sive and varies depending on market Maximum 30 favourite facilities can be stored in this list Menu option Voice POI list is only shown if Volvo s navigation system RTI is installed For more information on Facilities and Voice recognition see the Navi gation system s owner s manual Audio settings Climate settings p 226 Automatic blower adjust p 156 Normal High Low Recirculation timer On Off Automatic rear defroster On Off Interior air quality system On Off Reset climate settings All menus in Climate settings are given original factory settings Favou
312. mp tion seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer See further information and more advice on pages 14 and 286 See page 290 for general information on fuel O1 10 00 11 09 Specifications Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure 09 Approved dimensions shows all approved combinations of wheel drive AWD and the type of transmission is In certain countries not all approved dimen rims and tyres and the lowest permitted load needed to read the table For information with sions are indicated by the registration docu index LI and speed rating SS Information on respect to these details see page 368 ment or other documents The table below engine front wheel drive FWD or all wheel Y Approved 225 50R17 205 60R16 225 55R16 7Jx17x50 245 45R17 245 40R18 7Jx16x50 73x16x50 7 5Jx17x55 8Jx17x55 8Jx18x55 T4 B4164T FWD man aut V oy Wa J s JS mar B4164T2 FWD man aut 92 Y J J J wf 2 51 B5254T10 FWD man aut 94 Y Y J of Y man 92 ye wf A cf A J T5 B4204T7 FWD aut 92 V J Y J if Y 3 2 B6324S5 FWD aut 94 V Y Y J Y B6324S5 AWD aut 95 V Y Y A J T6 B6304T4 AWD aut 95 W S A J df DRIVe D4162T FWD man 92 H JS Y J aif Y man 94 V Y J J Y Y D3 D5204T3 FWD aut 94 H A J ve J D5 D5244T11 FWD man 94 V Y Y S Y gt gt O1 10 OO 11 09 Specifications 09 Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure FWD AWD 205 60R16 225 55R16 225 50R17 73x17x50 245 45R17 245 40R18 D5
313. n sole An audio source connected to the USB input can then be handled with the car s audio controls A device connected via the AUX input cannot be controlled via the car There is a recess in the right hand rear edge of the tunnel console where cables can be routed so that the hatch can be closed without cables being pinched If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console Fora description of the buttons in the steering wheel see page 230 For a description of the remote control see page 256 An iPod or MP3 player with rechargeable bat teries is recharged when the ignition is on or the engine is running if the device is plugged into the USB connection To connect the audio source 1 Repeatedly press on MEDIA to reach the desired audio source USB iPod or AUX release and wait a second or press OK MENU gt If USB is selected then Connect USB is shown in the TV screen 2 Connect your audio source to one of the connections in the centre console s stor age compartment see previous illustra tion 1 Applies to High Performance High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 2 Only applies to the media source connected via the USB connection The text Reading USB is shown in the TV screen when the system is loading the storage media s file structure Depending on the file structure
314. n then the radio remains set in the function for manual tuning the next time you switch on the radio To change back to the function for Station list turn TUNE one step to show the complete list of stations and press the button INFO Note that if you press neg when the sta tion list is not shown then INFO is activated For more information on this function see page 233 Preset 10 presets can be stored per wavelength AM FM1 etc The stored presets are selected using the pre set buttons 1 Tune into a station see Tuning page 236 2 Hold in one of the preset buttons for a few seconds the sound disappears during this 05 Infotainment system 05 gt gt CS 05 Infotainment system time and returns when the station is stored The preset button can now be used A list of pre selected channels can be shown in the TV screen The function is activated deactivated in FM AM mode under FM menu gt Show presets or AM menu Show presets Scan wavelength The function automatically searches the cur rent wavelength for strong stations When a station is found it is played for approx 8 sec onds before scanning is resumed When a sta tion is playing back it can be saved as a preset in the usual way see the section Pre 05 set above To start scanning go in FM AM mode to FM menu Scan or AM menu Scan OKT Scanning stops if a station is saved RDS functions RDS Radi
315. n programme content artists etc This informa tion is shown on the TV screen The function is deactivated activated in DAB mode under DAB menu Show radio text 05 gt gt 05 Infotainment system 05 Only one of the functions Show radio text and Show presets can be acti vated at a time If one of them is activated when the other is already activated then the previously activated function is deactivated automatically Both functions can be deac tivated Advanced settings DAB to DAB link It is possible to exit a channel with poor or no reception to the same channel in another chan nel group with better reception There may be a certain delay when changing channel group There may be a period of silence between the current channel no longer being available to the new channel becoming available The function can be activated deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings DAB linking Wavelength DAB can be transmitted on two wavelengths e Band lil covers areas outside big cities e Band mainly in large cities By selecting for example Band II on its own channel programming takes place more 5 Not all areas countries use both wavelengths quickly than if both Band II and LBand have been selected It is not certain that all channel groups will be found Wavelength selection does not affect the stored memories Wavelengths can be deactivated activated in DAB mode under DAB m
316. n by press ing TEL in the centre console If there is a phone connected disconnect the con nected phone 2 Make the car detectable visible via Bluetooth press OK MENU and activate the Phone settings gt Discoverable option 3 Search with the mobile phone s Bluetooth function see the mobile phone manual 4 Select My Volvo Car in the list of units detected in your mobile phone 5 Enter an optional PIN code on your mobile phone via the mobile phone s keypad when prompted to enter the PIN code Then key in the same PIN code via the car s keypad 6 Select to connect to My Volvo Car from the mobile phone The mobile phone is paired registered and connects automatically to the audio system For more information about how mobile phones are paired see page 261 When the connection is established the mobile phone s Bluetooth name is shown in the TV 8 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 gt gt 259 05 Infotainment system 05 260 Bluetooth handsfree screen Now the mobile phone can be con trolled from the audio system To call 1 Make sure that the symbol appears at the top of the TV screen and that the handsfree function is in phone mode 2 Dial either the desired number or speed dial number see page 265 Or in normal view turn TUNE to the right to access the phone book and to the left for the call reg ister for all calls For information on the
317. n door panel P Storage pocket on front edge of front seat cushions E3 Ticket clip Y Glovebox Storage compartment Jacket holder 04 4 Storage compartment cup holder G043878 Cup holder in armrest rear seat Storage pocket Storage compartment e g for CDs and The owner s manual and maps can be kept USB AUX input under the armrest here for example There are also holders for Jacket holder Includes cup holder for driver and passen pens on the inside of the lid The glovebox can The jacket holder is only designed for light ger If ashtray and cigarette lighter are be locked with the key blade see page 51 clothing specified then there is a cigarette lighter in TA the 12 V socket for the front seat see Vy mats ARNING page 221 and a detachable ashtray in the AAA Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay Keep loose objects such as mobile phones cup holder mats cameras remote controls for accessories Ci tte liaht d ashtrav etc in the glove compartment or other com garante 19 STA ARAY n partments Otherwise they may injure peo The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached AN WARNINC ple in the car in the event of sudden braking by lifting the tray straight up Before setting off check that the inlaid mat or a collision Activate the lighter by pushing in the button in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid getting The button pops out when the lighte
318. n driv ing with a trailer see page 301 e Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates e If the temperature in the engine s cooling system is too high the instrument panel s warning symbol is illuminated and there is a text message displayed there High engine temp Stop safely stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes to cool down e If the text message High engine temp Stop engine or Coolant level low Stop engine is shown then the engine must be switched off after stopping the car e Inthe event of overheating in the gearbox a built in protection function is activated which amongst other things illuminates the instrument panel s warning symbol and there is a text message displayed there Transmission hot Reduce speed or Transmission hot Stop safely follow the recommendation given and lower the speed and stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for a few minutes to allow the gearbox to cool down e If the car overheats the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily e Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive It is normal for the engine s cooling fan to operate for a while after the engine has been switched off Open tailgate WARNING Do not drive with the tailgate open Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area Do not ove
319. n nmm 64 Desdloc Sonia 63 DEMOS asias 163 o A an panmensnesieiducaieaticaaaseieent 291 Diesel particle filter o cooncconccon 292 Dipstick electron Euisinciccoranaricica s 331 Direction indicato S cities 93 Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 123 Display WOMAUIAG simios 90 Distance Wa Mid usina 189 Dolby Surround Pro Logic l 226 Door OVS oi cx teantetvectecoessentncthaceeuenenasce 105 Driver Alert Control ccccccsssceeeeseeeeenees 203 Driver Alert SYSt M ccccccssceeesseeeeeeneees 203 Big po e AP 286 cooling SM ici 286 with the tailgate Open oocccconnim 287 with talon 301 Driving iN Walter uscnorossiadri it 286 Driving with a trailer OWDAl O Bd sedoso notado 372 towing CAD AC ICY acacia 372 DSTC see also Stability control system 173 DAVA reacia 243 E ECC electronic climate control 159 Economical VINO cusssicssdecnsstednetsncsneadenes 286 EGO PESTE isc iiviicienessinunatnecreasivaieirncandensinans 319 Eco Start Stop DRIV eG icccinconcisiicinisa cian 126 Electrical SOCK CU iinsesncesetcnsicenssansecawidndianeis 221 cargo ACA PA o ence nue 297 A A 221 Electric parking brake coonccccconncccomonoc 136 low battery vOltaQ oooccccoccconcccncccnno 136 releasing automatically 137 releasing manually 137 Emergency equipment warning triANGIE ccceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeees 320 Emergen
320. n plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention Never swallow fuel Fuels such as petrol bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swal lowed Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited Switch off the fuel driven heater before star ting to refuel Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling The ring signal could cause spark build up and ignite petrol fumes leading to fire and injury IMPORTANT Mixing different types of fuel or the use of fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo s guarantees and any associated service agreement This applies to all engines NOTE It does not apply to cars with engines that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel E85 Extreme weather conditions driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car s performance Catalytic converters The purpose of the catalytic converters is to purify exhaust gases They are located close to the engine so that operating temperature is reached quickly The catalytic converters consist of a monolith ceramic or metal with channels The channel walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum rho dium palladium These metals act as catalysts i e they participate in and accelerate a chem ical reaction without be
321. nc tion is a quick way to choose or change the source e g RADIO MEDIA etc directly from the steering wheel keypad without taking your hands off the steering wheel The function is also available from the control panel buttons in the centre console 05 2 Does not apply to DAB e Select source 1 by turning the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad press the thumbwheel to confirm the selection e Turn the thumbwheel to one of the options 2 on the TV screen e g FM 1 press the thumbwheel to confirm the selection This then leads to the desired source e g RADIO FM1 A long press on EXIT leads back NAV Volvo s navigation system RTI RADIO Radio MEDIA Media TEL Bluetooth handsfree MY CAR Car settings CAM Park Assist Camera Steering wheel keypad The keypad is available in three different ver sions depending on the options and the equip ment level of the car Keypad without thumbwheel A h or scan for the next available radio sta tion Long presses are used to fast for ward and rewind disc tracks 2 Volume 230 9 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system Quick start Keypad with thumbwheel tion OK in the menu system and accepts press leads to the highest menu level phone calls parent view see page 230 MUTE switches off the sound Thumbwheel turn up down to scroll up and down in the men
322. nce for the highest heat level level one orange lamp illuminates in the TV three lamps illuminate Heated seats screen Press the button twice for a lower heat level Front seats Press the button four times to switch off the two lamps illuminate heat no lamps illuminate Press the button three times for the lowest heat N WARNING level one lamp illuminates H AM Press the button four times to switch off the The heated seat should not be used by peo heat no lamps illuminate ye ple who find it difficult to perceive tempera 100 6 10 hna ture increase because of sensory loss or for Ventilated front seats any reason have difficulty in managing to 04 use the control of the heated seat Other wise burn injuries may arise Rear seat Current heat level is shown in the centre console TV screen One press on the button gives the highest heat level three orange lamps illuminate in the z JE centre console TV screen see 3 F 3 figure above 3 Current comfort level is shown in the centre con Press the button twice for a sole TV screen lower heat level two orange lamps illuminate in the TV screen 3 Not included if 2 stage booster cushion is selected gt gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 161 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 162 Climate control Ventilated front seats can only be specified when ECC is installed in the car T
323. nction Disc tracks audio files can be changed by pressing e fA gt gt on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad Repeat folder This function makes it possible to play files in a folder over and over again When the last file 4 Does not apply to DVD video discs 5 Only applies to audio video files on burned discs or USB has been played out playback of the first file starts again 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Repeat folder 3 Press OK MENU to activate deactivate the function Playback of DVD video discs Playback When playing back a DVD video disc a disc menu may appear on the display screen The disc menu gives access to additional functions and settings such as selecting subtitles lan guage and scene selection A video film is only shown when the car is stationary When the car is moving at a speed of over about 8 km h no picture is shown and No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen although the audio is heard during this time The picture is shown again as soon as the car s speed falls below about 6 km h 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia Navigation in the DVD video disc s menu G044042 Navigation in the DVD video disc s menu is performed using the number keys in the centre console as illustrated above Changing chapter or title Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and navigate through them if the f
324. nd T5 models with Powershift transmission should not be towed as the trans mission is dependent on the engine running in order to receive sufficient lubrication If towing still has to take place the route must be as short as possible and then with very low speed In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift transmis sion this can be verified by checking the des ignation on the decal number 5 under the bonnet see page 368 The designation MPS6 means that there is Powershift trans mission otherwise it is Geartronic automatic transmission IMPORTANT Avoid towing e However the car can be towed for a short distance at low speed to move it from a dangerous position not further than 10 km and not faster than 10 km h Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling for ward e Inthe event of moving a longer distance than 10 km the car must be transported with the drive wheels raised from the road professional recovery is recom mended Prior to towing Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake 06 During your journey 06 gt gt 06 During your journey Towing and recovery Jump starting Do not tow the car to bump start the engine Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged and the engine does not start see page 119 LD IMPORTANT Bump starting the car can damage the cat alytic converter
325. nd spots where obstacles cannot be detected e Be aware of e g people or animals near the car Function y z 1 i i e k Fo ra k A 3 TEMP i 3 a 2 O N i 2 3 A 0 The system is automatically activated when the engine is started the switch s On Off lamp is illuminated If parking assistance is switched off with the button the lamp goes out Park assist syst G044040 Display screen view showing an obstacle left front and right rear The centre console s display screen shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacle Marked sectors show which of the four sen sor s detected an obstacle The closer to the car symbol a selected sector box is the shorter the distance between the car and a detected obstacle The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle in front of or behind the car Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is constant and the active sensor s field nearest the car is filled in If the detected obstacle is within the distance for the constant tone both Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure O 04 209 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 210 Park assist syst behind and in front of the car then the tone sounds alternately from the loudspeakers
326. ndication is made with an up or down arrow in the combined instrument panel s lower dis play Deactivating the Eco Start Stop DRIVe function In certain situations it may Ea advisable to temporarily dis engage the automatic Start Stop function this is carried out with a push of this button Disengaged Start Stop func tion is indicated by the infor mation display s symbol 2 going out and the message Eco DRIVe Off being dis played for about 5 seconds while the button s lamp goes out at the same time The Start Stop function is disengaged until it is reactivated with the button or until the next time the engine is started with the key Limitations The engine does not auto stop Even if the Eco Start Stop DRIVe function is activated the engine does not auto stop if e the driver has opened the seatbelt s buckle e the car has not stopped however the Start Stop function does accept slow roll ing the equivalent to normal walking pace e the capacity of the battery is below the minimum permissible level e the engine does not have normal operating temperature e outside temperature is below O or above 30 C e the environment in the passenger com partment differs from the preset values indicated by the ventilation fan running at a high speed e thecarhas been reversed and reverse gear is disengaged e battery temperature is below 0 C or above 55 C The engine a
327. nes can be fitted with a Eco Start Stop DRIVe function which is acti vated during e g stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights The engine s automatic restart sequence runs so smoothly that it is hardly noticeable that the engine has actually been switched off The experience is that the engine has been running the whole time but with an extremely quiet and low idling speed The Eco Start Stop DRIVe function gives the driver the opportunity for a more active envi ronmentally conscious way of driving the car by means of being able to disengage gear and allowing the engine to auto stop whenever appropriate b Pam a eee l AUTO START Eco Start Stop DRIVe On Off 2 llluminates briefly on activation and for text messages The engine is auto stopped DRIVE The Eco Start Stop DRIVe function is activated automatically when the engine is started with the key The driver is made aware of the function by the instrument panel symbol 2 illuminating briefly and the green lamp 1 for the On Off button illuminat ing After starting with the key and each auto stop the car must first reach 5 km h before the automatic Start Stop function is re acti vated following which certain conditions must also be fulfilled refer to these under the heading The engine does not auto stop All of the car s normal systems such as lighting radio etc work as normal even with an auto stopped engine
328. new test Contact a work shop Alcoguard Service required Alcoguard No sig Transmission failed nal send manually with button 3 or take a new breath test Alcoguard Invalid Test failed take a test new breath test Blowing too short blow for longer Alcoguard Blow longer Blowing too hard blow more gently Alcoguard Blow softer i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 113 D 03 Your driving environment 03 114 Alcoguard Display text Meaning Action Alcoguard Blow Blowing too weak harder blow harder Alcoguard wait Heating not finished Preheating wait for text Alco guard Blow 5 sec onds P Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment G045198 Ignition switch with remote control key extracted inserted and START STOP ENGINE button Do not press in the remote control key incor rectly turned Hold the end with the detach able key blade see page 51 1 Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and press it in to its end position Note that if the car is equipped with an alcolock then a breath test must first be approved before the engine can be started see page 111 2 Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed For cars with automatic gearbox Depress the brake pedal 3 Press the START STOP ENGINE button and then release it For diesel engined car
329. ng 343 Voice control mobile phone 266 e a 342 WINASOS urinarias nireriatiedioia 101 i Voko Sen US sansi 81 CLEANING estes tee tee eet 343 Water and dirt repellent coating 103 replacing rear WINdOW 000ccceeees 343 Water repellent surface cleaning 361 service POSITION cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 342 W e Ea 361 Wipers and WaSNING cccscccsecenseeeeeeees 100 Weights Wireless head phones cccsecesseeeeeeees 271 Warning lamp kerb WEIN ti oecscscessesscisisssvesncerseneensesses 372 adaptive cruise Control ooc 179 Wheels collision warning SySteM ce 197 changing 316 stability and traction control system 172 installation 317 Warning lamps FINI AE il 318 ciieile cas a o saisnidaadercisaneadiatcciiveiatinsiatens 78 SNOW ChaiinS ccccceccsecceceeseeeeceeeeeee 314 alternator Not Charging seer 78 Spare WHEE ccccceesecseeseseeseeseeeeeens 317 fault in brake SySteM ooococconccnoccccncccnnocos 78 Volvo for life VOLVO Volvo Car Corporation TP 13208 English AT 1120 Printed in Sweden Goteborg 2011 Copyright 2000 2011 Volvo Car Corporation
330. nk is supplied built into the left hand sun visor The HomeLink panel consists of three pro grammable buttons and one indicator lamp HomeLink is designed not to work if the car is locked from the outside Save the original remote controls for future programming e g when switching to another car Delete the button programming when the car is to be sold Metallic sun visors should not be used in cars fitted with HomeLink This may have an adverse effect on its function Operation When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote controls Depress the programmed button to activate the garage door alarm system etc The indi cator lamp illuminates for the time that the but ton is kept depressed If the ignition is not activated HomeLink will work for 30 minutes after the driver s door has been opened The original remote controls can of course be used in parallel with HomeLink i rl f A Option accessory for more information see Introduction WARNING If HomeLink is used to operate a garage door or gate ensure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is in motion Do not use the HomeLink remote control for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse The garage door must react immediately when it detects that something is preventing its movement and stop directly and reverse A garage door without
331. nt TV screen it is possible to select the source what shall be displayed or played back for the right and left hand rear TV screens respectively It is possible select the same source for both or different sources for the right and left hand TV screens respectively 1 Press on MEDIA press repeatedly in order to scroll to RSE on the TV screen release and wait a second and the selection is accepted automatically 2 Turn TUNE to select the right left hand or both TV screens and confirm with OK MENU 3 Turn TUNE to select RADIO MEDIA or RSE settings Press OK MENU to con firm 4 Turn TUNE to the desired source e g Disc and confirm with OK MENU The selected source will start automatically if e g a disc is in the media player Cancel and go back with EXIT The remote control can also be used for set tings For more information on the remote con trol see page 256 Parental control for the TV It is possible to set a permitted age limit for the TV so that only programmes for the appropri ate age can be viewed The setting is activated for both TV screens Activate under RSE settings gt TV parental control in accordance with point 2 4 in the section Selection of source in the rear TV screens see page 273 Choose between Age 0 6 Age 7 13 Age 14 18 and No parental control ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system 05 gt gt 273 05
332. ntertainment system Battery replacement in wireless headphones The headphones are powered by two batteries of the AAA model Take along extra batteries for a long journey G044538 Wireless headphones 1 Unscrew the screw and detach the battery cover 2 Remove the used batteries turn the new batteries in accordance with the symbols in the battery compartment and insert them 3 Fit the cover and screw in the screw Environmental care Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries in an environmentally safe manner It is possible to connect external headphones via the headphones socket 3 5 mm on the side of the head restraints see the illustration on page 270 The volume is controlled using the remote control The input allows you to connect other equip ment Always follow the instructions included with the external equipment or from the man ufacturer or reseller when connecting Equip ment connected via the A V AUX input can use the TV screens wireless headphones head phones sockets and the car s speakers The customer is responsible that equipment connected to the A V AUX input or head phones socket does not cause interference in the vehicle s RSE system Option accessory for more information see Introduction Connection of A V AUX input The A V AUX input is located under the armrest in the tunnel console 1 Connect the video cable to the yellow socket 2 Connect the left
333. nting Strap retention ints eo pana One loop of the cargo retaining strap around In the floor of the cargo area there are two rails one of the cargo retaining hooks secures the with movable cargo retaining hooks for secur strap and prevents it from sliding around the ing items in the cargo area using cargo retain hook ing straps On both sides of the cargo area there are sev eral mounting points designed for securing O IMPORTANT loads They are located in the floor and in the top edge of both sides of the cargo area ORC 06 A suitable width for a cargo retaining strap Do not use other adjustable straps as these is approx 25 mm could pull and break the mounting points Hard sharp and or heavy objects that are Dirt and objects collecting down in the rails loose or protrude could cause injury during could hinder the repositioning locking raising neay Orang and removal of the cargo retaining hooks Always secure large and heavy objects with Make it a habit to clean the tracks with a vac a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps uum cleaner and a lightly moistened soft cloth gt gt 06 During your journey 06 Moving a cargo retaining hook G017742 Fold the cargo retaining hook down in the direction to which its opening points p Press the hook down lightly and at the same time push it to the required position E Fold the hook up it is self locking ORC There must be at least 50 cm between the c
334. ntion to the sides and front of the car when manoeuvring during reversing Boundary lines G041222 The system s lines q Boundary line 30 cm zone backwards from the car Boundary line free reversing zone Wheel tracks The unbroken line 1 frames in a zone that is within about 30 cm from the bumper The dashed line 2 frames in a zone up to about 1 5 m back from the bumper It is also the limit of the car s most protruding parts such as door mirrors and corners also during turning The wide wheel tracks 3 between the side lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can extend about 3 2 m back from the bumper if no obstacle is in the way 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 dd 213 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 214 Park assist camera Cars with reversing sensors Coloured areas x 4 one per sensor show dis tance If the car is also equipped with parking assis tance sensors see page 209 the distance indi cation will be more precise and the coloured areas show which of the 4 sensors is are reg istering an obstacle The colour of the areas changes with decreas ing distance to the obstacle from yellow to orange to red Colour paint Distance metres Yellow 1 5 Orange 0 3 1 5 Red 0 0 3 Settings Press OK MENU when a camera view is shown Make the settings as desired
335. ntrol panel driver s door 20 Power seat driver s side 20 6606080 Power seat passenger side 20 602890900 08 Control panel front passen 20 ger door Sie Option accessory for more information see Introduction CC Y 00 000 MOE amp amp Folding head restraint Infotainment control module Audio control module Digital radio TV Audio Telematics Bluetooth Rear Seat Entertainment RSE Sun roof Interior lighting roof Climate sensor 12 V socket tunnel console Seat heating rear right Seat heating rear left Seat heating passenger side Seat heating driver s side 5 10 iS ES 15 15 JiS 13 15 COCA S Parking assistance Park ing camera Towbar control module AWD control module 10 Active chassis Four C 10 Boxe Funcion LA Rear window wiper 15 Q Interior lighting Driver s KS door control panel power windows Power seats front Remote controlled garage door opener Information display DIM 5 Adaptive cruise control 10 ACC collision warning sys tem Interior lighting Rain sensor 7 5 Steering wheel module 75 te Da 0060 8G8e890 886 0 Central locking system fuel filler flap Rear window washer Windscreen washers Unlocking tailgate Fuel pump Climate panel Steering lock Siren alarm Data link con nector OBDII Airbags Collision warning syste
336. o Data System links FM transmitters into a network An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions e Automatically switches to a stronger trans mitter if reception in the area is poor e Searches for programme type such as traffic information or news e Receives text information on current radio programme OLA Some radio stations do not use RDS or only some if its functionality If a required programme type is located the radio can switch stations interrupting the audio source currently in use For example if the CD player is in use it is paused The interrupting transmission is played at a preset volume see page 240 The radio returns to the previous audio source and volume when the set pro gramme type is no longer broadcast The programme functions alarm ALARM traffic information TP news NEWS and pro gramme types PTY interrupt one another in order of priority where alarm has the highest priority and programme types has the lowest For additional settings of programming inter ruptions EON Distant and EON Local see the section Enhanced Other Networks EON below Press EXIT to return to the inter 2 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia rupted audio source press the OK MENU to clear the message Alarm This function is used to warn of serious acci dents and catastrophes The alarm cannot be temporarily
337. o be braked more heavily than cruise control capacity and the driver does not brake then the cruise control uses the collision warning system s warning lamp and warning sound see page 197 to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required The warning lamp may be difficult to notice in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are being worn Cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor Consequently there may be no warning or it may be sub ject to a delay Do not wait for a warning but brake when it is necessary Steep roads and or heavy load Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces The cruise control may have dif ficultly in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep roads with a heavy load or with a trailer in which case be extra attentive and ready to slow down Lx Steering wheel keypad and display Cruise control On Off Standby mode ceases and stored speed resumes each extra press gives 1 km h Standby mode Time interval Increase decrease Activate and adjust the speed each press gives 5 km h Selected speed in brackets Standby mode Time interval On during adjustment Time interval On after adjustment 3 Cars with Speed limiter Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed Cruise control On Off or Standby mode Ti
338. o g J The seatbelt should always be worn during pregnancy But it is then crucial that it be worn in the correct way The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen It must never be allowed to ride upward Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible In addition check that there are no twists in the seatbelt Asthe pregnancy progresses pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control ofthe vehicle as they drive which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel The aim should be to posi tion the seat with as large a distance as possi ble between abdomen and steering wheel Seatbelt reminder j Fa o A N N o 0 Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual reminder The audio reminder is speed dependent and in some cases time depend ent The visual reminder is located in the roof console and the combined instrument panel Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions e Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat A message appears in the info
339. o takes place in order to pro vide maximum dehumidification in the passen ger compartment Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 163 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate control e the air conditioning is automatically engaged e recirculation and the air quality system are automatically disengaged NOTE The noise level increases as the fan is oper ating at max When the defroster is switched off the climate 04 control returns to the previous settings Recirculation Recirculation When recirculation is engaged the orange lamp in the button illuminates The function is selected to shut out bad air exhaust gases etc from the passenger com partment The air in the pas senger compartment is recirculated i e no outside air is taken into the car when this func tion is activated IMPORTANT If the air in the car recirculates for too long there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows Timer With the timer function activated the system will exit manually activated recirculation mode according to a time that depends on the out side temperature This reduces the risk of ice misting and bad air Activate deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Climate settings gt Recirculation timer For a description of the menu system see page 149 When max d
340. objects on the floor behind th driver s seat passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back rest Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system S 01 Safety AA WARNING If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces such as due to a rear end collision the WHIPS system must be checked Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop Part of the WHIPS system s protective Capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys are FE tem checked even after a minor rear end Do not place objects on the rear seat that may collision prevent the WHIPS system from functioning WARNING If a rear seat backrest is folded down the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest 01 Safety 9 When the systems deploy 01 When the systems deploy Volvo workshop Do not drive with WARNING yacen ve wi i ystem riggere e Volvo recommends that you engage an Never drive with deployed airbags They can make steering difficult Other safety Seatbelt tensioner In a frontal collision authorised Volvo workshop to handle the systems may also be damaged The smoke front seat and or side impact replacement of components in the car s and
341. of oil for both filling and oil change otherwise you will risk affecting service life starting characteristics fuel consumption and environmental impact Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used Volvo recommends that oil changes are car ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop Engine oil grade Engine code 2o 32 T6 D3 D5 D5 T5 DRIVe T4P T4F A Certain markets B Manual gearbox C Automatic gearbox B5254T10 B6324S5 B6304T4 D5204T3 D5244T118 D5244T15 B4204T7 D4162T B4164T B4164T2 D DRIVe for certain markets Recommended oil grade Oil grade ACEA A5 B5 Viscosity SAE OW 30 Oil grade ACEA A5 B5 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 When driving under adverse conditions use ACEA A5 B5 SAE OW 30 Certified and factory filled oil Oil grade WSS M2C925 A options for service Oil grade ACEA A5 B5 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 09 Specifications Volume incl oil filter litres approx 5 5 approx 6 8 approx 6 8 approx 5 9 approx 5 9 approx 5 9 approx 5 4 approx 3 8 approx 4 1 approx 4 1 O1 10 OO 11 gt gt 01 10 OO 111 09 09 Specifications Engine code Recommended oil grade Volume incl oil filter litres 3 2 AWD B6324S5 Oil grade ACEA A5 B5 approx 6 8 T6 AWD B6304T4 Viscosity SAE OW 30 approx 6 8 D3 DRIVe D5204T3 approx 5 9 D3 AWD D5244117 approx 5 9 D5 AWD
342. of the car s load up to the maximum permissible weight When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly which is normal Trailer weights For information on Volvo s permitted trailer weights see page 372 The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow WARNING Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights Otherwise the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking Manual gearbox Overheating When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating e Do not run the engine at higher revolutions than 4500 rpm diesel engines 3500 rpm otherwise the oil temperature may become too high 8 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 During your journey 06 db 301 06 During your journey 06 Driving with a trailer Diesel engine 5 cyl e Inthe event of a risk of overheating the optimal speed for the engine is 2300 3000 rem for optimal circulation of the coolant Automatic gearbox Overheating When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating e Anautomatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine speed e Inthe even
343. ol control is set in standby mode The driver must then re activate the cruise control in one of the following ways e Press the steering wheel button el or e Press the accelerator pedal and accelerate up to at least about 4 km h normal walking pace The cruise control will then resume following the vehicle in front The cruise control can hold the car station ary for a maximum of 2 minutes then the parking brake is applied and the cruise con trol is disengaged e The driver has to release the parking brake before the cruise control can be reactivated Change of target G044031 If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front When the cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km h and changes target from a moving to a stationary vehicle the cruise control will slow down for the stationary vehicle WARNING When the cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds in excess of 30 km h and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle the cruise control will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead select the stored speed e The driver must intervene him herself and brake a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Automatic standby mode with change of target Cruise control is disengaged and set in standby mode e when the speed is below 15 km h and cruise control is
344. on along with main dipped beam or position parking lamps Press the button for on off The light in the but ton illuminates when the fog lamps are on NOTE Regulations for using front fog lamps vary between different countries G021146 Button for rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp and can only be switched on in combination with main dipped beam or the front fog lamps Press the button for On Off The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the combined instrument panel and the light in the button illu minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when the engine is switched off OLE Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary between different countries 045244 AI 3 Button for hazard warning flashers Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers Both direction indicator symbols in the combined instrument panel flash when the hazard warning flashers are in use The hazard warning flashers are activated automatically when the car brakes so suddenly that the emergency brake lights are activated and speed is below 30 km h They remain on when the car has stopped and are deactivated automatically when the car is driven off again or the button is depressed For more informa tion on Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers see page 132 G021148 Direction indicators fl
345. onics Inc Made in Japan 124 34 Volvo Car Korea BHASataelot MBA SUT Fe 2 5 726 173 2218345 SENS LAME 1588 1777 http www volvocars com kr NSA TOA E xg Page MEA 75480 Wooe AHN HAE ula E gA Lc O1 10 00 11 Type approval 09 09 Specifications EA Singa pore Complies with IDA Standards DA100925 X The Uni ted Arab Emirates TRA REGISTERED No 0020557 09 DEALER No 0014517 08 Jordan The product that contains the Bluetooth module is approved with the following certification number BT module certification number TRC LPD 2010 4 BT module name IAM2 1BT PWB EU 010 11 09 Type approval CAI South Africa ae q TA 2010 187 IC A S A Uruguay This product contains URSEC approved transmitter module name and model name IAM2 1 BT PWB EU BVJG905A BVVE905A BVLV905A 09 Specifications PORFA ike E dd A A a mii A a SE eS SE ll 4 a e de oe A ld TA ee a at ees sere E hee A A eee eee eee is L MAMA a E O ee ee E ee oie aaa Da G044570 09 Specifications Type approval 09 CAI Jamaica Approved for use in Jamaica SMA El IAM2 1 Thailand This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement Nigeria Connection and use of this communications equipment is permitted by the Nigerian Communicatios Commission Mexico Warning Este equipo opera a titulo secundario consecuentemente debe ac
346. ont section of the button to raise the window to its end position and hold it there for one second Release the button briefly Raise the front section of the button again for one second Resetting must be carried out to ensure that pinch protection works Windows rearview and door mirrors Door mirrors Door mirror controls Adjusting 1 Press the L button for the left hand door mirror or the R button for the right hand door mirror The light in the button illumi nates 2 Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre 3 Press the L or R button again The light should no longer be illuminated 1 Only in combination with power seat with memory see page 85 A A Mi Sa The mirrors are the wide angle type for opti mum surveillance Objects may appear fur ther away than they actually are The mirror on the driver s side is the wide angle type to provide optimal vision Objects may appear further away than they actually are Retractable power door mirrors The mirrors can be retracted for parking driving in narrow spaces l Press the buttons L and R simultaneously the remote control key must be at least in key position I N Release them after approximately 1 second The mirrors auto matically stop in the fully retracted posi tion Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended posi tion
347. ontrolled from the cen tre console and the steering wheel keypad For general information on menu navigation and menu structures see page 279 1 Applies to High Performance High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction Phone functions controls overview 6045298 Centre console control panel Number and letter buttons 2 TEL Activate Disconnect TUNE Turn in normal view to the right to access the phone book and to the left for the call register for all calls also used for navigation among the options on the TV screen O Accept incoming calls confirm your selec tion or go to the Phone menu by pressing OK MENU O EXIT Cancels rejects phone calls deletes input characters leads up in the menu sys tem and cancels the current function Bluetooth handsfree If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console Fora description of the buttons in the steering wheel see page 230 For a description of the remote control see page 256 Remember Activate deactivate A short press on TEL activates the handsfree function The symbol indicates that the handsfree function is active Connect mobile phone A mobile phone is connected in different ways depending on whether or not it has been con nected previousl
348. oreign objects into a buckle The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not func tion as intended in the event of a collision There is a risk of serous injury EE Airbags G044584 The warning symbol in the combined instru ment panel illuminates when the remote con trol key is in key position Il or Ill The symbol clears after approx 6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault free If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv ing it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality The symbol indi cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys tem SIPS the IC system or some other fault in the system Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately As well as the warning symbol a message may appear on the information display in appropri ate cases If the warning symbol malfunctions the warning triangle illuminates and SRS Airbag Service required or SRS Airbag Service urgent appears in the display Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately G018665 Airbag system left hand drive car o e 0 Airbag system right hand drive car The system consists of airbags and sensors A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag s are inflated with hot gas To cushion the impact the airbag deflates when compressed When this occurs smoke esc
349. ormation button and in different locations as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has trav elled around on the PCC contact a work shop an authorised Volvo workshop is rec ommended Indicator lamps display information in accord ance with the following illustration G043954 1 Green continuous light the car is locked 2 Yellow continuous light the car is unlocked Red continuous light the alarm has been triggered since the car was locked O Red light flashing alternately in both indi cator lamps The alarm was triggered less than 5 minutes ago Range PCC The PCC s range for locking unlocking and tailgate is about 20 m from the car for other functions up to about 100 m If the car does not verify a button being pressed move closer and try again The information button functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio waves buildings topographical conditions etc Out of PCC range If the PCC is too far away from the car for the information to be read then the status the car was last left in is shown without the light trav elling around on the PCC If several PCCs are used for the car then it is only the PCC last used for locking unlocking that shows correct status Remote control key key blade 5 If no indicator lamps illuminate when the information button is used within range then this may be because the last commu nication between the PCC and the car was
350. ors and the inflatable curtain is inflated The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the WARNIN driver and passengers from striking their heads S on the inside of the car during a collision The T curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts Always use a seatbelt ME The whiplash protection system WHIPS con sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe Cially designed head restraints in the front seats The system is actuated by a rear end collision where the angle and speed of the col lision and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts Always use a seatbelt Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed the front seat backrests are lowered backward to alter the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger This reduces the risk of whiplash injury Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop WHIPS system and child seats booster cushions The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system 01 Safety 9 01 Correct seating position For the best possible protection the driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint Do not obstruct the WHIPS system Do not leave any
351. our journey General information on loading Payload depends on the car s kerb weight The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car s payload by a corresponding weight For more detailed infor mation on weights see page 372 US The tailgate is opened via a button on the lighting panel or the remote con trol key see page 61 The car s driving characteristics change depending on the weight and distribution of the load To bear in mind when loading e Position the load firmly against the rear 06 seat s backrest Note that objects must not preventthe function of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat s backrests is folded down see page 29 e Centre the load e Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests e Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery e Secure all loads to the load retaining eye lets with straps or web lashings A loose object weighing 20 kg can in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km h carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compro mised or eliminated by high loads e Never load cargo above the backrest Always secure the load During heavy brak ing the load may otherwise shift causing injury to the car s occupants Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
352. out in FM mode under FM menu Advanced settings gt Reset all FM settings Volume control programme types The interrupting programme types e g NEWS or TP are heard at the volume selected for each respective programme type If the vol ume level is adjusted during the programme interruption the new level is saved until the next programme interruption Radio system DAB General DAB Digital Audio Broadcasting is a digital broadcasting system for radio NOTE This system does not support DAB Coverage for DAB is not available in all loca tions If there is no coverage then the mes sage No reception is shown in the display screen i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Service and Ensemble e Service Channel radio channel only audio services are supported by the sys tem e Ensemble A collection of radio channels on the same frequency Storing channel groups Ensemble learn When the vehicle is moved to a new broad casting area programming of existing channel groups in the area may be necessary Programming of channel groups creates an updated list of all available channel groups The list is not updated automatically Programming is carried out in the menu system in DAB mode under DAB menu Ensemble learn Programming can also take place as fol lows 1 Turn TUNE one step in either direction gt Ensemble learn is shown in the list of available channel groups
353. ozom hogy a Bluetooth Module megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b eldirasainak 09 Specifications Type approval 09 CAI Poland Niniejszym Alpine Electronics Inc o wiadcza ze Bluetooth Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugal Alpine Electronics Inc declara que este Bluetooth Module est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Directiva 1999 5 CE Slovenia Alpine Electronics Inc izjavlja da je ta Bluetooth Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES Slovakia Alpine Electronics Inc t mto vyhlasuje e Bluetooth Module sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia Smernice 1999 5 ES Finland Alpine Electronics Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett Bluetooth Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen Sweden H rmed intygar Alpine Electronics Inc att denna Bluetooth Module st r verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Iceland Alpine Electronics Inc hereby certifies that this Bluetooth Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and other relevant regulations of directive 1999 5 EC Norway Alpine Electronics
354. pe approval E5 03135 l L L Type approval E5 03135 L Child seats which are universally Child seats which are universally Child seats which are universally approved approved approved U U U 2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer s enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement AS 9 01 Safety ot bag Group 1 Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo rear facing turnable child seat 9 18 k Volvo Convertible Child Seat rear Volvo Convertible Child Seat rear 9 facing child seat secured with the facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps car s seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 04192 Type approval E5 04192 L L Rear facing child seat Child Seat Rear facing child seat Child Seat Rear facing child seat Child Seat rear facing child seat secured withthe rear facing child seat secured with the rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Use a pro car s seatbelt and straps car s seatbelt and straps tective cushion between the child seat and the dashboard Type approval E5 03135 L Type approval E5 03135 Type approval E5 03135 L L Britax Fixway rear facing child seat secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and straps Type approval E5 03171 L Child seats which are universally Child seats which are universally Chi
355. ple of how a function can be accessed and adjusted using the steer ing wheel keypad 1 Press the centre console button MY CAR 2 Scroll to the desired menu e g Settings with the thumbwheel 1 and then press the thumbwheel a submenu opens 3 Scroll to the desired menu e g Car settings and press the thumbwheel a submenu opens 4 Scroll to Lock settings and press the thumbwheel a new submenu opens 5 Scroll to Doors unlock and press the thumbwheel a submenu of selectable functions opens 6 Choose between the options All doors and Driver door then all and press the thumbwheel a cross is marked in the option s empty box 7 Exitthe programming by backing out of the menus incrementally with short presses on EXIT 2 or with one long press The procedure is the same as with the centre console s buttons see page 148 OK MENU 2 EXIT 4 and the TUNE knob 3 MY CAR The following options are available in menu source MY CAR MTY CAR MY XC70 i 04 e My V70 XC70 e DRIVe e Support systems Support systems e Settings Settings gt gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 149 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 130 Menu source MY CAR My V70 XC70 Doo O My V70 XC70 DSTC 2 City Safety 3 Driver Alert 4 Collision Warning e 5 Reduced Guard 6 Active Bending Lights 4 Deselect for sport mode Spin control off i MY
356. presets Scan 05 Scan Advanced settings News settings DAB linking Advanced settings DAB band REG Sub channels Alternative frequency Show PTY text EON Reset all DAB settings Set TP favourite Audio settings PTY settings 2 The menu options for audio settings are the same for all audio sources 3 Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia 4 Does not apply to Performance 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 5 For submenus see Main menu AM Menus MEDIA Main menu CD Audio Disc menu Random Scan Audio settings Main menu CD DVD Data Disc menu Play Pause Stop Random Repeat folder Change subtitle Change audio track Scan Audio settings 280 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system Menu navigation Infotainment Main menu DVD Video Main menu USB Audio settings Disc menu USB menu DVD disc menu Play Pause Main menu AUX AUX menu Play Pause Continue Stop AUX input volume Stop Random Audio settings Subtitles Repeat folder Audio tracks Select USB device Main menu TV Advanced settings Change subtitle TV menu Angle Change audio track Select country DivX VOD code Scan Reorganize presets Audio settings Audio settings Autostore Scan 05 Main menu iPod Main menu Media Bluetooth Audio settings Pod menu Bluetooth menu Random Random Pop up menuf video and TV Scan Change device Press OK MENU when a video file is be
357. ption accessory for more information see Introduction tion will then be possible see page 113 sec tion Emergency situation The message can be cleared by pressing the send button 3 once Otherwise it goes out on its own after approx 2 minutes but then reap pears each time the engine is started only recalibration at a workshop can clear the mes sage permanently Cold or hot weather The colder the weather the longer it takes before the Alcolock is ready for use Temperature C Maximum heat ing time sec onds 10 85 10 5 10 60 40 5 180 At temperatures below 20 C or above 60 C the Alcolock requires additional power supply The display shows Alcoguard insert power cable In which case connect the power supply cable from the glovebox and wait until indicator lamp 6 is green 03 Your driving environment In extremely cold weather the heating time can be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors Emergency situation In the event of an emergency situation or if the Alcolock is out of order or has been removed it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car All Bypass activation is logged and saved in memory see page 10 in the section Recording data After the Bypass function has been activated the display shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled the whole time while driving and can only be reset by a workshop The Bypass function can be tested witho
358. r is hot Pull pep J da caught adjacent to and under the pedals out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils 220 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Comfort inside the passenger compartment Vanity mirror 12 V socket socket to supply current the remote control key must be in at least key position I see page 82 IMPORTANT Max socket is 10 A 120 W if one socket is used at a time If both sockets are used simultaneously 7 5 A 90 W per socket is applicable WARNING 04 Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use G021438 Vanity mirror with lighting The lamp for the vanity mirror on the driver s side and passenger side respectively is switched on automatically when the cover is raised Optional equipment and accessories e g TV screens music players and mobile phones which are connected to one of the passenger compartment s 12V electrical sockets could be activated by the climate control system even when the remote con trol key has been removed or when the car is locked for example when the parking heater is activated at a preset time For this reason remove the plugs from the 12V socket m tunnel console rear E electrical sockets for optional equipment or l accessories when not in use because the The electrical socket can be used for various battery could be drained in the even
359. ransm overheat park safely Transm overheat brake to hold Transm cooling let engine run Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con stant engine speed Significant pulling in the car s traction No drive due to overheated gearbox A For fastest cooling run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message clears The table shows three steps with an increased degree of seriousness should the transmission become too hot In parallel with the display text the driver is also advised that the car s elec tronics are temporarily changing the driving characteristics Follow the instructions on the information display where appropriate The table s examples are no indication that the car is defective but instead show that a safety function has been activated inten tionally to prevent damage to one of the car s components Transmission overheated Keep the car stationary using the foot brake Transmission overheated Park the car immediately in a safe manner Transmission overheated For fastest cool ing Run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message Clears If a warning symbol combined with the text Transm overheat park safely is ignored then the heat in the gearbox may become so high that the power transmission 03 Your driving environment D Gearboxes between engine and gearbox is temporarily halted in order to preven
360. rator pedal steering wheel move ments and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skid ding of the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car Engine preheater diesel This symbol illuminates during engine preheat ing Preheating occurs when the temperature is below 2 C The car can be started once the symbol goes out Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel tank is low refuel as soon as possible Information read display text When one of the car s systems does not behave as intended this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the informa tion display The message text is cleared with the READ button see page 146 or it disap pears automatically after a time time depend ing on which function is indicated The infor mation symbol can also illuminate in conjunc tion with other symbols When a service message is shown the sym bol and message are cleared using the READ button or clear automatically after a while Main beam On The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash Left right hand direction indicators Both direction indicator symbols flash when the hazard warning flashers are used Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN Instruments and controls 03 gt gt 17 D 03 Your driving environmen
361. rdance with the symbols MENS menu system for the selected in the battery compartment and fit them source 3 Refit the cover ng Volume decrease Battery life is normally 1 4 years and NOTE depends on how much the remote control Volume increase is used Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batter ies in an environmentally safe manner 0 9 Preset channels number and let The remote control is powered by four batter ter input ies of the AA LR6 type Take along extra batteries for a long journey FAV Shortcuts for favourite setting Option accessory for more information see Introduction 257 05 Infotainment system 05 258 Bluetooth handsfree General System overview Mobile phone Microphone Steering wheel keypad Centre console control panel Bluetooth A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth can be connected wirelessly to the Infotainment system The infotainment system then works handsfree with the option to control a range of the mobile phone s functions remotely The microphone used is located by the driver s sun visor 2 The mobile phone can be operated by its own keys irrespective of whether or not it is connected Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the handsfree function Volvo recommends that you seek assis tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www volvocars com for information on compatible phones Menus The menus in TEL are c
362. re o 290 LOGIC A cs E E E 294 OTTO a a a a 298 Drivi g with AM AA 301 Towing and rec Me rra tras Pra aa rr oer eer ala a 307 DURING YOUR JOURNEY 06 During your journey Recommendations during driving General Economical driving Driving economically means driving smoothly while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions e Drive in the highest gear possible adapted to the current traffic situation and road lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption e Avoid driving with open windows e Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration and heavy braking 06 Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the fuel con sumption Use engine braking to slow down when it can take place without risk to other road users A roof load and ski box increase air resis tance leading to higher fuel consumption remove the load carriers when not in use Do not run the engine to operating tem perature at idling speed but rather drive with a light load as soon as possible a cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one The V70 with the D5 engine and 6 speed manual transmission or DRIVe engine and 6 speed manual transmission is started in 2nd gear under normal conditions on level ground For more information and further advice see the pages 13 and 386 Never switch off the engine while moving such as downhill this deactiv
363. re console s keypad to key in the start of the contact s name see Character table keypad in centre console for button functions The list of contacts can also be accessed from normal view by pressing and holding the button on the centre console s keypad with the letter that the contact searched for starts with For example along press on the button for 6 gives instant access to that part of the list where the contacts with the letter M are located 05 Infotainment system Character table keypad in centre console 0pw There is no text wheel for High Performance Key Function sid O so TUNE cannot be used there to input characters only the digit and letter buttons Space 1 neo on the control panel in the centre console can be used for this ABCAAAZAG2 e ABC Searching Or contact 1 Turn TUNE to the desired letter press OK MENU to confirm The number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can also be used gt pep DEFEES athe sludges 2 Continue with the next letter and so on The Ben Benjaminsson JKLS result of the search is shown in the phone gt JKL book 3 05 m IO OONOG 3 TO change the input mode to numbers or special characters or to go to the phone book turn TUNE to one of the options see 7 PORS F QRSB7 explanation in the table below in the list for changing the input mode 2 press OK a tuv AS Search contacts using the text wheel MEN
364. re information on Start Stop see under the glovebox central page 126 electrical unit in cargo area ED PTC element air preheater 100 08 2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 358 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Maintenance and service 2 Primary fuse for the central elec D Support battery tronic module CEM with fuse box B under the glovebox Central electronic module 15 CEM Reference voltage 6 Primary fuse for central electri 60 standby battery cal unit in passenger compart ment with fuse box A under the glovebox Primary fuse for central electri 60 cal unit in passenger compart ment with fuse box A under the glovebox o Primary fuse for central electri 60 cal unit in cargo area Ventilation fan 40 Actuator solenoid starter motor 30 O00000 O Internal diode 50 08 08 Maintenance and service 08 Car care Washing the car Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator Use car shampoo e Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible Bird droppings con tain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discoloration e Hose down the underbody e Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt Do not spray directly onto the locks e Wash using a sponge car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm w
365. rease in speed may arise after the speed has been resumed with D ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 175 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 176 Cruise control Deactivate The cruise control is switched off with the steering wheel button or by switching off the engine the set speed is deleted from the memory and cannot be resumed with the O button P Option accessory for more information see Introduction General information on the speed limiter A speed limiter Speed Limiter can be regar ded as areverse cruise control the driver reg ulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre selected set speed by the speed limiter Operation Steering wheel keypad and display Speed limiter On Off 2 Standby mode ceases and stored speed resumes each extra press gives 1 km h 6 Standby mode O Activate and adjust the maximum speed each press gives 5 km h Stored maximum speed in brackets Standby mode Switch on and activate When the speed limiter is FERIA active the display will show its T1 FX symbol in combination with the set maximum speed A 70 Selection and storage of the highest possible speed in the memory can be made both during a journey and while stationary While driv
366. recommends that you con tact an authorised Volvo workshop Refrigerant The air conditioning system contains a refrig erant This refrigerant contains no chlorine which means that it is harmless to the ozone layer Engage a workshop that has authorisa tion for filling changing refrigerant to carry out the work Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop Total airing function The function opens closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather see page 61 Passenger compartment filter All air entering the car s passenger compart ment is cleaned with a filter This must be replaced at regular intervals Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment it may be necessary to replace the filter more often There are different types of passenger com partment filter Make sure that the correct filter is fitted Clean Zone Interior Package CZIP This option keeps the passenger compartment clear of allergy and asthma inducing sub stances For more information on CZIP see the brochure included with the purchase of the car The following is included e An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is opened with the remote control key The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air The function starts when requir
367. recovery Towing Find out the highest legal speed for towing before towing the car 1 Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch to its end position and then press the START STOP ENGINE button to unlock the steering lock so that the car can be steered see page 82 2 The remote control key must remain in the ignition switch while the car is being towed 3 Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking 4 Be prepared to brake to stop e The steering lock must be unlocked before towing e The remote control key must be in key position Il e Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off The brake pedal must be pressed about five times harder than normal and the steering will be considerably heavier than normal Manual gearbox Prior to towing Move gear lever into neutral and release the parking brake Automatic gearbox Geartronic IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward e Cars with automatic gearbox must not be towed at speeds above 80 km h or further than 80 km Prior to towing Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake Automatic gearbox Powershift The T4 T4F a
368. red or if it needs to be replaced Overview G032824 Label maximum permitted speed Switch 6 Cable Bottle holder orange cap Protective cap Pressure reducing valve Air hose Sealing fluid bottle Pressure gauge 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 07 gt gt 321 The sealing fluid can irritate the skin In the Do not leave children in the car without case of contact with skin wash away the supervision when the engine is running fluid with soap and water 8 Flick the switch to position I 3 Check that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and the air hose 0 Never stand next to the tyre when the com pressor is running If cracks or unevenness Do not break the bottle s seal before use arise then the compressor must be The seal is broken automatically when the switched off immediately The journey bottle is screwed in should not be continued Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended 4 Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the bottle s stopper 5 Screw the bottle into its holder When the compressor starts the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure 1 I drops after approximately 30 seconds G014338 Do not unscrew the bottle it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage 9 Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes For information on the function of the parts see preceding illustration O ORTA
369. rites FAV p 233 Volvo On Call Described in a separate manual Information 154 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Menu source MY CAR Number of keys VIN number DivX VOD code Bluetooth software version in car Map and software version Only in cars with Volvo GPS nav igator see separate manual p 48 p 368 p 246 p 252 04 Comfort and driving pleasure D i A i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 LESS O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 156 Climate control General Climate control The car is equipped with electronic climate control The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the pas senger compartment The air conditioning system AC can be switched off but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compart ment and to prevent the windows from mist ing it should always be on Actual temperature The temperature you select corresponds to the physical experience with reference to factors such as air speed humidity and solar radiation etc in and around the car The system includes a sun sensor which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left hand air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides 1 Only applies to ECC
370. rload the battery The electrical functions in the car load the bat tery to varying degrees Avoid using the key position Il when the engine is switched off Instead use the I mode which uses less power Also be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the engine is switched off Examples of such functions are e ventilation fan e headlamps e windscreen wiper e audio system high volume If the battery voltage is low the information dis play shows the text Low battery Power save mode The energy saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and or audio system In which case charge the battery by star ting the engine and then running it for at least 15 minutes battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary Before a long journey e Check that the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption is normal e Make sure that there are no leaks fuel oil or other fluid e Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths e Carrying a warning triangle is a legal requirement in certain countries Winter driving Check the following in particular before the cold season e The engine coolant must contain at least 50 glycol This mixture protects the engine against frost erosion down to approximately 35 C To achieve op
371. rmation display when the seatbelts are in use or if one of the rear doors has been opened The message is cleared automatically after driving for approximately 30 seconds or after press ing the indicator stalk s READ button e Provides a warning if one of the rear seat belts is unfastened during travel This warning takes the form of a message on the information display along with the audio visual signal The warning stops when the seatbelt is re fastened or it can also be acknowledged manually by press ing the READ button The message on the information display show ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail able Press the READ button to see stored messages 01 Safety 9 01 Os S 01 Safety o Certain markets An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind the driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one At low speed the audio reminder will sound for the first 6 seconds Seatbelt tensioner All the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten sioners A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a suffi ciently violent collision The seatbelt then pro vides more effective restraint for the occu pants WARNING Never insert the tongue of the passenger s seatbelt into the buckle on the driver s side Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any f
372. rnings are made via display text For information on checking the oil level see page 329 E Option accessory for more information see Introduction Symbol Specification Main beam On Left hand direction indicators Right hand direction indicators DRIVe Start Stop DRI V2 ABL fault The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the ABL function Active Bending Lights Emissions system If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to a fault in the car s emissions system Drive to a workshop for checking Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working The car s regular brake system con tinues to work but without the ABS function 1 Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine Restart the engine If the symbol remains illuminated drive to a workshop to have the ABS system checked Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop Rear fog lamp on This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is on There is only one fog lamp It is located on the driver s side Stability system A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the system Stability system Sport mode Sport mode allows for a more active driving experience The system then detects whether the accele
373. rovide optimal pro release the booster cushion tection Weight 22 36 kg 15 25 kg e G017875 3 G017696 For instructions on adjusting the booster cush ion s two levels see pages 39 40 Incorrect position the head must not be posi tioned above the head restraint and the seatbelt must not be below the shoulder G017697 gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 39 9 01 Safety 01 Child safety Press the booster cushion backwards to E Lift the booster cushion up at the frontedge the booster cushion from the upper stage to lock and press it back against the backrest to lock the lower stage St 2 Volvo recommends that repair or replace ment is only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop Do not make any modifi cations or additions to the booster cushion If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load such as in con junction with a collision the entire booster cushion must be replaced Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged it may not afford the same level of protec tion The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn N o o N o oO a co N N o 0 ton It is not possible to adjust the booster cush ion from stage 2 to stage 1 It must first be reset by being fully folded into the seat cushion Refer to the heading below Low ering the two stage booster cushion Lowering th
374. row on the upper foam block It must point forwards in the car IMPORTANT The tools and jack must be stored in the intended location in the car s cargo area when not in use If the floor hatch in the cargo area floor is not closed then privacy locking does not work see page 53 Winter tyres Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant When driving on winter tyres the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500 1000 km so the studs settle properly into the tyres This gives the tyre and especially the studs a longer service life i Option accessory for more information see Introduction OKT The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country Tread depth Road conditions with ice slush and low tem peratures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions Volvo there fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 millime tres Using snow chains Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels also applies to all wheel drive cars Never drive faster than 50 km h with snow chains Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres WAR
375. rson B presses their PCC s unlock button see page 49 e Select one of three possible memories for seat adjustment with seat button 1 3 see page 85 e Adjust seat and mirrors manually see page 85 and 105 Lock settings The Keyless function can be adapted by indi cating in the menu system MY CAR which doors shall be unlocked under Car settings gt Lock settings Keyless entry there select between All doors unlock Any door Doors on same side and Both front doors For a description of the menu system see page 148 Antenna location G021179 The keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car ED Tailgate by wiper motor Door handle left rear Roof centre above rear seat O Cargo area central and furthest in under the floor Door handle right rear O Centre console under the rear section Y Centre console under the front section WARNING People with pacemaker operations should 02 not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system s antennae with their pacemaker This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 59 02 Locks and alarm 02 60 Locking unlocking The remote control key can lock unlock all doors and the tailgate simultaneously Different sequences for unlocking can be selected see Unlocking with the remote control key page 49 In order that th
376. rtical in the locked posi tion for privacy locking fe Pull out the key blade The information dis play shows a message at the same time The glovebox is then locked and the tailgate 8 can no longer be unlocked with the remote Active locks for remote control key without key conte Ise O Tile Cee ec Nin UGN blade and privacy locking activated The privacy locking function is intended for when the car is left for service with a hotel parking valet or similar The glovebox is then gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 53 E 02 Locks and alarm Privacy locking 02 Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote control key but keep it in a safe place instead e Deactivation takes place in reverse order For information on locking the glovebox only see page 61 54 iy Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm Battery replacement remote control key PCC Replacing the battery The batteries should be replaced if Battery replacement Closely study how the battery batteries are e the information symbol is illuminated and Seed Oe eee gd Me covenant i the display shows Low battery in remote O o control Please change batteries Remove control key 1 battery and or 1 Carefully prize out the battery e the locks repeatedly do not react to signals E A SIde Town from the remote control key within PCC 2 batteries 20 metres from
377. s When the car is stationary appears on the display Average Average fuel consumption is calculated from the last resetting Reset using RESET There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel driven supplementary and or parking heater has been used Km to empty tank The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km and the remaining driveable fuel quantity The display shows the approximate distance that can be driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the tank An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance For more information on how fuel consumption can be influenced see page 13 No guaranteed range remains when the display shows km to empty tank Refuel as soon as possible ORCE There may be a slight error in the reading if the driving style has been changed Resetting 1 Select km h average speed or I 100km average 170 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Trip computer 2 Press and hold RESET for approx 1 second to reset the selected function If RESET is kept depressed for at least 3 three seconds then Average speed and Average are reset simultaneously Current speed The instrument panel display changes to show current speed in mph miles per hour if the speedometer is graduated in km h If the speedometer is graduated in mph then the dis play changes to km h 1 Only cert
378. s there may be a slight delay before the engine can be started Engine Preheating is displayed in the meantime The starter motor works until the engine starts or until its overheating protection triggers If the engine has not started try again by hold ing in the START STOP ENGINE button until the engine starts AN WARNII Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car especially if there are children in the car For information on how the key is removed from the ignition switch see page 82 1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START STOP ENGINE button to start the car The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting This is so that the emissions system can reach normal operating tem perature as quickly as possible which min imises exhaust emissions and protects the environment Keyless drive Follow steps 2 3 for starting petrol and diesel engines For more information on Keyless drive see page 57 A prerequisite for the car to start is that one of the car s remote control keys with the Keyless drive function is in the passenger compartment or cargo area Never remove the remote control key with the Keyless drive function from the car while driving or during towing Stop the engine To switch off the engine i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 D 03 Your
379. s when the car is stationary for brightness and contrast 1 Press OK MENU and select Image settings confirm with OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to the adjustment option and confirm with OK MENU 3 Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and confirm with OK MENU To return to the settings list press the OK MENU or EXIT The picture settings can be reset to factory settings with the Reset option Compatible file formats The media player can play back a variety of file types and is compatible with the formats in the following table Dual format double sided discs DVD Plus CD DVD format are thicker than regular CD discs and therefore playback cannot be guaranteed and malfunction may arise Ifa CD contains a mixture of MP3 and CDDA tracks all MP3s will be ignored 6 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia Option accessory for more information see Introduction Audio format CD audio mp3 wma Audio format CD audio mp3 wma aac m4a CD video DVD video divx avi asf Video format A Applies to Performance B Does not apply to Performance C Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia External audio source via AUX USB input General G045213 Connection points for external audio sources An external audio source e g an iPod or MP3 player can be connected to the audio system via any of the connections in the centre co
380. s 349 Remote control cccooccccconnccononiccnnninnononos 256 battery replacement ccoocnciccnnccnnncnnos 257 Remote control HomeLink programmable oa ia cccsncsenccensanseneencwse snes 140 Remote control KEY sicsiwsevediccssteceventestetercoes 48 battery replacement ccccscccssseeeees 55 detachable key blade o 51 TOGO sa oesrcisxescncietecmsicninetoctinciestonadetiosoes 49 ANN CS A sera e o 5 E E 50 Remote control key system type appro Wasted On lt A gt 393 Resetting the door MirrOFS coooccccnnccccc 106 Resetting the power windoOWS 104 Retractable power door mirrors 105 Reverse gear inhibitor cooccncnonono 120 Rims o A 361 Roof load Max weight ooocccccnccccnoccnnnnos 72 RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system 270 RUSTIOONN erais costeo 361 Safety ll oocinisrsacnc es 299 Safety MOCEC ccccccsseceeeeseeeesseseesseeeeeees 32 Salely MEU rasoo aE a 298 Seat see SlaliS ocooccocccncccncconccnncnncnnccannnnnnn 84 Seatbelt Caro asa een 19 seatbelt tenSiONne ccscccseeeeeeeeeees 20 Seatbelt reminde r ccccccseeeseseeeeeeees 19 o A 18 84 head restraints reaf 86 NS ca 161 lowering the front backrest 84 lowering the rear backresSt 87 power SCAG ecncteutss dies tindshoavietsedieesedeenede 85 ventilated front Seats cccsscceeeeees 161
381. s and for standards regarding water quality see page 381 Check the coolant regularly The level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank If the system is not filled sufficiently high temperatures could occur causing a risk of damage to the engine IMPORTANT A high content of chlorine chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system Always use coolant with anti corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50 water and 50 coolant Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water In the event of any doubt about water quality used ready mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec ommendations When changing coolant replacing cool ing system components flush the cool ing system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready mixed coolant The engine must only be run with a well filled cooling system High tempera tures may occur causing a risk of dam age cracks to the cylinder head Brake and clutch fluid Checking the level Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser voir The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir Check the level regularly Change the brake fluid every other year or at every other regular service For capacities and recommended fluid grade see page 381 The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard frequent braking suc
382. s the remote control key s button for locking Tall see page 49 gt If the car is equipped with an alarm the alarm indicator on the instrument panel starts to flash which means that the alarm is armed G043599 Power operated tailgate G017876 Consider the roof height when using elec trical operation Do not use electrical oper ation of the tailgate under a low roof height see under the heading Interrupt opening closing of tailgate i Option accessory for more information see Introduction If the system has been operating con tinuously for a long time it is switched off to avoid overload It can be used again after about 2 minutes If the battery has been discharged or disconnected then the tailgate must be opened and closed again to reset the system Programmable max opening Tailgate maximum opening position can be programmed Can be used for e g low roof height in a garage Proceed as follows Open the tailgate manually hold it in the desired position and give the button on the tailgate one long press at least 3 seconds and then release the tailgate the pro gramming is complete To clear the programming move the tail gate manually to a higher position Snow and wind If the tailgate is forced down by something just when it is being opened e g snow ice or strong wind and this causes the tailgate to lower then it is closed automatically Locking unlocking
383. s used Other variants have an oil level sensor and then the driver is informed via the warning symbol in the 2 Only applies to petrol and 4 cyl diesel centre of the instrument unit as well as by dis play texts Certain models have both variants Contact a Volvo dealer for more information Change the engine oil in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted If the car is driven in adverse con ditions Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade than that specified on the decal see page 378 For capacities see page 379 and onwards Dipstick and filler pipe Checking the oil level in a new car is especially important before the first scheduled oil change Volvo recommends checking the oil level every 2 500 km The most accurate measurements are made on a cold engine before starting The measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme diately after the engine is switched off The dipstick will indicate that the level is too low because the oil has not had time to flow down into the oil sump N oO N e A o o The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX marks Measurement and filling if required 1 Ensure that the car is level After switching off the engine it is important to wait 5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back to the sump Pull up and wipe the dipstick Re insert the dipstick Pull it ou
384. safety equipment provides you with optimum conditions for your child to travel safely in the car Furthermore the child safety equipment fits and is easy to use 1 For information on activated deactivated airbag see page 24 beams under the seat Sharp edges can dam age the straps In the event of questions when fitting child safety products contact the manufacturer Look in the installation instructions for the child for clearer instructions seat for the correct fitting Location of child seats You may place Child seats e achild seat booster cushion on the pas senger seat provided the passenger air bag is not activated e one or more child seats booster cushions in the rear seat Always fit child seats booster cushions in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated If a Child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc tions included Do not attach the straps for the child seat to the horizontal adjustment bar springs rails or gt gt a 01 Safety 01 Child safety WARNING Label Airbag Never place a child in a child seat or on a Booster cushions child seats with steel booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag braces or some other design that could rest SRS is activated on the seatbelt buckle s opening button must not
385. se control If any cruise control button is held depressed for more than approx 1 minute then cruise control is disengaged The engine must be switched off in order to reset cruise control In certain situations cruise control cannot be activated Then the display shows Cruise control Unavailable see page 187 Set time interval Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the display as 1 5 horizontal lines the more lines the longer the time distance One line corre sponds to approximately 1 second 5 lines approximately 2 5 seconds The time interval is increased or decreased with the steering wheel keypad s thumbwheel or the buttons 4 4 for cars without Speed limiter At low speed when the distances are short the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary noticeably in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably Note that a short time interval only allows the driver a short time to react and take action if any unforeseen traffic problem should arise The number of lines for the selected time interval is shown during the setting itself and for several seconds after N wards Then a smaller scale version of the symbol is shown to the right of the dis play The same symbol is also shown when Distance Warning is
386. sections Controls in the centre console Audio settings Equalizer which requires that the following is carried out beforehand 1 Select a source by pressing one of the but tons e g RADIO MEDIA etc Continue to press in order to scroll down among the options on the TV screen e g FM 1 release and wait a second and the selec tion is accepted automatically Alterna tively turn TUNE and confirm with OK MENU Press OK MENU and turn TUNE or use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel NO RADIO keypad to reach the desired menu option e g Audio settings and press OK 2 MEDIA MENU TEL 3 Turn TUNE again to reach the desired sub menu e g Equalizer and press OK TUNE MENU O OK MENU Menus RADIO Search paths The search paths to the menu functions are Main menu AM specified in the owner s manual with the form AM menu Show presets Scan 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia o Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Infotainment system Menu navigation Infotainment 05 gt gt 29 CS 05 Infotainment system Menu navigation Infotainment Audio settings Reset all FM settings Sound stage Audio settings nica Main menu DAB1 DAB2 Volume compensation DAB menu Reset all audio settings Ensemble learn Main menu FM1 FM2 pt GHG FM menu Turn off PTY filtering TP Show radio text Show radio text Show presets Show
387. sed Volvo workshop is recommended 202 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Driver Alert System DAC General information on Driver Alert System The Driver Alert System is intended to assist drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are driving on The Driver Alert System consists of two differ ent functions which can either be switched on at the same time or individually e Driver Alert Control DAC e Lane Departure Warning LDW see page 206 A switched on function is set in standby mode and is not activated automatically until speed exceeds 65 km h The function is deactivated again when speed decreases to below 60 km h Both functions use a camera which is depend ent on the lane having side markings painted on each side WARNING The Driver Alert System does not work in all situations but is instead only intended to be of supplementary assistance The driver always has ultimate responsibility that the car is driven safely General information on Driver Alert Control DAC G017332 The function is intended to attract the driver s attention when he she starts to drive less con sistently e g if he she becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep A camera detects the side markings painted on the carriageway and compares the section of the road with the driver s steering wheel move ments The driver is alerted if t
388. setting The setting in use when the engine is switched off is activated next time the engine is started Speed related power steering Steering force increases with the speed of the car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity The steering is firmer and more immediate on motorways Steering is light and requires no extra effort when parking and at low speed The driver can choose between three different levels of steering force for road responsiveness or steering sensitivity Go to the menu system MY CAR and locate Settings Car settings z Option accessory for more information see Introduction gt Steering wheel force and select Low Medium or High For a description of the menu system see page 148 This menu cannot be accessed while the car is in motion Operation Go43656 F a 7 Steering wheel keypad and display Cruise control On Off 2 Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed 6 Standby mode Activate and adjust the speed O Selected speed in brackets Standby mode Activating and setting the speed Switch on the cruise control with one press on the steering wheel button f the symbol is illuminated in the display 5 and the brackets around km h show that the cruise control is set in standby mode The cruise control is then activated with or after which the current speed is stored in the memory the display text km h changes to
389. sition Dipped beam halogen Main beam Hal ogen Extra main beam ABL Front direction indicators Position parking lamps front Side marker lamps front Front fog lamps Direction indica tors side door mirrors Glovebox light ing Specification bulbs TOE 59 65 55 21 35 2 Then press the three lower lugs back into H7 LL H9 H7 LL H21W LL W5W LL W5W LL H8 WYSW LL Socket SV8 5 Length 43 mm 08 Maintenance and service A Type Vanity mirror 12 lighting Cargo area light 10 ing Number plate 5 lighting Direction indica 21 tors rear A Watt Socket SV5 5 Length 35 mm Socket SV8 5 Length 43 mm CSW LL PY21W LEE 08 08 Maintenance and service Wiper blades and washer fluid Wiper blades Service position In order to change clean or lift the wiper blades for scraping off ice from the windscreen they must be in service position 1 Turn the remote control key to key position 0 see page 82 and keep the remote con trol key in the ignition switch 2 Move the right hand stalk switch up for about 1 second The wipers then move to standing straight up The wipers return to the starting position when the car is started 08 342 Replacing the wiper blades G021760 G021762 Lift up the wiper arm Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm
390. something soft Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading unloading long items Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position and the car could then move off Front seat The passenger seat backrest can also be folded for an extra long load see page 84 Roof load Using load carriers To avoid damaging the car and for maximum possible safety while driving the load carriers designed by Volvo are recommended Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers e Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured Lash the load securely with retaining straps e Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers Put the heaviest objects at the bottom e The size of the area exposed to the wind and therefore fuel consumption increase with the size of the load e Drive gently Avoid quick acceleration heavy braking and hard cornering The car s centre of gravity and driving cha racteristics are altered by roof loads For information on maximum permitted roof load including load carriers and any space box see page 372 06 During your journey Pacing Lowering the rear seat backrest To simplify loading in the cargo area the rear seat backrest can be folded down see page 86 Cargo retaining straps Securing loads A a G019397 Load secured in both upper and lower mou
391. sor s spare parts must only be carried out by a qualified workshop we rec ommend an authorised Volvo work shop To avoid exposure to harmful radiation do not carry out any readjustments or maintenance other than those specified here The repairer must follow specially drawn up workshop information for the laser sensor Do not remove the laser sensor this includes removing the lenses A removed laser sensor does not fulfil laser class 3B as per standard IEC 60825 1 Laser class 3B is not eye safe and therefore entails a risk of injury as Introduction faligo iU eio p Important information e The laser sensor s connector must be unplugged before removal from the windscreen e The laser sensor must be fitted onto the windscreen before the sensor s con nector is plugged in e The laser sensor transmits laser light when the remote control key is in posi tion Il and also with the engine switched off see page 82 on key positions For more information on the laser sensor see page 192 Information on the Internet At www volvocars com there is further infor mation concerning your car Volvo and the environment Volvo Cars environmental philosophy Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo ration s core values which influence all opera tions We also believe that our customers share our consideration for the environment Your Volvo complies with strict international
392. ss on the control switches between the two trip meters T1 and T2 A long press more than 2 seconds resets an active trip meter to zero The distance is shown in the display Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment D 03 gt gt 79 Q 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls 03 CC Oe Clock El t Lo E G044562 Clock and setting knob 1 Display for showing the time 2 Controls for setting the clock Turn the knob clockwise anticlockwise to set the clock Turn first to the end position and then turn past over the end position a further approx 1mm a click sounds and is felt in the button Each click scrolls 1 minute In order to change quickly hold in the click position In connection with a message the clock can be temporarily replaced by a symbol see page 146 Setting the clock in MY CAR In addition to the previous manual mechanical method the clock can also be set in the menu group MY CAR for more information see page 148 A Time 10 03 AM OK 10 AM OK 1 Locate Settings gt System options gt Time 2 The cursor is located in the first box for Hour Press OK the box is activated 3 Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and press OK the box is deactivated 4 Turn TUNE to select the box for Minute A and press OK the box is activated B 5 Turn TUNE to set the correc
393. ss repeatedly on MEDIA to the desired source Disc or USB release and wait a few seconds and the selection is accepted 3 Insert a DVD disc in the car s media player or connect an external source via the car s USB port Playback and navigation Play back disc track video file using 1 on the remote control and change disc track video file using 144 gt Stop playback using For more information about play back and navigation of DVD video discs see page 245 and for video files see page 243 Fast forward reverse Start fast forward rewind by means of a long press on the buttons 44 gt Then increase fast forward rewind speed by short presses the buttons Audio files are fast for warded rewound at one speed while video files can be fast forwarded rewound at four dif ferent speeds Fast forward rewind is stopped by pressing gt or the equivalent opposite m4 gt gt button Listening to radio It is possible to listen to radio via the car s radio 1 Switch on the wireless headphones select CH A for left hand screen or CH B for right hand screen 2 Aim the remote control at the IR receiver on the TV screen press repeatedly on RADIO to the desired source AM FM1 DAB1 etc release and wait a few sec onds and the selection is accepted 3 Select a station with one of the preset but tons 0 9 on the remote control or press 4 gt gt the radio will search for
394. stem MY CAR under Settings Car settings gt Side mirror settings gt Tilt left mirror or Tilt right mirror For a descrip tion of the menu system see page 149 Automatic retraction when locking When the car is locked unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are auto matically retracted extended The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Side mirror settings Fold mirrors For a description of the menu system see page 149 Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting extending to work correctly 1 Retract the mirrors with the L and R but tons 2 Fold them out again with the L and R but tons 3 Repeat the above procedure as necessary The mirrors are now reset in neutral position Home safe and approach lighting The light on the door mirrors illuminates when approach lighting or home safe lighting is selected see page 95 Rear window and door mirror defrosters Use the defroster to quickly remove misting and ice from the rear window and the door mir rors One press of the button starts the heating The light in the button indicates that the function is active Disconnect the heating as soon as the ice misting is cleared in order not to load the battery unnecessarily However the heating is switched off autom
395. stem s range For more information on con nection see page 251 Random This function plays back the audio files on the external device in random order Activate deactivate the random function in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu Random Change audio file by pressing e FA on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad Scanning of audio files in external device This function play backs the first ten seconds of each audio file Activate deactivate the func tion in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu gt Scan Cancel scanning with EXIT Version information Bluetooth The car s current Bluetooth version can be seen in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth software version in car e Option accessory for more information see Introduction TV General This system only supports TV transmissions in countries which transmit signals in mpeg 2 format and follow the DVB T stand ard The system does not support TV trans missions in mpeg 4 format or analogue transmissions The TV picture is only shown when the car is stationary When the car is moving at a speed over about 6 km h the picture disap pears No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen although the audio is heard during this time The picture reappears when the car has stopped The reception is dependent both on how good the signal strength and signal quality are The transmission may be disturbed
396. ster Cushion with and backrest Booster Cushion with and backrest Booster Cushion with and without backrest without backrest without backrest Type approval E5 03139 Type approval E5 03139 Type approval E5 03139 UF UF UF Integrated booster cushion Integrated Booster Cushion available as a fac tory fitted option Type approval E5 03168 B L Suitable for specific child seats These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model limited or semi universal categories U Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class UF Suitable for front facing universally approved child seats in this weight class B Built in child seats approved for this weight class 01 Safety 9 Phil safety Integrated two stage booster The booster cushions are specially designed to Raising the two stage booster cushion cushions provide optimum safety In combination with y W the seatbelt they are approved for children who weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are at least 95 cm in height Stage 1 Check before driving that e the 2 stage integrated booster cushion is correctly set See table below and in locked position e the seatbelt is in contact with the child s body and is not slack or twisted e the seatbelt does not lie across the child s fi throat or below the shoulder see preced Correct position the seatbelt is positioned above ing illustrations a K low over the pelvis to p
397. stops temporarily and continues when the engine has started For prolonged use more than 10 minutes with the engine switched off the capacity of the vehicle s battery may fall to such a low level that it is not possible to start the engine In this case a message will be displayed on the screen Menus The menus for RSE are controlled using the remote control For general information on menu navigation and menu structures see page 276 Remote control The RSE system is equipped with a remote control Using this it is possible to control the functions for each TV screen The remote con trol can also be used to control other functions in the infotainment system even from the rear seat For information on the remote control see page 256 05 Infotainment system Wireless headphones G044555 Control for channel A CH A or channel B CH B On Off button 6 Volume Indicator lamp On Off The RSE system includes two wireless head phones The wireless headphones are activated with the On Off button 2 an indicator lamp illumi nates 4 Select CH A channel A or CH B channel B using the control 1 Adjust the vol ume using the volume control 8 The headphones are automatically switched off after about 3 minutes if they are not used Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 gt gt 271 CS 05 Infotainment system 05 212 RSE Rear Seat E
398. t 03 Instruments and controls Indicator and warning symbols Symbol Specification Low oil pressure Parking brake applied Airbags SRS Seatbelt reminder Alternator not charging Fault in brake system Warning A For certain engine variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used Warnings are made via display text see pages 329 and 331 Low oil pressure If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine s oil pressure is too low Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level top up if necessary If the symbol illumi nates and the oil level is normal contact a workshop Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work shop Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake is applied The symbol flashes during application and then changes over to a constant glow A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen Read the message on the information display Airbags SRS If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving it means a fault has been detected in the seatbelt buckle SRS SIPS or IC systems Drive immediately to a workshop to have the system checked Volvo recom mends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop Seatbelt reminder This symbol illuminates if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken
399. t gt 317 07 Wheels and tyres Changing wheels IMPORTANT Never drive faster than 80 km h with a spare wheel on the car IMPORTANT The car must never be driven fitted with more than one temporary spare wheel The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel well with the outside down The same bolt runs through to secure the spare wheel and the foam block The foam block contains all the tools Taking out the spare wheel 1 Fold up the cargo area floor from the rear and forwards Undo the retaining screw Lift out the foam block with its tools 4 Lift out the spare wheel 07 07 Wheels and tyres Tyre pressure G021830 The tyre pressure decal on the driver s side door pillar between frame and rear door shows which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions This is also specified in the tyre pressure table see page 389 e Tyre pressure for the car s recommended tyre dimension e ECO pressure e Spare wheel tyre pressure Temporary Spare OKT Temperature differences change the tyre pressure 1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy Fuel economy ECO pressure At speeds under 160 km h the general tyre pressure is recommended applies for both full load and light load in order to obtain optimum fuel economy Checking the tyre pressure The tyre pressures must be checked every month This also applies to the car s spare wheel C
400. t and check the level Ye eS If the level is close to MIN then 0 5 litres should be added If the level is significantly below then an additional amount is required o If required check the level again do it after driving a short distance Then repeat steps 1 4 WARNING Never fill above the MAX mark The level should never be above MAX or below MIN as this could lead to engine damage WARNING Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire 3 Only applies to 5 cyl diesel Engine with electronic oil level sensor Filler pipe You do not need to take action with respect to the engine oil level before a message is shown in the display see the illustration below 4 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick 5 cyl diesel T 1 UT li z C 20 7 Sage 1140 ere A j 5 x i YS T ri Wi V G044521 Message and graph in the display Message Engine oil level WARNING If the message Oil service required is shown visit a workshop The oil level may be too high IMPORTANT In the event of the message Engine oil level Fill with 0 51 oil only fill with 0 5 litres 08 Maintenance and service Engine compartment 08 dd 08 Maintenance and service Engine compartment The oil level is only detected by the system during driving The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained The car must be dr
401. t be inflated to the pres sure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table see page 389 1 bar 100 kPa Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres sure is too high Do not unscrew the bottle it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage 3 Make sure the compressor is switched off Detach the air hose and cable Refit the dust cap The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop Check the tyre pressure regularly Volvo recommends that you drive to the near est authorised Volvo workshop for the replace ment repair of the damaged tyre Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid You should not drive faster than 80 km h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre maximum driving distance is 200 km The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced Inflating the tyres The car s original tyres can be inflated by the compressor 1 The compressor must be switched off Make sure that the switch is in position O and locate the cable and air hose 2 Unscrew the wheel s dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bot tom of the thread on the tyre s air valve Inhaling car exhaust fumes can res
402. t in phone mode under Phone menu gt Phone book gt Clear phone book Deleting the car s telephone book only dele tes contacts in the car s telephone book Contacts in the mobile phone s phone book are not deleted 05 gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 265 05 Infotainment system 05 266 Voice recognition mobile phone Introduction The infotainment system s voice recognition allows the driver to voice activate certain func tions in a Bluetooth connected mobile phone or in Volvo s navigation system RTI Road and Traffic Information System e The information in this section describes the use of voice commands to control a mobile phone connected using Bluetooth For detailed infor mation on using a mobile phone con nected using Bluetooth with the car s Infotainment system see page 258 The Volvo navigation system RTI Road and Traffic Information System has a separate user manual which contains more information on voice control and voice commands to control that sys tem Voice commands offer convenience and help the driver to avoid being distracted and instead concentrate on driving and focus attention on the road and traffic conditions WARNING The driver always holds overall responsibil ity for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and complying with all applicable rules of the road The voice recognition system allows the driver to voice acti
403. t minute and press OK the box is deactivated 6 Turn TUNE to select the box for OK and press OK the setting is complete The menu option Settings System options gt Time format selects the 24h or 12h system AM PM Volvo Sensus General G045223 Control panel in centre console Navigation NAV see separate owner s manual Road and Traffic Information Sys tem RTI E Infotainment RADIO MEDIA TEL see page 228 Car settings MY CAR see page 148 4 Park assist camera CAM see page 212 Climate control see page 156 Volvo Sensus is the car s operating system the heart of your personal Volvo experience Volvo Sensus combines and presents many func tions in several of the car s systems on the centre console TV screen With Volvo Sensus the car can be personalised by means of an intuitive user interface Settings can be made in Car settings Infotainment Climate etc With the centre console buttons and controls or the steering wheel s right hand keypad functions can be activated or deactivated and many different settings can be made With a press on MY CAR all settings related to the driving and control of the car are presented such as City Safety Locks and alarm setting the clock etc With a press on the respective function RADIO MEDIA TEL NAV and CAM other sources systems and functions can be acti vated e g AM FM1 CD DVD TV Blue tooth na
404. t no door is opened The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside To activate the child safety locks Option accessory for more information see Introduction 65 02 Locks and alarm 02 66 General Activated alarm is triggered if e adoor the bonnet or the tailgate is opened e amovement is detected in the passenger compartment if fitted with a movement detector e the car is raised or towed away if fitted with a tilt detector e the battery s cable is disconnected e the siren is disconnected If there is a fault in the alarm system the infor mation display shows a message In which case contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended The movement sensors trigger an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compartment air currents are also regis tered For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window or the sunroof open or if the passenger compartment heater is used To avoid this Close the window sunroof when leaving the car If the car s integrated passenger compartment heater or a porta ble electric heater shall be used direct the airflow from the air vents so that they are not pointing upwards in the passenger com partment Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components All such attempts could affect the terms of insurance z Option accessory for more information see Introduction
405. t of overheating a warning sym bol illuminates on the instrument panel combined with a text message follow the recommendation given Steep inclines e Do not lock the automatic transmission in a higher gear than the engine can cope with it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine revolutions IMPORTANT See also the specific information on slow driving with trailer for cars with the Powershift automatic transmission on page 123 Parking on a hill 1 Depress the foot brake Activate the parking brake Move the gear selector to position P Release the foot brake e gt PI Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer Always use the parking brake e Block the wheels with chocks when park ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill Starting on a hill 1 Depress the foot brake 2 Move the gear selector to driving posi tion D Release the parking brake Release the foot brake and start driving off Towing bracket If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar the installation instructions for the loose sec tion must be followed carefully see page 304 If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar e Follow the installation instructions care fully e The detachable section must be locked with the key before setting off e Check that the indicator window shows green Important checks e The towbar s towba
406. t of such accessories designed for 12 V e g TV screens an occurrence music players and mobile phones For the Option accessory for more information see Introduction 221 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Comfort inside the passenger compartment Electrical socket in cargo area For more information see page 297 222 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure CT General information On iINfOtaiINMeEN cccceccececececececcecececececeeaeaeass 226 a A a 228 General infotainment fUNC HIONS cccccccnnncconncoonnnoconnnnonnnnnanncnannnnnnnnnnannnns 233 p n A AAA 236 a e NEN a IIA occ 243 External audio source via AUX USB A E E T 247 Wis 2 Pme OS a a A E 250 A oaa PNA Sie E E E E 233 AE AAA oia cscecsaecesshsaseccossstasdcasconavoasedessececacdsecesects 256 Me A 258 VOICE KECOGMITION mobilephone meee a 266 RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system 0ccccccseseecsseseeesseseeeensaeees 270 Menu navigatio O nin tranca ec 279 224 Option accessory for more information see Introduction INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM CS 05 Infotainment system 05 226 General information on infotainment General The infotainment system in your car has one of the following four levels Performance e 5 TV screen TFT e Steering wheel keypad without thumb wheel AM FM radio CD AUX input 6 speakers 4x20W
407. t the clutch from malfunctioning the car then loses drive and is stationary until gearbox temperature has cooled to an acceptable level For more possible display messages with their 03 respective proposals for solutions concerning automatic transmission see page 146 A display text clears automatically after the action has been carried out or after one press on the indicator stalk READ button Q 03 Your driving environment 03 126 Eco DRIVe Quieter and cleaner 24 G0415 Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo ration s core values and it influences all of our operations This target orientation has resulted in the DRIVe vehicle series whose concept consists of an interaction between several sep arate energy saving functions all with the common purpose of reducing fuel consump tion which in turn contributes to reduced exhaust emissions An car with this button on the instrument panel and e manual gearbox has the Eco Start Stop DRIVe function More information and settings The MY CAR menu system in the car includes instructions which explain parts of the DRIVe concept along with several possible settings and options see page 149 E Option accessory for more information see Introduction General information on Start Stop JN EEE x i j 5 n in nm Uy a The engine is switched off it becomes quieter and cleaner Certain engi
408. tart and be damaged in an automatic car wash Deac tivate the rain sensor while the car is running or the remote control key is in position I or Il The symbol in the combined instrument panel and the lamp in the button go out Washing function Washing the windscreen Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the stalk switch has been released Heated washer nozzles The washer nozzles are heated automatically in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid freezing solid High pressure headlamp washing High pressure headlamp washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid To save fluid the headlamps are washed automatically at every fifth windscreen wash cycle Wiper and washer rear window ap Rear window wiper intermittent wiping 043525 Rear window wiper continuous speed Press the stalk switch forward see the arrow in the illustration above to initiate rear window washing and wiping The rear window wiper is equipped with overheating protection which means that the motor is switched off if it overheats The rear window wiper works again after a cool ing period 30 seconds or longer depending on the heat in the motor and the outside temperature i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN
409. ted e the car is locked The passenger compartment lighting comes on and remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off auto matically after two minutes Home safe light duration Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked 1 Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch 2 Move the left hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to the end position and release it The function can be activated in the same way as with main beam flash see page 90 3 Get out of the car and lock the door When the function is activated dipped beam parking lamps door mirror lamps number plate lighting interior roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on The length of time for which the home safe lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Light settings gt Home safe light duration For a description of the menu sys tem see page 149 Approach light duration Approach lighting is switched on with the remote control key see page 49 and is used to switch on the car s lighting at a distance When the function is activated with the remote control parking lamps door mirror lamps number plate lighting interior roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on The length of time for which
410. tent is shown with this option selected Distance and fuel unit p 170 MPG UK MPG US km l I 100km Temperature unit Celsius Fahrenheit Selects the unit for the display of outside temperature and setting of the climate control system Volumes Voice output volume Park assist front volume Park assist rear volume Phone ringing volume Reset system options All menus in System options are given original factory settings Voice settings Voice tutorial This menu option OK provides spoken information about how the system works Voice command list Phone commands Phone Phone call con tact Phone dial num ber Navigation commands Navigation Navigation repeat instruc tion Navigation go to address General commands Help Cancel Voice tutorial The menu options under Phone commands show several exam ples of available voice commands only with a Bluetooth enabled mobile phone installed For more and detailed information see page 258 The menu options under Naviga tion commands show several examples of available voice com mands only with Volvo s navi gation system RTI installed Voice user setting Default setting User 1 User 2 Here there is the option to create a second user profile an advant age if more than one person shall use the car system regularly Default setting gives factory set tings i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Co
411. terval On during adjustment Time interval On after adjustment ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure O 04 189 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 190 Distance Warning Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the display as 1 5 horizontal lines the more lines the longer the time interval One line corre sponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front 5 lines approx imately 2 5 seconds The number of lines for the selected time interval is shown during the setting itself and for several seconds after wards Then a smaller scale version of the symbol is shown to the right of the dis play The same symbol is also shown when adaptive cruise control is activated Symbols and messages in the display The higher the speed the longer the calcu lated distance in metres for a specific time interval The set time interval is also used by the adaptive cruise control function see page 181 Only use the time interval that is allowed in accordance with local traffic regulations Limitations The function uses the same radar sensor as adaptive cruise control and the collision warn Set time interval after adjustment i a Option accessory for more information see Introduction ing system For more information on the radar sensor and its
412. the headlamps in normal position see preceding illustration Active Xenon headlamps The car must be stationary with the engine run ning when the headlamp pattern is shifted between right and left hand traffic 1 Access the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Light settings 2 Select between Temporary RH traffic and Temporary LH traffic For a description of the menu system see page 149 Halogen headlamps The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens The headlamp pattern may not be as good 03 Your driving environment EN Lighting Masking the headlamps 1 Copy the A and B templates for left hand drive cars or the C and D templates for right hand drive cars with a scale of 1 2 see page 99 Use a photocopier with a zoom function for example e A LHD Right left hand drive right 03 lens e B LHD Left left hand drive left lens e C RHD Right right hand drive right lens e D RHD Left right hand drive left lens 2 Transfer the template to a self adhesive waterproof material and cut it out 3 Start from the design line on the headlamp lenses see the dotted line on the side 98 Position the self adhesive templates at the right distance from each design line using the illustration and the dimensions in the following list e A LHD Right approx 86 mm e B LHD Left approx 40 mm e C RHD Right 0 mm e D RHD Left approx 96
413. the steering wheel keypad Audio files have the symbol a video files have the symbol MN and folders have the symbol MY When playback of a file is complete the play back of the other files of the same type in that particular folder continues Change of folder takes place automatically when all the files in the current folder have been played back The system automatically detects and changes setting when a disc containing only audio files or only video files is loaded into the media player and then plays back these files How ever the system does not change setting if a disc containing a mixture of audio and video files is loaded into the media player but instead the player continues to play back the previous file type A video film is only shown when the car is stationary When the car is moving at a speed of over about 8 km h no picture is shown and No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen although the audio is heard during this time The picture is shown again as soon as the car s speed falls below about 6 Some audio files that are copy protected by record companies or privately copied audio files cannot be loaded by the player 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia DVD video discs For playback of DVD video discs see page 245 Fast forward reverse Hold in the buttons to fast forward rewind Audio files are fast forwarded rewound
414. the approach light ing should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Light settings Approach light duration For a description of the menu sys tem see page 149 Adjusting headlamp pattern Headlamp pattern left hand traffic D 03 Your driving environment 03 96 Lighting A 10 rc E A o o Headlamp pattern right hand traffic The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be set for right or left hand traffic The correct pat tern will also better illuminate the verge Xenon headlamps roi iy T a 4 el 4 G019442 er A Headlamp control for adjusting headlamp pattern Normal position the headlamp pattern is correct for the country in which the car was delivered Ej Adapted position designed for opposite headlamp pattern WARNING The headlamps must be handled with extreme care due to the Xenon lamp being supplied from a high voltage unit The country in which the car is delivered deter mines whether normal position is designed for right or left hand traffic i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Example 1 If a car that is delivered in Sweden shall be driven in the UK then the headlamps must be set to the adjusted position see preceding illustration Example 2 A car that is delivered in the UK is designed for left hand traffic and is driven there with
415. the device has a roll ing code The garage door gate or sim ilar is not activated when the pro grammed HomeLink button is depressed Continue the programming in accordance with the following Locate the programming button on the receiver for the garage door for example normally located close to the antenna s bracket on the receiver If you have diffi culty in finding the button consult the supplier s manual or contact the supplier via the Internet www homelink com Depress and release the programming button The button flashes for approx 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period 2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer Depress the programmed button on HomeLink while the programming but ton is still flashing keep it depressed for approx 3 seconds and then release Repeat the press hold release sequence up to 3 times to conclude the program ming Erasing programming It is only possible to erase the programming for all the buttons on HomeLink not for individual buttons e Option accessory for more information see Introduction Depress the two outer buttons and do not release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx 20 seconds gt HomeLink is now set in so called learn mode and is ready to be pro grammed once more see page 140 03 Your driving environment ED AN Menus and Message eterno 146 Menu sourc
416. the display shows Driver Alert The second row displays the Off D river Alert Standby lt 65 km h Driver Alert Unavailable or Level mark options READ confirms or clears a warning in the memory Activating Driver Alert Control Using the centre console display screen with its menu system MY CAR search and locate Car settings Driver Alert Select the On option For information on how the menu sys tem is used see page 148 The function is activated when speed exceeds 65 km h and remains active as long as the speed is over 60 km h The display shows a level mark with 1 5 bars where a low number of bars indicates incon sistent driving style A high number of bars indicates stable driving If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well as the text message Driver Alert Time for a break The warning is repeated after a time if driving ability does not improve An alarm should be taken very seriously as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his her own condition In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired ness stop the car in a safe manner as soon as possible and rest Studies have shown that it is equally as dan gerous to drive while tired as it is under the influence of alcohol Driver Alert OFF Driver Alert Standby lt 65 km h Function not switched on Option accessory for more information see Introduction The function is set in standby mod
417. the information display An error message is stored in a memory list until the fault has been rectified Press READ to acknowledge and browse between the messages If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer the message must be read press READ before the previous activity can be resumed Specification Stop safely Stop engine Service urgent Service required See manual Book time for maintenance Stop and switch off the engine Serious risk of damage consult a workshop Stop and switch off the engine Serious risk of damage consult a workshop Contact a workshop to check the car immedi ately Contact a workshop to check the car as soon as possible Read the owner s man ual Time to book regular service contact a workshop Time for regular maintenance Maintenance overdue Transmission oil Change nee ded Transmission performance low Specification Time for regular service contact a workshop The timing is deter mined by the number of kilometres driven num ber of months since the last service engine run ning time and oil grade If the service intervals are not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts contact a work shop Contact a workshop to check the car as soon as possible The gearbox cannot handle full capacity Drive carefully until the message clears If
418. the water repellent proper ties This should be used first after three years and then each year Rustproofing inspection and maintenance The car received a thorough and complete rustproofing at the factory Parts of the body are made of galvanised sheet metal The underbody is protected by a wear resistant anti corrosion compound A thin penetrating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the exposed members cavities closed sections and side doors F i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Maintenance and service Car care 08 gt gt 361 08 Maintenance and service 08 Car care Under normal conditions the rustproofing does not require treatment for approximately 12 years After this period it should be treated at three year intervals Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for assistance if the car needs further treatment Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is important to keep the car clean The car s rust proofing needs to be checked regularly and touched up if necessary in order for it to be maintained Cleaning the interior Only use cleaning agents and car care prod ucts recommended by Volvo Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents Carpets and cargo area Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and t
419. there is in the car the faster the car rolls despite engine braking In order to then reduce speed the driver has to assist using the footbrake The function makes it possible to increase reduce speed on steep downhill gradients with a foot only on the accelerator pedal without using the footbrake The sensitivity of the accelerator pedal decreases and becomes more precise by means of the full actuation of the pedal being restricted to adjusting engine speed within a limited range The brake system brakes itself and provides the car with a low and even speed so allowing the driver to fully focus on steering HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients with an uneven road surface and slippery sec tions E g when launching a boat on a trailer from a ramp 1 HDC is only available on the XC70 WARNING HDC does not work in all situations but is instead only intended to be supplementary assistance The driver always has ultimate responsibility that the car is driven safely Function G044835 HDC is engaged or disengaged using a switch on the centre console An indicator lamp in the button illuminates when the function is switched on When HDC is operating the symbol illuminates and the display shows Hill descent control ON The function only operates in first gear position and in reverse gear For an automatic gearbox gear position 1 must be selected which is shown with the figure 1 in the trip computer d
420. timum antifreeze protection different types of gly col must not be mixed e The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation e Engine oil viscosity is important Oils with lower viscosity thinner oils facilitate star ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold For more information on suitable oils see page 379 06 During your journey Recommendations during driving 06 db 06 During your journey Recommendations during driving IMPORTANT Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather e The condition of the battery and charge level must be inspected Cold weather pla ces great demands on the battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold e Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec ommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of Snow or ice The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries 06 Slippery driving conditions Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts 06 During your journey Refuelling Refuelling Opening closing the fuel filler flap o N 5 3 0 Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the lighting panel the flap opens when the button is released The arrow on the infor
421. ting or overloading If an electrical component or function does not work it may be because the component s fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for checking N ise 10 2 o Changing 1 Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse Central electrical unit locations in a left hand 2 Pull out the fuse and check from the side drive car In a right hand drive car the central to see whether the curved wire has blown electrical units under the glovebox change 3 Ifthis is the case replace it with a new fuse sides of the same colour and amperage Engine compartment the gl WARNING O Under the glovebox Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an O Cargo area amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse This could cause signifi cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire Engine compartment cold zone only Start Stop 08 gt gt 08 Maintenance and service Engine compartment General fuses engine compartment On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses Positions see preceding illustration A Engine compartment upper B Engine compartment front Engine compartment lower These fuses are all located in the engine com partment box
422. tion Option accessory for more information see Introduction 295 S 01 Safety 01 Side airbags SIPS bags D Si ise 0 In a side impact collision a large proportion of the collision force is transferred by the SIPS Side Impact Protection System to beams pil lars the floor the roof and other structural parts of the body The side airbags at the driv er s and front passenger seats protect the chest area and the hip and are an important part of the SIPS The SIPS bag system consists of two main components side airbag and sensors The side airbags are located in the front seat back rests e Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop Defective work in the SIPS bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury e Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel since this area is required by the side airbag e Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags e The side airbag is a supplement to the seatbelts Always use a seatbelt Child seats and side airbags The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag A child seat or booster cushion can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an
423. tion on the key blade see page 51 Locking the glovebox E Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cylinder Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise The keyhole is horizontal in the locked position E Pull out the key blade e Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order For information on privacy locking see page 53 Tailgate Unlocking with the remote control key 02 G021093 The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed and the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the remote control key s Pax button If the car is equipped with an alarm the alarm indicator on the instrument panel stops to show that alarm for the whole of the car is not armed The alarm s level and movement sen sors and the sensors for opening the tailgate are disconnected The doors remain locked and armed The tailgate is unlocked but remains closed press lightly on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle and lift the tailgate gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 61 02 Locks and alarm 02 62 Locking unlocking If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re armed Unlocking the car from inside To unlock the tailgate Press the lighting panel button 1 gt The tailgate is unlocked and can be opened within 2 minutes if the car is locked from the inside Locking with the remote control key Pres
424. tivated automatically when the car is opened Before starting the engine The Alcolock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened 1 When the indicator lamp 6 is green the Alcolock is ready for use 2 Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder If the Alcolock is outside the car when it is unlocked then it must first be activated with the switch 2 3 Fold up the nozzle 1 take a deep breath and blow with an even pressure until a click is heard after approx 5 seconds The result will be one of the alternatives in the following table Result after breath test 4 If no message is shown then the transmis sion to the car may have failed in which case press the button 3 to transmit the result to the car manually 5 Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock in its holder 6 Start the engine following an approved breath test within 5 minutes otherwise it must be repeated i i 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment ae Alcoguard 03 gt gt a D 03 Your driving environment 03 e Alcoguard Result after breath test Indicator lamp Specification 5 Display text Green lamp Alco Start the engine no guard Approved alcohol content test measured Yellow lamp Alco Engine starting pos guard Approved sible measured test alcohol content is above 0 1 promille but below the limit v
425. tive power window The power win dows can only be controlled with one control panel at a time In order that the power windows can be used the remote control key must be in position I or Il After the car has been running the power windows can be operated for several minutes even when the remote control key has been removed but not however after the door has been opened Closing of the windows is stopped and the window is opened if anything prevents its movement It is possible to force the pinch pro tection when closing has been interrupted e g with ice by continuously holding the button up until the window is closed The pinch protec tion is reactivated after a brief pause One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly Operating without auto Move one of the controls up down gently The power windows move up down as long as the control is held in position Operating with auto Move one of the controls up down to the end position and release it The window runs auto matically to its end position Operating with the remote control key and central locking To remotely operate the power windows from the outside with the remote control key or from inside with central locking see pages 49 and 60 Resetting If the battery is disconnected then the function for automatic opening must be reset so that it can work correctly 1 Gently raise the fr
426. to power windows and sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car Loss of a remote control key If you lose a remote control key then new ones can be ordered at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended The remain ing remote control keys must then be taken to the workshop The code of the missing remote 1 Only in combination with power driver s seat and power mirrors 2 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors control key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked in the menu system MY CAR under Information Number of keys For a description of the menu system see page 148 Key memory door mirrors and driver s seat The settings are automatically connected to each respective remote control key see pages 85 and 105 The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Car key memory For a description of the menu system see page 148 For cars with Keyless drive system see page 57 Indicator for locking unlocking When the car is locked or unlocked using the remote control key the direction indicators confirm that locking unlocking was correctly performed e Locking one flash and the door mirrors are folded in e Unlocking two flashes and the door mir rors are folded out After locking the indication is only g
427. tomatic gearbox the adaptive cruise control has the Queue Assistant function sometimes also referred to as Queue Assist Queue Assistant has the following functions e Extended speed range e Change of target e Automatic braking ceases when stationary 6 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant it manages right down to stationary e Automatic activation parking brake Note that the lowest programmable speed for the cruise control is 30 km h even though the cruise control is capable of following another vehicle down to a standstill a lower speed cannot be selected Extended speed range In order to activate the cruise control the driver s door must be closed and the driver must be wearing the seatbelt e With the automatic gearbox the cruise con trol can follow another vehicle within the range of 0 200 km h right down to sta tionary and up to 200 km h Activation of the cruise control below 30 km h requires a vehicle in front within a reasonable distance For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is auto matically resumed if the stops do not exceed about 3 seconds if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the cruise F i 7 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 gt gt 183 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 04 184 Adaptive cruise contr
428. trol system Ina semi cold climate zone diesel driven cars have an electric additional heater instead of a fuel driven version The heater cannot be controlled manually but is instead activated automatically after the engine has been started in outside tempera tures below 14 C and is switched off after the set passenger compartment temperature has been reached ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure O 04 169 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Trip computer General 01010 tn to empty tank 04 Information display and controls READ confirms 2 Thumbwheel browse between menus and options in the trip computer list RESET resets The trip computer s menu is in a variable loop One of the menu options is a blank display it also marks the beginning end of the loop Functions If a warning message appears when the trip computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip com puter can be reactivated Acknowledge the warning message by pressing READ To change unit for distance and speed go to MY CAR gt Settings gt System options gt Distance and fuel unit see page 148 Average speed Average speed is calculated from the last resetting Reset using RESET Instantaneous Current fuel consumption is calculated every second The information on the display is updated every couple of second
429. tton on either front door e Press one side of the button to lock the other side to unlock Unlocking A door can be unlocked from the inside in two different ways e Press the central locking button fall Press and hold at least 4 seconds to also open all the side windows simultaneously 02 Locks and alarm Locking unlocking e Pull the door handle once and release the door is unlocked Pull the door handle again to open the door Locking e Press the central locking button after the front doors have been closed Press and hold at least 2 seconds to also close all the side windows and the sunroof simultaneously All doors can also be individually locked man ually with their lock buttons the door in ques tion must then be closed Global opening Press and hold the central locking button at least 4 seconds to also open all the win dows simultaneously for example to quickly ventilate the passenger compartment during hot weather Automatic locking The doors and tailgate are locked automati cally when the car starts to move The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Lock settings gt Doors automatic lock For a description of the menu system see page 148 Glovebox j Ey ee F co N to 2 f 0 The glovebox can only be locked unlocked using the remote control key s detachable key blade For informa
430. u system One press Keypad with thumbwheel for voice on the thumbwheel leads to the menu recognition equivalent to MENU or confirms a selec tion OK in the menu system and accepts phone calls Voice recognition for Bluetooth con nected mobile phone and navigation sys tem Short presses scroll between disc tracks or preset radio stations Long presses are used to fast forward and rewind disc Headphones with an impedance of us tracks 16 32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher are recommended for best sound reproduc Volume tion Short presses scroll between disc tracks EXIT leads up in the menu system Inter bec or preset radio stations Long presses rupt current function end refuse phone are used to fast forward and rewind disc calls clear entered characters One long tracks press leads to the highest menu level parent view see page 230 Volume Thumbwheel turn up down to scroll up 2 EXIT leads up in the menu system Inter and down in the menu system One press rupt current function end refuse phone on the thumbwheel leads to the menu calls clear entered characters One long equivalent to MENU or confirms a selec 2 Does not apply to DAB 3 Only cars with navigation gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 231 05 Infotainment system 05 232 Quick start Limitations The audio source e g FM1 AM Disc etc being played bac
431. uckle and then let the belt retract If the seatbelt does not retract fully feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose The seatbelt locks and cannot be with drawn e if it is pulled out too quickly e during braking and acceleration e if the car leans heavily Make sure that you e donot use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly e ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything e the hip strap must be positioned low down not over the abdomen e tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder The seatbelts and airbags interact If a seat belt is not used or is used incorrectly this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision Each seatbelt is designed for only one per son Never modify or repair the seatbelts your self Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major load such as in conjunction with a collision the entire seatbelt must be replaced Some of the protective characteristics of the seat belt may have been lost even if it appears to be undamaged In addition replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged The new seatbelt must be type approved and intended for installation in the same position as the replaced seatbelt Seatbelts Seatbelts and pregnancy o o D S A 3
432. ucks buses and motorcycles In darkness the system reacts to the head lamps of surrounding vehicles If the head lamps of surrounding vehicles are not switched on then the system does not detect the vehi cles This means for example that the system does not react to a trailer without headlamps which is towed behind a car or truck The system does not react to cyclists or moped riders The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to those of the human eye i e they do not see as well e g in heavy snowfall against strong light or in thick fog 216 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Comfort and driving pleasure O BLIS Blind Spot Information System In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam era lenses must be clean The lenses can be Blind spot syst Reduced function in illuminate despite there being no other vehicle cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge Reduced function the data transmis within the blind spot Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not sion between the scratched BLIS system s cam era and the car s BS mu electrical svstem tne indicator lamp illuminates on Iso Q IMPORTANT a lated occasions despite there being no The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice The camera resets other vehicle within the blind spot then this or snow lf necessary brush snow away itself when the data does not mean that a fault
433. ult in danger to life Never leave the engine run ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf ficient ventilation Option accessory for more information see Introduction 07 Wheels and tyres 07 gt gt 323 07 Wheels and tyres 07 324 Emergency puncture repair TMK WARNING Replacing the sealing fluid canister Replace the bottle when the expiration date has passed Treat the old bottle as environ mentally hazardous waste 3 Connect the cable to one of the car s 12 V sockets and start the car WARNING Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running The bottle contains 1 2 Ethanol and natural 4 Start the compressor by flicking the switch rubber latex to position I Harmful if ingested Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact IMPORTANT Risk of overheating The compressor must Avoid contact with the skin and eyes 5 Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table see page 389 Release air using the pres sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high 6 Switch off the compressor Detach the air hose and cable 7 Refit the dust cap a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 07 Wheels and tyres CT 326 X el A 328 E o Races dates sae EEEE aaa AEEA EENE aE EEn 399 Wiper blades AHODWASD CY Tic a Sisias2i s 0 c0sesneesecsesces
434. ures see page 276 DVD disc s menu If a DVD video disc is played back then this menu option is shown in the pop up menu For general information on menu navigation and menu structures see page 276 RSE Rear Seat Entertainment system Menu settings from the rear TV screen For general information on menu navigation and menu structures see page 276 Random See page 245 Repeat folder See page 245 DivX Video On Demand The media player can be registered in order to play DivX VOD type files from burned discs or USB The code for registration is available in disc mode or USB mode under DivX VOD code For more information visit www divx com vod USB hub It is possible to connect a USB hub to the USB connection see page 248 3 Applies to CD Audio CD DVD discs USB and iPod 4 Applies to CD DVD discs and USB TV settings Searching TV channels Preset list See page 254 Save the available TV channels as presets See page 255 Scanning the TV channels See page 255 Music video radio and TV Playing back music It is possible to play back music from disc tracks audio files via the car s media player USB port AUX input or via streaming audio files from a Bluetooth connected phone The system only supports one iPod user at a time in the navigation mode playlist For more information about media players USB AUX and Media Bluetooth see the pages 243 247 and 250 1 Switc
435. ut the error message being logged in which case carry out all the steps without starting the car The error message is cleared when the car is locked When the Alcolock is installed either the Bypass or Emergency function is selected as the bypassing option This setting can be changed afterwards at a workshop 1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Activating the Bypass function e Depress and hold the left hand stalk switch READ button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for approx 5 seconds the display first shows Bypass activated Wait 1 minute and then Alcoguard Bypass enabled after which the engine can be started This function can be activated several times The error message shown during driving can only be cleared at a workshop Activating the Emergency function e Depress and hold the left hand stalk switch READ button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for approx 5 seconds the display shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the engine can be started This function can be used once after which a reset must be made at a workshop Alcoguard Symbols and display messages In addition to the previously described mes sages the combined instrument panel s dis play can also show the following Display text Meaning Action Alcoguard Restart The engine has been possible switched off for less than 30 minutes engine starting pos sible without
436. uto starts without driver intervention An auto stopped engine may restart in some cases without the driver having decided that the journey should continue i Option accessory for more information see Introduction In the following cases the engine auto starts even if the driver has not depressed the clutch pedal in order to engage a gear e Misting forms on the windows e Outside temperature is below O or above 30 C There is a temporarily high current take off or battery capacity has dropped to the low est permissible level e The car is rolling faster than the equivalent normal walking pace e Repeated pumping of the brake pedal WARNING Do not open the bonnet when the engine has auto stopped the engine may sud denly auto start In order to avoid auto star ting with raised bonnet e First engage a gear and apply the park ing brake or take the remote control key from the ignition switch The engine does not auto start In the following cases the engine does not auto start after having auto stopped The driver s seatbelt buckle has been Opened a display text prompts the driver to start the engine normally A gear is engaged without declutching a display text prompts the driver to set the gear lever in neutral position in order to enable auto start Involuntary engine stop In the event that a start up fails and the engine stops proceed as follows T Depress the clutch pedal again the
437. vate certain functions of a Bluetooth connected mobile phone and in Volvo s navigation system RTI Road and Traffic Information System while the driver can keep his her hands on the wheel at the same time The input data are in dialogue form with spoken commands from the user and ver bal replies from the system The voice recog nition system uses the same microphone as the Bluetooth handsfree system see illustra tion on page 258 and the voice recognition system s replies come via the car s speakers 1 Only applies to vehicles equipped with Volvo s navigation system RTI Road and Traffic Information System i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Remember G043875 Steering wheel keypad Button for voice recognition To activate the system Before voice commands to a mobile phone can be used the mobile phone must be paired and connected via Bluetooth handsfree If a tele phone command is given and no mobile phone is paired then the system will provide informa tion about this For information on pairing and connecting a mobile phone see page 259 e Press the button for voice recognition 1 in order to activate the system and initiate a dialogue with voice commands The sys tem will then display commonly used com mands in the TV screen in the centre con sole Keep the following things in mind when you use the voice recognition system e Foracommand speak after the tone
438. ve coating After a period of use the natural appearance of the leather will nevertheless emerge depend ing more or less on the surface texture of the leather This is a natural maturing of the leather and shows that it is a natural product To achieve best results Volvo recommends cleaning and the application of protective cream once to four times per year or more if necessary The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail able from your Volvo dealer IMPORTANT e Certain items of coloured clothing for example jeans and suede garments may stain the upholstery e Never use strong solvents Such prod ucts may damage fabric vinyl and leather upholstery Washing instructions for leather upholstery 1 Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened sponge and squeeze out a strong foam 2 Work the dirt away with gentle circular movements 3 Dab accurately with the sponge on the stains Allow the sponge to absorb the stain Do not rub 4 Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and allow the leather to dry completely Protective treatment of leather upholstery 1 Pour a small amount of the protective cream on the felted cloth and massage in a thin layer of cream with gentle circular movements on the leather 2 Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes before use The leather has now been given improved pro tection against stains and improved UV pro tection Washing instructions for the leather steering wheel e R
439. vigation and park assist camera For more information on all functions systems see the respective section in the owner s man ual ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 81 03 Your driving environment D 03 D 03 Your driving environment 03 82 Key positions Insert and remove the remote control key G045198 Ignition switch with remote control key extracted inserted OLE For cars with keyless function see page 57 Insert the key Hold the end of the remote control key with the detachable key blade and insert the key in the ignition switch Then press the key in the lock up to its end position IMPORTANT Foreign objects in the ignition switch may jeopardise the function or destroy the lock Do not press the remote control key incor rectly turned Hold the end with the detach able key blade see page 51 Withdraw the key Push the remote control key allow it to eject then pull it out Functions The remote control key s 3 different key posi tions 0 I and Il can be reached without the need to start the engine The table shows the functions available in each key position To reach key position I or II without starting the engine do not depress the brake clutch pedal when the following operations are carried out Key position 0 Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and push it in to the end position z Option accessor
440. when han dling the laser sensor The following two labels in English are fitted directly on the laser sensor unit INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS MAGNIFIERS CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT Max average power 45mW Pulse duration 33ns Wavelength 905nm IEC 60825 1 1993 A2 2001 Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No 50 dated July 26 2001 The upper label in the figure describes the laser beam s classification e Laser radiation Do not look into the laser beam with optical instruments Class 1M laser product The lower label in the figure describes the laser beam s physical data e EC 60825 1 1993 A2 2001 Complies with FDA U S Food Administration stand ards for laser product design with the exception of deviations in accordance with Laser Notice No 50 from 26 July 2001 Radiation data for the laser sensor The following table specifies the laser sensor s physical data Maximum pulse energy 2 64 uJ Maximum average output 45 mW Pulse duration 33 ns Divergence horizontal x verti 28 x 12 cal Never look into the laser sensor which emits spreading invisible laser radiation at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magnifying optics such as a magnifying glass microscope lens or similar opti cal instruments Testing repair removal adjustment and or replacement of the laser sen
441. with the driver The system is designed to work most effec tively when driving in dense traffic on multi lane highways 04 When a camera 1 has detected a vehicle inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp 2 BLIS camera illuminates with a constant glow Indicator lamp 3 6 BLIS symbol E The lamp illuminates on the side of the car A approx 9 5 m and B approx 3 0 m BLIS is an information system based on cam where the system has detected the vehicle era technology that under certain conditions If the car is overtaken on both sides at the can help the driver to notice vehicles moving in same time then both lamps illuminate the same direction as the host vehicle in the so called blind spot BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault arises in the system If for example the sys tem s cameras are obscured then the BLIS indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown on the information display In such cases check and clean the lenses 1 NOTE The illustration is schematic details may vary depending on car model gt gt if Option accessory for more information see Introduction 215 O 04 Comfort and driving pleasure BLIS Blind Spot Information System Activate deactivate pa e 04 Button for activating deactivating BLIS is activated when the engine is started The indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times when BLIS is activated The system can be deactivat
442. x All Manual M66 Automatic TF 80SC Manual MMT6 Automatic MPS6 Manual MMT6 Automatic MPS6 Manual MMT6 Automatic MPS6 Automatic TF 80SC Automatic TF 80SC Automatic TF 80SC Manual MMT6 Manual M66 Automatic TF 80SC Manual M66 Max weight braked trailer kg 1200 1600 1800 1600 1600 1600 1600 1800 1800 1800 1800 2000 1300 1600 1600 1800 09 Specifications Dimensions and weights Max towball load kg 50 15 90 a T5 a 15 90 90 90 90 90 19 KE 13 90 01 10 00 11 09 gt gt 09 Specifications 09 Dimensions and weights Gearbox Max weight braked trailer kg Max towball load kg D5 Automatic TF 80SC 2000 90 D5 AWD Automatic TF 80SC 2000 90 A Certain markets B DRIVe for certain markets C Without Start Stop Gearbox Max weight braked trailer kg Max towball load kg All All 1200 50 3 2 AWD Automatic TF 80SC 1800 90 T6 AWD Automatic TF 80SC 2000 90 DRIVe Manual M66 1600 a D3 Automatic TF 80SC 1600 TES D3 AWD Manual M66 2100 90 D3 AWD Automatic TF 80SC 2100 90 D5 AWD Manual M66 2100 90 D5 AWD Automatic TF 80SC 2100 90 09 Specifications Dimensions and PO Dimensions and weights 09 Max weight unbraked trailer kg Max towball load kg 750 50 01 10 010 111 09 09 Specifications Engine specifications Engine specifications OKT Not all engines are available in all markets V70 Engine
443. y To connect a mobile phone for the first time follow the instructions below There are two options for connecting a mobile phone either via the car s menu system or via the mobile phone s menu system If one option does not work then try with the other Alternative 1 via the car s menu system 1 Make the mobile phone detectable visible via Bluetooth see the mobile phone s manual or www volvocars com 2 Activate the vehicle s handsfree function by pressing TEL Continue by pressing OK MENU 3 Select Change phone press OK MENU gt The menu option Add phone is shown on the TV screen If one or more mobile phones have already been paired then these are also shown Press OK MENU 4 Check that the mobile phone s Bluetooth function is switched on and press OK MENU gt The audio system searches for mobile phones in the vicinity The search takes approximately 30 seconds The mobile phones detected are specified with their respective Bluetooth name in the TV screen The handsfree function s Bluetooth name is shown in the mobile phone as My Volvo Car 5 Choose one of the mobile phones in the centre console TV screen 6 Enter the series of numbers that is shown in the centre console TV screen via the mobile phone s keypad and press the mobile phone s button to confirm the selection 05 Infotainment system Alternative 2 via the mobile phone s menu system 1 Activate the handsfree functio
444. y for more information see Introduction Key position l With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch Briefly press START STOP ENGINE Key position Il With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch Press START STOP ENGINE for about 2 seconds From key position II to With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch Briefly press START STOP ENGINE Back to key position 0 Toresume key position 0 from position I Open the driver s door 03 Your driving environment EN Key positions 0 Odometer clock and tempera ture gauge are illuminated The audio system can be used 03 l Sunroof power windows 12 V socket in the passenger compart ment RTI phone ventilation fan ECC and windscreen wipers can be used The steering lock is deactivated lI The headlamps come on Warn ing indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds All equipment oper ates apart from heated seats and rear window defroster which only work when the engine is running For information on the audio system s func tions with remote control key removed see page 226 Starting and stopping the engine For information about starting switching off the engine see page 115 Towing For important information about the remote control key during towing see page 307 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 83 D 03 Your driving environment 0
445. y ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard The sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm IMPORTANT Diesel type fuels that must not be used e Special additives e Marine diesel fuel e Heating oil e FAME Fatty Acid Methyl Ester and vegetable oil These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty 06 Empty tank The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel the gt gt 06 During your journey 06 292 tank may need to be vented in the workshop in order to restart the engine after fuelling Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star vation the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check Do this before starting the engine once the fuel tank has been filled with diesel 1 Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and push it in to the end position see page 82 2 Press the START button without depress ing the brake and or clutch pedal 3 Wait approx 1 minute To start the engine Depress the brake and or clutch pedal and then press the START button again Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel shortage e Stop the car on as flat level ground as possible if the car is tilting there is a risk of air pockets in the fuel supply Draining condensation from the fuel filter

Owners Manual - ESD

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents